Huawei Optix Metro 1000 Installation Guide(v300r005) 231e30
This document was ed by and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this report form. Report 2z6p3t
Overview 5o1f4z
& View Huawei Optix Metro 1000 Installation Guide(v300r005) as PDF for free.
More details 6z3438
- Words: 45,830
- Pages: 219
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System V300R005
Installation Guide
Issue
02
Date
2008-09-10
Part Number
00435192
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical and service. For any assistance, please our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Installation Preparation............................................................................................................1-1 1.1 About the OptiX 155/622H.............................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Installation Flow..............................................................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Required Documents and Tools......................................................................................................................1-3 1.3.1 Technical Documents.............................................................................................................................1-4 1.3.2 Tools and Instruments............................................................................................................................1-4 1.4 Installation Environment Check......................................................................................................................1-9 1.5 Unpacking the Equipment...............................................................................................................................1-9 1.5.1 Unpacking the Cabinet...........................................................................................................................1-9 1.5.2 Unpacking the Chassis.........................................................................................................................1-12 1.5.3 Unpacking Boards................................................................................................................................1-14 1.5.4 Requirements of Inspection..................................................................................................................1-16 1.6 Checking the Equipment...............................................................................................................................1-16
2 Installing the Chassis................................................................................................................2-1 2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in a Series-C Integrated Cabinet......................................................2-2 2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 600 mm-Deep Cabinet or a 19-Inch Cabinet.................2-3 2.2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis Along the Slide Rail................................................................2-4 2.2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Upward.................................2-6 2.2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Downward............................2-9 2.2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis – Cabling from the Front .............................................2-12 2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 300 mm-Deep Cabinet.................................................2-13 2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in the Open Rack............................................................................2-18 2.5 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an Access Network Cabinet.......................................................2-20 2.6 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis on the Wall.....................................................................................2-21 2.6.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using a Rotary Subrack...................................................2-22 2.6.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using the Suspension Bracket..........................................2-25 2.7 Desktop Mounting.........................................................................................................................................2-27 2.8 Checking the Installation...............................................................................................................................2-27
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis................................................................3-1 3.1 About the Chassis............................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Environmental Requirements..........................................................................................................................3-2 Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
Contents
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3.3 Installing the Chassis.......................................................................................................................................3-3 3.3.1 Locating Installation Holes of the Chassis.............................................................................................3-3 3.3.2 Installing the Expansion Bolts................................................................................................................3-5 3.3.3 Installing Mounting Parts ......................................................................................................................3-7 3.3.4 Fixing the Chassis..................................................................................................................................3-8 3.3.5 Installing the Handle..............................................................................................................................3-9 3.3.6 Assembling the Chassis .......................................................................................................................3-10 3.3.7 Installing and Routing the Cables .......................................................................................................3-11 3.3.8 Installation Result ................................................................................................................................3-13 3.4 Checking the Installation ..............................................................................................................................3-13
4 Installing the UPM Power System .........................................................................................4-1 4.1 About the UPM Power System ......................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.1 Power Box .............................................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.2 Storage Battery ......................................................................................................................................4-4 4.1.3 Installation Mode ...................................................................................................................................4-5 4.2 Installing the Storage Battery and Power Box ...............................................................................................4-6 4.2.1 Installing the Storage Batteries..............................................................................................................4-6 4.2.2 Installing the Power Box in a 19-Inch Cabinet or an ETSI Cabinet .....................................................4-8 4.2.3 Installing the Power Box on the Wall .................................................................................................4-10 4.3 Installing the UPM Power Cables ................................................................................................................4-12 4.4 Checking the Installation ..............................................................................................................................4-14
5 Installing and Routing the Cables .........................................................................................5-1 5.1 Installing the PGND Cables............................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.1 About the Cables....................................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.2 Installation Procedures...........................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Installing the Power Cable..............................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.1 About the Power Cables ........................................................................................................................5-4 5.2.2 Installation Procedures ..........................................................................................................................5-4 5.3 Installing the E1/T1 Cables.............................................................................................................................5-6 5.3.1 About the E1/T1 Cables.........................................................................................................................5-6 5.3.2 Installation Procedures ..........................................................................................................................5-9 5.4 Installing E3/T3/STM-1e Cables..................................................................................................................5-11 5.4.1 About the E3/T3/STM-1e Cables.........................................................................................................5-11 5.4.2 Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................5-11 5.5 Installing Ethernet Cables ............................................................................................................................5-12 5.5.1 About the Ethernet Cable.....................................................................................................................5-12 5.5.2 Installing Procedures............................................................................................................................5-14 5.6 Installing the Framed E1 Cable.....................................................................................................................5-15 5.6.1 About the Framed E1 Cable.................................................................................................................5-15 5.6.2 Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................5-18 5.7 Installing the NM Cable ...............................................................................................................................5-19 5.7.1 About the NM Cable ...........................................................................................................................5-20 ii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Contents
5.7.2 Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................5-20 5.8 Installing the External Clock Cable..............................................................................................................5-21 5.8.1 About the External Clock Cable...........................................................................................................5-22 5.8.2 Installation Procedure...........................................................................................................................5-22 5.9 Installing the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable ..................................................................................5-23 5.9.1 About the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable...............................................................................5-24 5.9.2 Installation Procedure ..........................................................................................................................5-26 5.10 Checking the Cable Installation..................................................................................................................5-28
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers...................................................................................6-1 6.1 About Fiber Jumpers ......................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Installation Procedure .....................................................................................................................................6-3 6.3 Checking the Installation ................................................................................................................................6-6
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone ..............................................................................................7-1 7.1 About the Orderwire Interface........................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone ......................................................................................................................7-2 7.2.1 Installing the Orderwire Phone in the Cabinet ......................................................................................7-2 7.2.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone in an Open Rack ..................................................................................7-3 7.3 Checking the Orderwire Phone Installation....................................................................................................7-5
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment.........................................................................8-1 8.1 Powering On the Cabinet................................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.1 Checking Fuse Currents of the Power Supply.......................................................................................8-2 8.1.2 Testing the Resistance Between the Power Cable Terminals of the Cabinet ........................................8-3 8.1.3 Powering On a Cabinet..........................................................................................................................8-5 8.2 Powering On the Chassis ................................................................................................................................8-6 8.3 Checking the Fan Running Status...................................................................................................................8-7
9 Operation Environment Requirements.................................................................................9-1 9.1 Requirements for the Equipment Room Environment....................................................................................9-3 9.2 Layout of Equipment Room............................................................................................................................9-4 9.3 Construction of the Equipment Room.............................................................................................................9-4 9.4 Cleanliness of the Equipment Room...............................................................................................................9-6 9.5 Temperature and Humidity.............................................................................................................................9-7 9.6 Corrosive Gas Control Requirements.............................................................................................................9-8 9.7 Electromagnetic Requirements.......................................................................................................................9-8 9.8 Antistatic Protection........................................................................................................................................9-9 9.9 Lightning Protection and Grounding Requirements.......................................................................................9-9 9.10 Power Supply..............................................................................................................................................9-11 9.11 Lighting in the Equipment Room................................................................................................................9-15 9.12 Protection System........................................................................................................................................9-15
10 Grounding Specifications.....................................................................................................10-1 10.1 General Grounding Specifications..............................................................................................................10-2 Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Contents
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10.2 Grounding Specifications for the Building.................................................................................................10-2 10.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications.........................................................................................................10-2 10.4 Grounding Specifications for Office Power................................................................................................10-3 10.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables...............................................................................................10-4 10.6 Specifications for Managing Ground Cables..............................................................................................10-4
11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling...................................................................11-1 11.1 The Requirements of Cabling.....................................................................................................................11-2 11.2 The Requirements of Bundling...................................................................................................................11-2
12 Engineering Labels................................................................................................................12-1 12.1 Introduction to Labels.................................................................................................................................12-2 12.1.1 Material..............................................................................................................................................12-2 12.1.2 Type and Shape..................................................................................................................................12-2 12.2 Information Carried on Labels....................................................................................................................12-4 12.2.1 For Power Cables...............................................................................................................................12-4 12.2.2 For Signal Cables...............................................................................................................................12-4 12.2.3 Remarks..............................................................................................................................................12-5 12.3 Filling Information on Labels.....................................................................................................................12-5 12.3.1 Printing Labels...................................................................................................................................12-5 12.3.2 Writing Labels....................................................................................................................................12-8 12.4 Affixing Labels...........................................................................................................................................12-8 12.4.1 Affixing the Label to the Signal Cable...............................................................................................12-9 12.4.2 Affixing the Label to the Power Cable.............................................................................................12-10 12.5 Common Engineering Labels....................................................................................................................12-10 12.5.1 Power Cables....................................................................................................................................12-11 12.5.2 External Alarm Cables.....................................................................................................................12-12 12.5.3 Ethernet Cables................................................................................................................................12-13 12.5.4 Fibers Between Two Devices...........................................................................................................12-14 12.5.5 Fiber That Connects the Device and the ODF.................................................................................12-16 12.5.6 Trunk Cables....................................................................................................................................12-17 12.5.7 Subscriber Cables.............................................................................................................................12-20
13 Binding Strap..........................................................................................................................13-1 13.1 Binding Strap...............................................................................................................................................13-2 13.1.1 Architecture........................................................................................................................................13-2 13.1.2 Cutting................................................................................................................................................13-2 13.2 Bundling the Binding Strap.........................................................................................................................13-4 13.2.1 Procedures for Bundling the Binding Strap.......................................................................................13-4 13.2.2 Expected Result..................................................................................................................................13-5 13.2.3 Precautions.........................................................................................................................................13-6
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector........................................................................14-1 14.1 Making the Connector for the Coaxial Cable..............................................................................................14-2 14.1.1 Making the Straight BNC Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable.....................................................14-2 iv
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Contents
14.1.2 Making the L9-M Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable.................................................................14-7 14.1.3 Making the Straight SMB Female Connector for the Coaxial Cable...............................................14-11 14.2 Continuity Test of the Coaxial Cable........................................................................................................14-15
A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figures
Figures Figure 1-1 Appearance of OptiX 155/622H.........................................................................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Installation flow..................................................................................................................................1-3 Figure 1-3 Straighten the tongues......................................................................................................................1-11 Figure 1-4 Remove the cover.............................................................................................................................1-11 Figure 1-5 Remove the surrounded wooden board............................................................................................1-12 Figure 1-6 Unpacking the chassis......................................................................................................................1-13 Figure 1-7 Board carton.....................................................................................................................................1-15 Figure 2-1 Fixing the chassis................................................................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 OptiX 155/622H that is installed in a series-C integrated cabinet......................................................2-3 Figure 2-3 Fixing the mounting ears....................................................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-4 Fixing the chassis................................................................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-5 Installing the chassis along the slide rail............................................................................................2-6 Figure 2-6 Removing the screws from the side of the chassis ............................................................................2-7 Figure 2-7 Fastening the chassis on the mounting ears........................................................................................2-7 Figure 2-8 Fastening the captive nuts to the standing posts.................................................................................2-8 Figure 2-9 Installing the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing upward ...............................................................................................................................................................................2-9 Figure 2-10 Fixing the mounting ear of the chassis...........................................................................................2-10 Figure 2-11 Fixing the chassis to the cabinet.....................................................................................................2-11 Figure 2-12 Installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet with the mounting ears facing downward .............................................................................................................................................................................2-12 Figure 2-13 Fixing the mounting ear to the chassis...........................................................................................2-13 Figure 2-14 Structure of the rotary subrack.......................................................................................................2-14 Figure 2-15 Putting flat the suspension bracket.................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-16 Fixing the chassis............................................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-17 Positioning hole at the bottom of the OptiX 155/622H chassis.....................................................2-16 Figure 2-18 Fixing the chassis ...........................................................................................................................2-16 Figure 2-19 OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet.......................................................................2-18 Figure 2-20 OptiX 155/622H installed in the type-B open rack........................................................................2-20 Figure 2-21 OptiX 155/622H equipment in the ONU512 and ONU1000A......................................................2-21 Figure 2-22 Positioning the suspension bracket.................................................................................................2-22 Figure 2-23 Inserting expansion bolts and expansion nuts................................................................................2-23 Figure 2-24 Positioning the suspension bracket.................................................................................................2-23 Figure 2-25 Schematic diagram for wall mounting............................................................................................2-24 Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
Figures
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide Figure 2-26 OptiX 155/622H that is installed on the wall by using the rotary subrack.....................................2-25 Figure 2-27 Hanging the chassis on the suspension bracket..............................................................................2-26 Figure 2-28 Fixing the chassis............................................................................................................................2-26 Figure 2-29 OptiX 155/622H installed on the wall by using the suspension bracket........................................2-27 Figure 3-1 Outline drawing of the OptiX 155/622H chassis................................................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Allowing 350 mm clearance above the chassis..................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-3 Determining the locations for the installation holes...........................................................................3-5 Figure 3-4 Expansion bolt assembly....................................................................................................................3-6 Figure 3-5 Putting the expansion bolt assembly into the hole.............................................................................3-6 Figure 3-6 Removing the bolt assembly...............................................................................................................3-7 Figure 3-7 Securing the hangers...........................................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-8 Fixing the chassis................................................................................................................................3-9 Figure 3-9 Fixing the handle..............................................................................................................................3-10 Figure 3-10 Installation result............................................................................................................................3-11 Figure 3-11 Connecting the cables of the UPM ................................................................................................3-12 Figure 3-12 Wall-mounted OptiX 155/622H chassis.........................................................................................3-13 Figure 4-1 Front view of the power box ..............................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 Rear view of the power box ...............................................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-3 Power cable and management cable ..................................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-4 Storage battery pallet..........................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-5 Storage battery box.............................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-6 The pallet removed two partition bars................................................................................................4-7 Figure 4-7 Batteries installed in the pallet ...........................................................................................................4-8 Figure 4-8 Installing the mounting ears (in a 19-inch cabinet)............................................................................4-9 Figure 4-9 Installing the mounting ears (in an ETSI cabinet)..............................................................................4-9 Figure 4-10 Installing the power box ................................................................................................................4-10 Figure 4-11 Installing the expansion bolt and expansion tube...........................................................................4-11 Figure 4-12 Securing the OptiX 155/622H chassis ...........................................................................................4-11 Figure 4-13 Fixing the suspension bracket ........................................................................................................4-12 Figure 4-14 Connecting the DC power to the system........................................................................................4-13 Figure 4-15 Cable connection of the integrated wall-mounting cabinet ...........................................................4-14 Figure 5-1 PGND cable........................................................................................................................................5-2 Figure 5-2 Installation result of the PGND cable on the equipment side of the OptiX 155/622H......................5-3 Figure 5-3 Power cable ........................................................................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-4 Connection of the power cable...........................................................................................................5-5 Figure 5-5 Structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable.......................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-6 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable..................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-7 Installing the cable with a DB78 connector .....................................................................................5-10 Figure 5-8 E3/T3/STM-1e cable........................................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-9 Connector of the Ethernet cable.......................................................................................................5-13 Figure 5-10 Framed E1 cable on the FP2D board .............................................................................................5-15 Figure 5-11 Installing the Framed E1 cable.......................................................................................................5-19 viii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figures
Figure 5-12 Standard shielded network cable....................................................................................................5-20 Figure 5-13 Position of the NM interface on the SCB board.............................................................................5-20 Figure 5-14 Installing the NM cable..................................................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-15 Structure of the external clock cable..............................................................................................5-22 Figure 5-16 Structure of the transparent data/housekeeping cable....................................................................5-24 Figure 5-17 Installing transparent data/housekeeping cable .............................................................................5-27 Figure 6-1 Fiber connectors................................................................................................................................. 6-3 Figure 6-2 Cable holes on the cabinet .................................................................................................................6-5 Figure 6-3 Installing the fiber jumper ................................................................................................................. 6-6 Figure 6-4 Attaching a label.................................................................................................................................6-6 Figure 7-1 Orderwire interface ............................................................................................................................7-2 Figure 7-2 Fixing the orderwire phone set in the cabinet ....................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-3 Position for installing the orderwire phone in the open rack .............................................................7-4 Figure 8-1 Figure 12-1 Positions of the terminals in the DC distribution box.....................................................8-4 Figure 9-1 Layout of the equipment room........................................................................................................... 9-4 Figure 9-2 Internal partition wall of the equipment room....................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-3 Transient noises................................................................................................................................9-14 Figure 11-1 Cable bundling................................................................................................................................11-3 Figure 12-1 Label for signal cables....................................................................................................................12-3 Figure 12-2 Label for power cables....................................................................................................................12-4 Figure 12-3 Label for signal cables....................................................................................................................12-5 Figure 12-4 Template of label............................................................................................................................12-6 Figure 12-5 Warning prompt before printing.....................................................................................................12-7 Figure 12-6 Writing direction of the label..........................................................................................................12-8 Figure 12-7 Sticking the label onto proper position of the signal cable.............................................................12-9 Figure 12-8 Appearance of affixed labels on power cables.............................................................................12-10 Figure 12-9 Example of the labels on the DC power cable..............................................................................12-12 Figure 12-10 Example of the label on the alarm cable.....................................................................................12-13 Figure 12-11 Example of the label on the Ethernet cable................................................................................12-14 Figure 12-12 Example of the label on the fiber jumper between two devices.................................................12-15 Figure 12-13 Example of the label on the fiber jumper between the device and the ODF..............................12-17 Figure 12-14 Example of the label on the trunk cable between two devices...................................................12-19 Figure 12-15 Example of the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF................................12-19 Figure 12-16 Example of the label on the subscriber cable.............................................................................12-21 Figure 13-1 Binding strap...................................................................................................................................13-2 Figure 13-2 Install binding strap on cutterbar....................................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-3 Cut the binding strap.......................................................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-4 Step 2 of bundling optical fiber......................................................................................................13-5 Figure 13-5 Step 3 of bundling optical fiber......................................................................................................13-5 Figure 13-6 Bundling result of optical fiber.......................................................................................................13-5 Figure 14-1 BNC connector and the coaxial cable.............................................................................................14-3 Figure 14-2 Stripping off the coaxial cable........................................................................................................14-3 Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
Figures
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide Figure 14-3 Size of the straight BNC male connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable....................14-4 Figure 14-4 Leading the heat shrink tube and crimping sleeve through............................................................14-5 Figure 14-5 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable...................................................................14-5 Figure 14-6 Inserting the straight BNC male connector into the coaxial cable.................................................14-5 Figure 14-7 Welding the internal conductor......................................................................................................14-6
Figure 14-8 Crimping the external conductor....................................................................................................14-6 Figure 14-9 Blowing the heat shrink tube..........................................................................................................14-6 Figure 14-10 Installing the components of the coaxial cable.............................................................................14-7 Figure 14-11 L9-M connector and the coaxial cable..........................................................................................14-8 Figure 14-12 Stripping off the coaxial cable......................................................................................................14-8 Figure 14-13 Size of the connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable.................................................14-9 Figure 14-14 Leading the protection tube and crimping sleeve through............................................................14-9 Figure 14-15 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable.................................................................14-9 Figure 14-16 Inserting the coaxial connector into the coaxial cable................................................................14-10 Figure 14-17 Welding the internal conductor..................................................................................................14-10 Figure 14-18 Crimping the external conductor................................................................................................14-10 Figure 14-19 Rotating the protection tube tight...............................................................................................14-11 Figure 14-20 Components of the straight SMB female connector and the coaxial cable................................14-12 Figure 14-21 Stripping off the coaxial cable....................................................................................................14-12 Figure 14-22 Size of the connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable...............................................14-13 Figure 14-23 Leading the crimping sleeve through.........................................................................................14-13 Figure 14-24 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable...............................................................14-13 Figure 14-25 Inserting the coaxial connector into the coaxial cable................................................................14-13 Figure 14-26 Welding the internal conductor..................................................................................................14-14 Figure 14-27 Crimping the external conductor................................................................................................14-14 Figure 14-28 Installing the components of the coaxial cable...........................................................................14-14 Figure 14-29 Testing the coaxial cable............................................................................................................14-15
x
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Tables
Tables Table 1-1 Installation tools...................................................................................................................................1-4 Table 1-2 Meters...................................................................................................................................................1-8 Table 1-3 Items to be checked before the equipment installation......................................................................1-16 Table 4-1 Description of the Indicators ...............................................................................................................4-3 Table 4-2 Pin definitions of the management interface .......................................................................................4-3 Table 5-1 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable............................................................................................. 5-7 Table 5-2 Pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable...............................................................................5-8 Table 5-3 Connection relation of the straight-through cable..............................................................................5-13 Table 5-4 Connection relation of the crossover cable........................................................................................5-13 Table 5-5 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm Framed E1 cable................................................................................5-15 Table 5-6 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm Framed E1 cable..............................................................................5-17 Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the SYNC 1/2 external clock interface.................................................................5-22 Table 5-8 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM2 and ALM OUT1/MODEM (F) interfaces.............................................................................................................................................................5-24 Table 5-9 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM3 and OUT2 interfaces................5-25 Table 5-10 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM4 (F3) and IN1/2 interfaces.......5-25 Table 5-11 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the F2 and IN3/4 interfaces.....................5-26 Table 9-1 Construction requirements for the equipment room............................................................................ 9-4 Table 9-2 Limits of dust diameter and density in the equipment room................................................................9-6 Table 9-3 Limited density of harmful gas in the equipment room.......................................................................9-6 Table 9-4 Requirements for temperature and humidity........................................................................................9-7 Table 9-5 Corrosive gas content specification..................................................................................................... 9-8 Table 9-6 Electromagnetic specification..............................................................................................................9-8 Table 9-7 Requirements for lightning protection and grounding.......................................................................9-10 Table 9-8 DC charge/discharge status and voltage requirements.......................................................................9-12 Table 9-9 DC voltage specifications..................................................................................................................9-13 Table 10-1 General grounding specifications.....................................................................................................10-2 Table 10-2 Grounding specifications for the building........................................................................................10-2 Table 10-3 Equipment grounding specifications................................................................................................10-3 Table 10-4 Grounding specifications for office power.......................................................................................10-3 Table 10-5 Grounding specifications for signal cables......................................................................................10-4 Table 10-6 Specifications for managing ground cables.....................................................................................10-5 Table 12-1 Standard typeface for handwriting...................................................................................................12-8 Table 12-2 Information on labels affixed to the DC power cables...................................................................12-11 Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
Tables
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide Table 12-3 Information on labels affixed to the external cables of the alarm box...........................................12-12 Table 12-4 Information on labels affixed to the Ethernet cables......................................................................12-13 Table 12-5 Information on labels affixed to the fiber between two devices....................................................12-14 Table 12-6 Information on labels affixed to the fiber between the device and the ODF.................................12-16 Table 12-7 Information on labels affixed to the trunk cable between two devices..........................................12-18 Table 12-8 Information on labels affixed to the trunk cable between the device and the DDF.......................12-18 Table 12-9 Information on labels affixed to the subscriber cables...................................................................12-20 Table 14-1 Stripping sizes of the common coaxial cables.................................................................................14-4
xii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
About This Document
About This Document Overview This document describes the procedures for installing the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) (hereinafter referred to as the OptiX 155/622H), including the installation of the chassis, integrated wall-mounting chassis, UPM power system, and fibers/cables. This document also describes the grounding specifications for the OptiX 155/622H.
Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Version
OptiX 155/622H
V300R005
Intended Audience The intended audience of this document is: Hardware installation engineer
Organization The manual is organized as follows:
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Chapter
Description
1 Installation Preparation
This chapter describes the appearance, installation flow, and installation preparation of the OptiX 155/622H.
2 Installing the Chassis
This chapter describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H.
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
This chapter describes how to install the integrated wallmounting chassis.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
About This Document
Chapter
Description
4 Installing the UPM Power System
This chapter describes how to install the UPM power system, and the precautions for the installation.
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
This chapter describes how to install the fibers/cables, and the precautions for the installation.
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
This chapter describes the connection relation and installation procedures of fiber jumpers, and the precautions for the installation.
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
This chapter describes how to install the orderwire phone.
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
This chapter describes the operations required to power on the OptiX 155/622H.
9 Operation Environment Requirements
This appendix describes the environment required for the normal operation of the OptiX 155/622H.
10 Grounding Specifications
This appendix describes the grounding specifications for the normal operation of the OptiX 155/622H.
11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
This appendix describes the plan for routing and bundling the cables, and the relevant precautions.
12 Engineering Labels
This appendix describes the structure of the engineering cable labels and the rules to follow when filling the labels.
13 Binding Strap
This appendix describes the structure of the binding strap for fiber jumpers, the method of using the binding straps, and the relevant precautions.
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
This appendix lists the methods for connecting the BNC, SMB, and L9 connectors to a coaxial cable and the method for testing the continuity of the cable.
A Glossary
This appendix lists the used in this document.
Conventions Symbol Conventions The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows. Symbol
Description
DANGER
2
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Symbol
About This Document
Description
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and s are in boldface. For example, as root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Terminal display is in Courier New.
Command Conventions
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italic.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
About This Document
GUI Conventions Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operation Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressingCtrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operation Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Update History Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 02 (2008-09-10) l
The name of this document is modified.
l
Certain known defects are fixed.
Updates in Issue 01 (2008-07-01) Initial field trial release. 4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1
1 Installation Preparation
Installation Preparation
About This Chapter This chapter describes the tools and documents that are required for installing the OptiX 155/622H, and the installation procedures. 1.1 About the OptiX 155/622H This section describes the structure, dimensions, and installation mode of the OptiX 155/622H. 1.2 Installation Flow Correct installation flow is the key to ensuring a smooth and trouble-free installation. 1.3 Required Documents and Tools To ensure the smooth installation of the equipment, the necessary documentation, tools and instruments must be available. 1.4 Installation Environment Check The OptiX 155/622H can operate normally only when the equipment room is in good condition. The OptiX 155/622H is protected against lightning and interference only when it is properly grounded. 1.5 Unpacking the Equipment This section directs you to unpack cabinets and boards. Unpack integrated subrack and other cases in the same way. 1.6 Checking the Equipment The cabinet, boards, network management computer and internal cables need to be checked before the equipment installation.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
1.1 About the OptiX 155/622H This section describes the structure, dimensions, and installation mode of the OptiX 155/622H. The OptiX 155/622H is integrated case-shaped equipment, which consists of the chassis, fan board, power board, and board area. There are a number of modes that can be used for installing the OptiX 155/622H. You can choose one of the following modes based on your requirements: l
Installation in the OptiX 155/622H-C series integrated cabinet
l
Installation in the 600 mm-deep ETSI cabinet
l
Installation in the 19-inch standard cabinet
l
Installation in the 300 mm-deep ETSI cabinet
l
Installation in the open rack
l
Installation in the cabinet of the access network
l
Wall mounting
l
Desktop mounting
l
Installation in the integrated wall-mounting chassis
The dimensions of the OptiX 155/622H are 436 mm (width) x 293 mm (depth) x 86 mm (height). When the OptiX 155/622H is fully configured, the equipment weight is 10 kg. The maximum power consumption is 100 W. For the equipment structure, see Figure 1-1. Figure 1-1 Appearance of OptiX 155/622H
1-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
1.2 Installation Flow Correct installation flow is the key to ensuring a smooth and trouble-free installation. Figure 1-2 shows the procedures for installing the OptiX 155/622H. Figure 1-2 Installation flow Start Installation preparation See Chapter 1
Installing an integrated wallmounting chassis
Installing the chassis See Chapter 2
See Chapter 3
Installing the UPM power system
Installing the PGND cable See section 5.1
See Chapter 4 Installing the power cable See section 5.2
Installing and routing the cables
See Chapter 5
Installing and routing fiber jumpers
See Chapter 6
Installing the orderwire phone
Installing E1/T1 cables
See section 5.3
Installing E3/T3/STM-1e See section 5.4 cables Installing Ethernet cables
See section 5.5
Installing the Framed E1 cable
See section 5.6
Installing the NM cable
See section 5.7
Installing the external clock cable
See section 5.8
See Chapter 7 Power-on check See Chapter 8
Installing the transparent data and housekeeping cable
See section 5.9
End
1.3 Required Documents and Tools To ensure the smooth installation of the equipment, the necessary documentation, tools and instruments must be available. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
1.3.1 Technical Documents The relevant technical documentation must be available before you install the equipment. 1.3.2 Tools and Instruments The required tools and instruments include the general tools, special tools, general instruments and special instruments.
1.3.1 Technical Documents The relevant technical documentation must be available before you install the equipment. l
Written contracts, agreements and complete equipment configuration tables, provided by the .
l
Design specifications of equipment room, detailed engineering drawings and sketches, provided by the .
l
The installation guide provided by Huawei.
1.3.2 Tools and Instruments The required tools and instruments include the general tools, special tools, general instruments and special instruments. lists of the tools and instruments used in installation, refer to Table 1-1 and Table 1-2 Table 1-1 Installation tools Name and Function
Appearance
Name and Function
Steel tape:
Measuring tape:
Used to measure the length less than 5 m.
Used to measure the length greater than 5 m.
Ruler (1 m):
Spirit level:
Used to measure the length less than 1 m.
Used to check the levelness.
Marker pen:
Pencil:
Used to make marks when you draw lines.
Used to take notes.
Powder marker:
Hand-held electric drill:
Used to make marks.
Appearance
Used to drill holes.
1-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Name and Function
Appearance
1 Installation Preparation
Name and Function
Percussion drill:
Vacuum cleaner:
Used to drill holes before you install a cabinet.
Used to suck dust or drilling chips.
Flathead screwdriver (M3–M6):
Philips screwdriver (M3–M6):
Used to fasten small screws and bolts. The flathead screwdriver has a line-shaped blade.
Used to fasten small screws and bolts. The Philips screwdriver has a cross-shaped blade.
Socket spanner (M8– M12):
Adjustable spanner:
Used to fasten bolts or nuts. The socket ends are of different specifications.
Used to fasten or loosen hexagonal or square bolts or nuts. The width of the open end is adjustable.
Ring spanner:
Double ring spanner:
Used to fasten bolts or nuts in a small enclosure.
Used to fasten bolts or nuts, especially in a small enclosure. Both ends of the spanner can be used.
Torque wrench:
Inner hexagon spanner:
Used to fasten bolts or nuts. The spanner handle can be used to restrict the range of the moment of fastening force, and the socket ends can be of different specifications.
Used to fasten bolts or nuts. The inner hexagon spanners are of two types, with a ball end and without a ball end.
Sharp-nose pliers:
Diagonal pliers:
Used to hold small fittings and twist fine wires in a small enclosure.
Used to cut insulation tubes and cable ties.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Appearance
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Name and Function
Appearance
Name and Function
Cord end pliers:
Pliers:
Used to crimp the cord end terminal adapted to a power cable with a small cross section.
Used to fold, bend, or cut wires.
Wire stripper:
Crimping pliers:
Used to remove the insulation layer and jacket from a communication cable with a small cross section.
Used to crimp the metal jacket at the end of a coaxial cable assembly.
RJ-45 connector crimping pliers:
Wire punchdown tool:
Used to crimp the RJ-45 connectors of telephone lines and network cables.
Used to install subscriber lines and trunk lines onto the cable distribution frame. This tool is also used to connect cables and modules to the cable distribution frame.
Handsaw:
File:
Used to cut feeders.
Used to smoothen the cut edge of a feeder.
Crowbar:
Rubber hammer:
Used to carry, lift, or lay down a device.
Used to knock or shape a workpiece.
Brush:
Tweezers:
Used to clean sundries such as dust and scraps.
Used to pick up light and small objects.
1-6
Appearance
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Name and Function
Appearance
Name and Function
Label:
-
Tape
Appearance
Used to mark equipment and cables. This facilitates equipment installation and maintenance. Solder wire: Used together with an electric soldering iron for soldering.
Electric soldering iron: Used to solder a conductor with a small cross section to a connector.
Antistatic wrist strap:
Antistatic gloves:
Used to prevent the electrostatic discharge (ESD) when you touch or operate a device or component.
Used to prevent the ESD from damaging a board or other electrostatic sensitive devices (ESSDs).
Ladder:
Fiber cleaning tools:
Used for work at heights.
Used to clean fibers.
Telescope
Hoisting tools: Used to hoist outdoor devices and components.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Table 1-2 Meters Name and Function
Appearance
Name and Function
Optical attenuator:
Optical power meter:
Used to adjust the power level of an optical signal by adjusting the attenuation.
Used to test the optical power.
Spectrum analyzer:
Multimeter:
Used to identify, analyze, and monitor the signals of optical waveform.
Used to measure the insulation of a cabinet, connection of a cable, and electric performance indexes of a device, such as voltage, current, and resistance.
SDH analyzer:
2 Mbit/s bit error tester:
Used to test all the indexes of the SDH network.
Ground resistance meter: Used to measure the ground resistance.
Com
1-8
Appearance
Used to measure the bit error rate (BER) of 2-Mbit/s signals during transmission. 500 VM ohmmeter: Used to measure the insulation resistance.
GPS
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
NOTE
The special tools and instruments shall be supplied by the party specified in the contract. The general tools and instruments are provided by the installer. All instruments should be tested and calibrated before use.
1.4 Installation Environment Check The OptiX 155/622H can operate normally only when the equipment room is in good condition. The OptiX 155/622H is protected against lightning and interference only when it is properly grounded. It is recommended that you read through Appendix 9 Operation Environment Requirements and Appendix 10 Grounding Specifications, and then check the equipment room accordingly before the construction. Reconstruct the places in the equipment room that do not comply with the relevant requirements to prevent troubles that may occur in later installation and maintenance.
1.5 Unpacking the Equipment This section directs you to unpack cabinets and boards. Unpack integrated subrack and other cases in the same way. 1.5.1 Unpacking the Cabinet This procedure describes how to unpack the cabinet so that you can proceed to the next installation procedure. 1.5.2 Unpacking the Chassis This section describes how to unpack the chassis. 1.5.3 Unpacking Boards If the board is separately delivered, unpack the board before you install it. 1.5.4 Requirements of Inspection The received goods must be inspected against the Packing List item by item.
1.5.1 Unpacking the Cabinet This procedure describes how to unpack the cabinet so that you can proceed to the next installation procedure.
Prerequisite None
Tools, Equipment and Materials l
Spanner
l
Screwdriver
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-9
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Precautions
WARNING Since the cabinet is rather heavy, erecting the cabinet improperly may cause personal injuries.
CAUTION l
The wooden case is direction-oriented and should not be placed upside down. Otherwise, fatal damages would be caused to the product.
l
During the transportation and handling of products, spare parts or components, make sure to avoid the collision of such things against doors, walls or shelves.
l
To avoid equipment damage in the course of moving, move the packing box to the equipment room or a place near the equipment room before unpacking.
l
In the process of transporting, handling and installing the equipment, it is forbidden to reach the uncoated metal surface of equipment parts or components with sweaty or dirty gloves.
CAUTION l
When handling the cabinet, both hands should hold on the solid places such as the base, the upper cable rack or bone frame, do not apply too much force on such places with poor rigidity as cable , cable fixing beam, so as to avoid any damage to the cabinet or any accident.
l
Remove the lining board of the rack at the place where the cabinet is to be installed. Otherwise, the signal lines and boards may be damaged during transportation or handling.
Procedure Step 1 Move the packing box to the equipment room or a place nearby before unpacking it. Step 2 Check the outer package. Stop unpacking immediately, if there is l
Serious damage to the outer package.
l
Water on the outside packaging box
l
Rust/water on the equipment.
Find the cause. Then, feed back the information to the local representative office. Step 3 Insert one end of the ejector lever into the hold for the tongue of the wooden case cover. Step 4 Turn the ejector lever to straighten the tongue, as shown in Figure 1-3. Or use a screwdriver or a hammer to operate the tongue.
1-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Figure 1-3 Straighten the tongues Steeledge Woodenboard
Tongue
Spanner
Step 5 After straightening all the tongues on the cover, remove the cover, as shown in Figure 1-4. Figure 1-4 Remove the cover
Step 6 Straighten all the tongues that the wooden boards around the wooden case. Step 7 Remove the wooden boards, as shown in Figure 1-5.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Figure 1-5 Remove the surrounded wooden board
Step 8 Take the cabinet out of the packing box. Step 9 Remove the plastic packing of the cabinet and erect the cabinet.
WARNING At least three persons are required to erect the cabinet: one person to hold the cabinet bottom, and two persons to lift the top of the cabinet and make the cabinet vertical. Step 10 Compare the equipment inside with the packing list. If there are any discrepancies, notify the local customer service center. NOTE
To protect the equipment , place the already unpacked equipment indoor. Take photos of the site storage environment, the rusted or corroded equipment/packing box/packaging materials. Properly keep these photos and store the packing box/packing materials.
----End
1.5.2 Unpacking the Chassis This section describes how to unpack the chassis.
Prerequisite The chassis must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments l
1-12
ESD gloves Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide l
Diagonal pliers
l
Paper knife
1 Installation Preparation
Required/As Needed Optional
Procedure Step 1 Move the packaging case to the equipment room. Step 2 Check the packaging case. Stop unpacking in the following cases: l
Serious damage to the outer package
l
Water on the outside packaging box
l
Rust/water on the equipment
Find out the cause, and provide to the local office of Huawei. Step 3 Check the equipment configuration according to the label on the carton, and make records. Step 4 Use a diagonal pliers to cut the binding straps. Use a paper knife to cut the adhesive tape along the edge of the carton cover. Do not cut in too deep; otherwise, the goods inside the carton may be damaged. See Figure 1-6. Figure 1-6 Unpacking the chassis 4
1
2 3
7 6
1. Carton
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
2. Packing strap
5
3. Carton label
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4. Equipment carton
1-13
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation 5. Foam plate
6. Equipment
7. Moisture barrier bag
Step 5 Open the carton, and take out the chassis packaging case. Step 6 Open the chassis packaging case, and take out the chassis. Check whether the chassis is damaged. ----End
1.5.3 Unpacking Boards If the board is separately delivered, unpack the board before you install it.
Prerequisite None
Tools, Equipment and Materials l
ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l
Diagonal pliers
l
Paper knife
Background Information Generally, the board has been installed in the subrack properly before delivery and is shipped together with the subrack. If a carton is used to pack boards for shipping, unpacking and checking are necessary when the boards arrive at the destination. (Generally, a carton is used when boards are required for capacity expansion.) The boards are put into shielding bags for transportation. Take ESD protection measures when you unpack the boards to prevent damage to them.
Precautions
CAUTION Electronic circuits and components are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). When handling circuit boards, make sure that you wear a securely grounded ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and only hold the edge of boards during operation.
Procedure Step 1 Wear a securely grounded ESD wrist strap(or ESD gloves) and make sure that it is securely grounded. Step 2 Cut the straps with diagonal pliers and use a paper knife to split the tape along the seam between the cover and the box body. See Figure 1-7.
CAUTION Do not cut too deep into the carton with the paper knife. Otherwise, the knife might scratch the articles inside.
1-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Figure 1-7 Board carton Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape
Foam plate
Label on the board box
Board box
Strap
Carton label Cushon foam
Board box Board
Shielding bag
NOTE
l
Each board is packed in both a cushion foam and an shielding bag. Keep the bags properly. They can be used later for keeping the boards or packing the damaged boards returned for repair.
l
The ambient temperature and humidity may have an impact on the boards. In each shielding bag there is a small bag of desiccant, which shall not be thrown away.
l
Wait for at least 30 minutes before unpacking if the board is just moved from a cold, dry place to a warm, damp place. Otherwise, moisture will condense on the board surface and damage the components.
Step 3 Open the carton and check whether the number and type of the boards are consistent with what is marked on the carton label. Step 4 Check that there is no evident damage on the board package. Step 5 Open the board box and take the board out of the shielding bag. l
Hold the bottom of the shielding bag with the left hand.
l
Take the board out of the bag gently by its front with the right hand.
l
Do not touch any electronic component on the board surface to avoid damage.
l
Keep the bags properly.
Step 6 Check whether any board is physically damaged. If any board damage is found, Huawei. Step 7 If no problem is found, put the board back into the board box and put it in the place specified by the customer. l
If you are going to install the board right after unpacking, place the board on an antistatic surface to discharge the static electricity.
l
If you are going to install the board at a later time, pack the board using the original materials and place them at a cool dry place without direct sunshine or strong electromagnetic radiation.
----End Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
1.5.4 Requirements of Inspection The received goods must be inspected against the Packing List item by item. l
After the goods are inspected complete and intact, both the engineering supervisor and the customer must sign the Packing List. After that, the customer takes over the goods.
l
During the inspection, if some equipment is stated undelivered in the Packing List, directly report the situation to the order management engineer of the local office of Huawei for subsequent handling. Both the engineering supervisor and the customer shall sign the Packing List to confirm the situation.
l
If any short, wrong, extra or damaged equipment is found during the inspection, both parties shall sign the Unpacking Memo and the Packing List. The project supervisor shall fill in the Equipment Problem Report and send it to the order management engineer of the local office of Huawei within three days.
1.6 Checking the Equipment The cabinet, boards, network management computer and internal cables need to be checked before the equipment installation. Table 1-3 lists the items to be checked before the equipment installation. Table 1-3 Items to be checked before the equipment installation Item
Sub-Item
Requirements
Cabinet and chassis
Appearance
Neat, no scratch or disrepair, and no loosened components.
Inside part
No foreign items or water stain.
Internal cables
Neatly bundled. No cable is scattered, loosened, or damaged.
Silkscreen
Clear.
Connection component
The connection components are installed properly, with the pins neat.
Appearance
Neat, no scratch or disrepair, no loosened components.
Quantity
Consistent with that on the delivery list.
Installation compact disk
The required software installation compact disks are intact.
Appearance
Wiring is complete, reasonable and neat.
Connectors
Firm, correct, and no float insertion.
Boards
Internal cables
1-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
CAUTION l
If any item in the table fails to meet the requirement, Huawei in a timely manner.
l
If you detect that any board is damaged or that the received goods are not consistent with the packaging list, fill in a form and make records in a timely manner.
l
The internal cabled are installed before delivery from the factory. The internal cables include the power cable and grounding cable of the chassis, protection grounding cable, power cable of the hub, and cabinet indicator cable.
l
If you detect that any connector is damaged, that the connector is loose, or that the cable is scratched, first restore the cable. If the cable cannot be restored, configure another cable.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-17
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
2
Installing the Chassis
About This Chapter Choose the proper method for installing the OptiX 155/622H depending on the actual situation. This chapter describes how to install an independent chassis.
CAUTION Do not place any item heavier than 8 kg on the chassis. 2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in a Series-C Integrated Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in a series-C integrated cabinet. 2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 600 mm-Deep Cabinet or a 19-Inch Cabinet Four modes can be used to install the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet or a 19-inch cabinet. 2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 300 mm-Deep Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet. 2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in the Open Rack This topic describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in the open rack. 2.5 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an Access Network Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in an access network cabinet. 2.6 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis on the Wall There are two modes for installing the OptiX 155/622H on the wall. 2.7 Desktop Mounting In the case of desktop mounting, place the chassis on a desktop. 2.8 Checking the Installation After the installation is complete, check whether the equipment is properly installed.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in a Series-C Integrated Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in a series-C integrated cabinet.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
l
Space must be reserved in the cabinet for installing the chassis.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials Pallet
Procedure Step 1 Remove the side s from both the sides of the cabinet. Step 2 Remove the two screws from both the sides of the OptiX 155/622H chassis. The locations of the screws are shown in Figure 2-1. Step 3 Place the chassis on the mounting ears of the cabinet. The chassis must face the same direction as the cabinet. Step 4 Through the hole on the side of the mounting ears, install the screws removed in Step 2 onto the side of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Fixing the chassis
OptiX 155/622H
Mounting ear
2-2
Screw
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Step 5 Fasten the side s that were removed in Step 1 back to the cabinet. ----End
Result Figure 2-2 shows the OptiX 155/622H that is installed in a series-C integrated cabinet. Figure 2-2 OptiX 155/622H that is installed in a series-C integrated cabinet
OptiX 155/622H Digital distribution frame
Optical distribution frame
Optical fixed frame
2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 600 mm-Deep Cabinet or a 19-Inch Cabinet Four modes can be used to install the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet or a 19-inch cabinet. 2.2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis Along the Slide Rail This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet along the slide rail. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears. 2.2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Upward
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing upward. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears. 2.2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Downward This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing downward. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears. 2.2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis – Cabling from the Front This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with cables led out from the front . The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears.
2.2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis Along the Slide Rail This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet along the slide rail. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
l
The slide rail configured for the OptiX 155/622H must be installed in the cabinet.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Mounting ears
l
Four M6x12 screws
Procedure Step 1 Remove the screws from both the sides of the OptiX 155/622H. Fix the mounting ear to the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-3.
2-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-3 Fixing the mounting ears
Mounting ear
Step 2 Place the chassis onto the slide rail with care. Step 3 Fix the chassis to the cabinet with four M6x12 screw assemblies, as shown in Figure 2-4. Figure 2-4 Fixing the chassis
Slide rail
----End
Result Figure 2-5 shows the OptiX 155/622H that is installed along the slide rail.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-5 Installing the chassis along the slide rail
2.2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Upward This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing upward. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Four M6x12 screws
l
Four M6 captive nuts
Procedure Step 1 Remove the screws from both the sides of the OptiX 155/622H, as shown in Figure 2-6. 2-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-6 Removing the screws from the side of the chassis
Step 2 Place the chassis on the mounting ears and fasten it with the screws that were removed in Step 1, as shown in Figure 2-7. Figure 2-7 Fastening the chassis on the mounting ears
Step 3 Fasten four M6 captive nuts to the standing posts on both the sides of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-8.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-7
2 Installing the Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 2-8 Fastening the captive nuts to the standing posts
Captive nut Installation hole
Step 4 Fix the mounting ears along with the chassis to the cabinet with four M6x12 screw assemblies. ----End
Result Figure 2-9 shows the OptiX 155/622H that is installed in an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears upward.
2-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-9 Installing the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing upward
2.2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Downward This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing downward. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Mounting ears
l
Eight M6x12 screws
l
Four M6 captive nuts
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-9
2 Installing the Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Procedure Step 1 Fasten four M6 captive nuts to the standing posts on both the sides of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-8. Step 2 Remove the four screws from both the sides of the chassis. Fix the mounting ear to the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-10. Figure 2-10 Fixing the mounting ear of the chassis
Mounting ear
Step 3 Fasten the four M6 captive nuts to the standing posts on both the sides of the cabinet. Step 4 Fix the chassis to the cabinet with four M6x12 screw assemblies, as shown in Figure 2-11.
2-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-11 Fixing the chassis to the cabinet
----End
Result Figure 2-12 shows the OptiX 155/622H installed in a 19-inch cabinet with mounting ears downward.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-12 Installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet with the mounting ears facing downward
2.2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis – Cabling from the Front This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with cables led out from the front . The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials
2-12
l
Mounting ears
l
Four M6x12 screws
l
Four M6 captive nuts Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Procedure Step 1 Fasten four M6 captive nuts to the standing posts on both the sides of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-8. Step 2 Remove the four screws from both the sides of the chassis. Fix the mounting ear to the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-13. Figure 2-13 Fixing the mounting ear to the chassis
Mounting ear
Step 3 Fix the chassis to the cabinet with four M6x12 screw assemblies. ----End
2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 300 mm-Deep Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
M3 screw
l
Four M6 captive nuts
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-13
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis l
Four M6 screws
l
Rotary subrack
A rotary subrack is required for installing the OptiX 155/622H in the ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet. Figure 2-14 shows the structure of the rotary subrack. The dimensions of the rotary subrack are 513 mm (W) x 280 mm (D) x 522 mm (H). Figure 2-14 Structure of the rotary subrack
Suspension bracket
Procedure Step 1 Insert the positioning pins on both the sides of the rotary subrack at the same time in the direction of (1) in Figure 2-15. Remove the positioning pins from the lockholes, and then rotate downward the holder in the arrow direction of (2) until the holder is put flat.
2-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-15 Putting flat the suspension bracket
Positioning pin 1 2
Positioning hole
Suspension bracket
Step 2 Align the chassis with the positioning holes at the bottom of the chassis, and insert the chassis into the positioning pins on the rotary subrack. See Figure 2-16. For the positions of the positioning holes, see Figure 2-17. Figure 2-16 Fixing the chassis
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-17 Positioning hole at the bottom of the OptiX 155/622H chassis
Positioning hole
Step 3 Align the screw holes on both the sides of the chassis with the screw holes on both the sides of the suspension bracket. Use the M3 screws to fasten the suspension bracket to the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-18. Figure 2-18 Fixing the chassis
2-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Step 4 Pull out the positioning pins on both the sides of the rotary subrack. Rotate the suspension upward by 90 degrees, and align the pins to the lockholes. Then, release the pins and insert them into the holes. Step 5 Determine the location of the rotary subrack in the cabinet. Fasten four M6 captive nuts to the standing posts on both the sides of the cabinet. Step 6 Use four M6 screws to secure the rotary subrack in the cabinet. ----End
Result Figure 2-19 shows the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-17
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-19 OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet
2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in the Open Rack This topic describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in the open rack.
Prerequisite
2-18
l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Mounting ears
l
Four M6 floating nuts
l
Four M6 screws
Precautions None.
Procedure Step 1 Use the four screws that are removed from both the sides of the chassis to connect the mounting ears to the chassis. Step 2 Install the slide rails to the rack columns on both the sides. Step 3 Install the four M6 floating nuts to the rack columns on both the sides. Step 4 Use the four M6 screws to connect the mounting ears, and thus to fix the chassis to the rack. ----End
Result Figure 2-20 shows the OptiX 155/622H installed in the type-B open rack.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-19
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-20 OptiX 155/622H installed in the type-B open rack
Wire wrap
Slide rail
2.5 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an Access Network Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in an access network cabinet.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials
2-20
l
Plug-in frame
l
Four screws
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Context The OptiX 155/622H can be installed in two types of access network cabinets: l
HONET-ONU512 cabinet
l
HONET-ONU1000A cabinet (series-B cabinet)
To install the OptiX 155/622H in the ONU512 and ONU1000A cabinets, use the plug-in frames that are provided for this purpose. Each plug-in frame provided for the ONU512 can be used to house one OptiX 155/622H. Each plug-in frame provided for the ONU1000A can be used to house up to two OptiX 155/622Hs.
Procedure Step 1 Remove the screws from both sides of the OptiX 155/622H. See Figure 2-6. Step 2 Place the chassis into the plug-in frame, and secure the chassis with the screws that are removed in Step 1. Step 3 Use four screws to secure the plug-in frame in the cabinet. See Figure 2-21. Figure 2-21 OptiX 155/622H equipment in the ONU512 and ONU1000A
Hole of the screw for installing the plug-in frame into the cabinet Plug-in frame OptiX 155/622H Hole of the screw for fixing the chassis in the plug-in frame
----End
2.6 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis on the Wall There are two modes for installing the OptiX 155/622H on the wall. 2.6.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using a Rotary Subrack This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H on the wall by using a rotary subrack. 2.6.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using the Suspension Bracket This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H on the wall by using the suspension bracket. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-21
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
2.6.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using a Rotary Subrack This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H on the wall by using a rotary subrack.
Prerequisite The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Suspension bracket
l
Rotary subrack
l
M3 screw
l
Three M8 expansion bolts
Procedure Step 1 Place the suspension bracket on the location where it is to be mounted with the mounting ear facing upward. There are three holes on the back of the suspension bracket. Mark the locations of these three holes on the wall, and remove the bracket, as shown in Figure 2-22. Figure 2-22 Positioning the suspension bracket
Hanger
Suspension bracket
Installation hole
Step 2 Drill three holes in the marked places with a Ф10 drill. Insert the M6 expansion bolts into the holes. See Figure 2-23.
2-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-23 Inserting expansion bolts and expansion nuts
Expansion tube Expansion bolt
Step 3 Insert the expansion bolts into the installation holes of the suspension bracket. Fasten the nuts to fix the bracket onto the wall, as shown in Figure 2-24. Figure 2-24 Positioning the suspension bracket Big flat washer
Spring gasket Nut
Expansion bolt Wall
Suspension bracket
Step 4 Hang the rotary subrack of the suspension bracket from the hanging hole. Fasten the screws on the rotary subrack to fasten the rotary subrack to the suspension bracket, as shown in Figure 2-25.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-23
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-25 Schematic diagram for wall mounting
2 1
3
NOTE
The numbers in this figure indicate the sequence of the operations.
Step 5 Mount the OptiX 155/622H chassis to the rotary subrack. For the procedures, see step 1 through 4 in section 2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 300 mm-Deep Cabinet. ----End
Result Figure 2-26 shows the OptiX 155/622H that is installed on the wall by using the rotary subrack. NOTE
When the OptiX 155/622H is installed on the wall, the interface area faces upward.
2-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-26 OptiX 155/622H that is installed on the wall by using the rotary subrack
2.6.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using the Suspension Bracket This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H on the wall by using the suspension bracket.
Prerequisite The chassis and installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Suspension bracket
l
Three M8 expansion bolts
Procedure Step 1 Place the suspension bracket where it is to be mounted, with the mounting ear facing upward. There are three holes on the back of the bracket. Mark the locations of the three screw holes on the wall. Remove the bracket, as shown in Figure 2-22. Step 2 Drill three holes in the marked places with a Ф10 drill. Insert the M8 expansion bolts into the holes as shown in Figure 2-23. Step 3 Insert the expansion bolts into the installation holes of the suspension bracket. Fasten the nuts to fix the suspension bracket to the wall, as shown in Figure 2-24. Step 4 Hang the chassis onto the suspension bracket properly so that the mounting ears are inserted into the position holes of the OptiX 155/622H chassis, as shown in Figure 2-27. The locations of the positioning holes are as shown in Figure 2-17. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-25
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-27 Hanging the chassis on the suspension bracket
Step 5 Fasten the screws to secure the chassis to the suspension bracket, as shown in Figure 2-28. Figure 2-28 Fixing the chassis
----End
Result Figure 2-29 shows the OptiX 155/622H that is installed on the wall by using the suspension bracket. NOTE
When the OptiX 155/622H is installed on the wall, the interface area faces upwards.
2-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-29 OptiX 155/622H installed on the wall by using the suspension bracket
2.7 Desktop Mounting In the case of desktop mounting, place the chassis on a desktop.
2.8 Checking the Installation After the installation is complete, check whether the equipment is properly installed. The following requirements should be met when the chassis installation is complete: l
The position for installing the chassis must comply with the engineering design file.
l
The chassis must be firmly secured, and must comply with the shakeproof requirements stated in the engineering design file.
l
Boards can be plugged normally. After a board is inserted into the chassis, the screws on the must be tightened.
l
All the idle slots must be configured with blank s.
l
The components of the equipment must not be deformed.
l
The equipment room must be clean and tidy. The items such as scrapped packaging cases must be disposed of. The spare installation parts must be placed in order.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-27
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
About This Chapter This chapter describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H chassis on the wall. 3.1 About the Chassis An integrated wall-mounting chassis of the OptiX 155/622H can house one set of the OptiX 155/622H, one UPM power box, and one storage battery. 3.2 Environmental Requirements This section describes the environmental requirements for installing an integrated wall-mounting chassis of the OptiX 155/622H. 3.3 Installing the Chassis This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H integrated wall-mounting chassis. 3.4 Checking the Installation After the chassis is installed, check whether the installation is properly complete.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3.1 About the Chassis An integrated wall-mounting chassis of the OptiX 155/622H can house one set of the OptiX 155/622H, one UPM power box, and one storage battery. The dimensions of the integrated wall-mounting chassis (hereinafter referred to as chassis): 450 mm (W) x 218 mm (D) x 465 mm (H) Figure 3-1 shows the chassis with the top cover removed. Figure 3-1 Outline drawing of the OptiX 155/622H chassis
3.2 Environmental Requirements This section describes the environmental requirements for installing an integrated wall-mounting chassis of the OptiX 155/622H. When installing the chassis, make sure that the location and the power meet the following requirements:
3-2
l
Wall: The wall must be made of reinforced concrete or brick, and must not be less than 180 mm thick because it must a mounting weight of 50 kg. It cannot be a sandy soil wall, stone wall or hollow clay brick wall.
l
Corrosion-proof, shockproof: The location where the chassis is mounted must be free from corrosion, poisonous smoke, dust or gas. The intensity of the seismic design in the location must comply with the local practices.
l
Sunshine protection: The chassis should not be directly exposed to sunlight. High temperature in the chassis may affect the normal operation and the life of the equipment.
l
Fire Protection: There must not be any dangerous goods such as inflammable substances or explosives at the location where the chassis is mounted. There should be portable fire extinguishers within a certain distance, for use when a fire occurs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide l
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
AC Power: –
Rated voltage: 220 V AC
–
Operating range: 150 V AC to 300 V AC
–
Frequency: 50 Hz ± 10%
–
Voltage waveform distortion factor: below 5%
3.3 Installing the Chassis This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H integrated wall-mounting chassis. 3.3.1 Locating Installation Holes of the Chassis This section describes how to position the holes for installing the chassis. 3.3.2 Installing the Expansion Bolts This section describes how to install the expansion bolts. 3.3.3 Installing Mounting Parts This section describes how to install the mounting parts. 3.3.4 Fixing the Chassis This section describes how to fix the chassis. 3.3.5 Installing the Handle Install the handle of the OptiX 155/622H so that you can easily remove/insert the OptiX 155/622H from/into the chassis. 3.3.6 Assembling the Chassis There are two frames in the chassis. The frame close to the wall is used to house the storage battery. The frame away from the wall is used to house the OptiX 155/622H and the UPM power box. 3.3.7 Installing and Routing the Cables This section describes how to install and route the cables of an integrated wall-mounting chassis. 3.3.8 Installation Result See the wall-mounting result diagram and check whether the equipment is properly installed.
3.3.1 Locating Installation Holes of the Chassis This section describes how to position the holes for installing the chassis.
Prerequisite The chassis and relevant accessories must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments l
General tools
l
Installation template used to position the holes for installing the chassis
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Procedure Step 1 Determine the location for the installation. There should be 350 mm clearance above the top of the chassis. Thus, you can remove certain parts easily during future maintenance operations of the storage battery. See Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 Allowing 350 mm clearance above the chassis
350 mm
Step 2 Place the installation template on the location in a flat position. Mark the locations of the installation holes, as shown in Figure 3-3.
3-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Figure 3-3 Determining the locations for the installation holes
m 8m 35
513 mm
Step 3 Remove the template. Use a Ф10 drill bit. Drill four installation holes with a percussion drill. The holes must be 72 mm to 80 mm deep at the marked locations. ----End
3.3.2 Installing the Expansion Bolts This section describes how to install the expansion bolts.
Prerequisite The holes for installing the chassis must be positioned.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials Four M8x80 expansion bolts
Procedure Step 1 Clear the dusts from the interior and exterior of the installation holes. Figure 3-4 shows the expansion bolt assembly. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-5
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 3-4 Expansion bolt assembly 1 2 3
4
6 5
7
1. M8x80 expansion bolt 2. Spring washer 5. Expansion nut
3. Flat washer
4. Expansion tube
6. Guide slot on expansion tube 7. Guide rib on expansion nut
Step 2 Insert the guide rib on the expansion nut into the guide slot on the expansion tube. Step 3 Insert the expansion bolt assembly vertically into the hole, as shown in Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5 Putting the expansion bolt assembly into the hole
Step 4 Drive the expansion bolt assembly completely into the floor with a hammer, for example, a claw hammer. Step 5 Loose the bolt. Then remove the bolt, the spring washer and the flat washer, as shown in Figure 3-6.
3-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Figure 3-6 Removing the bolt assembly
Step 6 Repeat Steps 2-5 to install the other three expansion bolt assemblies. ----End
3.3.3 Installing Mounting Parts This section describes how to install the mounting parts. Secure the four mounting parts onto the chassis with eight M5 bolts, as shown in Figure 3-7.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-7
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 3-7 Securing the hangers
3.3.4 Fixing the Chassis This section describes how to fix the chassis.
Prerequisite The mounting parts must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Procedure Step 1 Align the expansion bolts to the installation holes. Mount the chassis to the wall, as shown in Figure 3-8. Step 2 Press the chassis downward, until the expansion bolts touch the upper parts of the installation holes, as shown in Figure 3-8. Step 3 Fix the chassis to the wall with flat washers, spring washers and nuts, as shown in Figure 3-8.
3-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Figure 3-8 Fixing the chassis
----End
3.3.5 Installing the Handle Install the handle of the OptiX 155/622H so that you can easily remove/insert the OptiX 155/622H from/into the chassis.
Prerequisite The chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials Handle of the OptiX 155/622H chassis
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-9
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Procedure Step 1 Remove the screws on the left and right sides of the OptiX 155/622H. Step 2 Align the positioning holes of the handle to the screw holes on the side of the chassis. Fix the handle to the side of the chassis with the screws, as shown in Figure 3-9. Figure 3-9 Fixing the handle
----End
3.3.6 Assembling the Chassis There are two frames in the chassis. The frame close to the wall is used to house the storage battery. The frame away from the wall is used to house the OptiX 155/622H and the UPM power box.
Prerequisite The chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials
3-10
l
Storage battery
l
UPM power box
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Context
CAUTION l
Take out the UPM power box first and then remove the OptiX 155/622H.
l
Place the storage battery, OptiX 155/622H, and UPM power box into the chassis. You need not secure them in the chassis.
l
Ensure that the storage battery, OptiX 155/622H, and the –48 V power interface of the UPM power box face upward, close to the right side of the chassis.
Procedure Step 1 Insert the storage battery into the frame of the chassis that is close to the wall. Step 2 Insert the OptiX 155/622H into the frame of the chassis away from the wall. Note that the board area should face upward. Step 3 Insert the UPM into the chassis. Ensure that it is close to the OptiX 155/622H. Note that the interface area faces upward and that the 220 V power interface should be close to the left side of the chassis. Step 4 Figure 3-10 shows the installation result of the chassis on the wall. Figure 3-10 Installation result Cabling hole UPM Storage battery
Handle
OptiX 155/622H
OptiX 155/622H
Right leading-out hole
Left leading-out hole
----End
3.3.7 Installing and Routing the Cables This section describes how to install and route the cables of an integrated wall-mounting chassis. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Prerequisite The chassis must be assembled.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
–48 V power cable
l
220 V power cable
l
Fiber jumper
l
Corrugated pipe NOTE
When fiber jumpers need be routed outside the cabinet, a corrugated pipe or winding pipe is required. Each corrugated pipe can house 12 to 15 fiber jumpers. Cut the corrugated pipe according to the routing distance between the cabinet and the ODF.
Procedure Step 1 See Figure 3-11, and connect the storage battery to the –48 V power cable of the UPM power system. This power cable is placed through the cabling hole within the chassis. Figure 3-11 Connecting the cables of the UPM OptiX 155/622H IU3
IU2
IU1
IU4 SCB
Power cable of load 1
COM2
Power cable of load 2 Communication cable
UPM RS232
Storage battery cable
Storage battery -48VDC
Step 2 Connect the –48 V power cable from the UPM power box to the OptiX 155/622H. See Figure 3-11. Step 3 Connect the 220 V power cable of the UPM power box. This power cable is led out through the left leading-out hole on the top cover of the chassis. 3-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Step 4 The fiber jumpers on the OptiX 155/622H are led out through the left leading-out hole on the top cover of the chassis. Note that the led-out fiber jumpers should be covered with the corrugated pipe and should not be bundled with the power cable. Step 5 The cables of the OptiX 155/622H are led out through the right leading-out hole on the top cover of the chassis. Step 6 After the above actions are done, close the top cover of the chassis and lock it. Keep the key in a proper place for use in future maintenance. ----End
3.3.8 Installation Result See the wall-mounting result diagram and check whether the equipment is properly installed. Figure 3-12 shows the integrated wall-mounted OptiX 155/622H chassis. Figure 3-12 Wall-mounted OptiX 155/622H chassis
3.4 Checking the Installation After the chassis is installed, check whether the installation is properly complete. The following requirements should be met when the chassis installation is complete: l
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
The position for installing the chassis must comply with the engineering design file. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-13
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
3-14
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
l
The chassis must be firmly secured, and the installation of the chassis must comply with the shockproof requirements stated in the engineering design file.
l
The storage battery, UPM power system, and OptiX 155/622H case must be installed in the proper positions and in the correct directions.
l
The top cover of the chassis must be properly closed and locked.
l
The equipment room must be clean and tidy. The items such as scrapped packaging cases must be disposed of. Place the spare installation parts in order.
l
Keep the antistatic bags of the boards in a proper place for future use.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Installing the UPM Power System
About This Chapter The UPM power conversion system is used to convert the 110 V/220 V AC power into the –48 V DC power, and thus feed power to the OptiX 155/622H. The UPM power system consists of the power box and storage battery. 4.1 About the UPM Power System The UPM power system (hereinafter referred to as UPM) consists of the power box and storage battery. 4.2 Installing the Storage Battery and Power Box This section describes how to install the storage battery and power box into the cabinet. 4.3 Installing the UPM Power Cables This section describes how to install the UPM power cables and serial cables in the cabinet. 4.4 Checking the Installation After the UPM system is installed, check the installation to ensure that the equipment is properly installed.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
4.1 About the UPM Power System The UPM power system (hereinafter referred to as UPM) consists of the power box and storage battery. 4.1.1 Power Box The dimensions of the power box are 438 mm (W) x 240 mm (D) x 44 mm (H). The model of the power box is GIE4805S. 4.1.2 Storage Battery The battery can be installed in the storage battery pallet or storage battery box. 4.1.3 Installation Mode This section describes the installation mode of the UPM system.
4.1.1 Power Box The dimensions of the power box are 438 mm (W) x 240 mm (D) x 44 mm (H). The model of the power box is GIE4805S.
Appearance Figure 4-1 shows the front view of the power box. Figure 4-2 shows the rear view of the power box. The power box can output two –48 V power supplies. The output power of each power supply is 270 W. Figure 4-1 Front view of the power box
4 GIE
4-2
5S 80
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-2 Rear view of the power box 5
4 AC100~240
RUN ALM Vout
ALM
ALM Vout RS232
1
2
3
6
7
1. AC power input interface
2. Rectifier module
3. Monitoring module
4. Management interface
5. Interface for storage battery
6. –48 V power input interface
7. –48 V power output interface
Indicators Table 4-1 provides the descriptions of the indicators of the power box. Table 4-1 Description of the Indicators Module
Indicat or
Status
Description
Rectifier module
ALM
On (red)
The rectifier module is faulty. The ALM indicator should be off when the rectifier module is normal.
Vout
On (green)
The output of the rectifier module is normal.
RUN
Flash (green)
The entire power system is normal.
ALM
On (red)
The entire power system is faulty. The ALM indicator should be off when the entire power system is normal.
Monitorin g module
Management Interface The management interface of the power box adopts the DB9 connector, of which the pin definitions are defined as listed in Table 4-2. Table 4-2 Pin definitions of the management interface
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Pin
Definition
1
-
2
RS232 RX
3
RS232 TX
4
-
5
RS232 GND Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Pin
Definition
6
Battery discharge undervoltage alarm
7
AC power input failure alarm
8
Common grounding point
9
The rectifier module is faulty.
Cables The cables at the interfaces of the power box are the power cable and management cable. Figure 4-3 shows the power cable and management cable. Figure 4-3 Power cable and management cable
a
b
a. Power cable
b. Management cable
4.1.2 Storage Battery The battery can be installed in the storage battery pallet or storage battery box. The dimensions of the storage battery pallet are 436 mm (W) x 173.5 mm (D) x 125 mm (H). The appearance of the storage battery pallet is shown in Figure 4-4. Install the storage battery pallet before using it. Place the storage battery in the storage battery pallet.
4-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-4 Storage battery pallet
Partition bar
Ear brackct
The dimensions of the storage battery box are 436 mm (W) x 315 mm (D) x 133 mm (H). The appearance of the storage battery box is shown in Figure 4-5. Figure 4-5 Storage battery box
CAUTION l
Ensure that the storage battery box is stable. Ensure that the battery box is in the upright position (check the direction of the symbols on the storage battery box ).
l
The environment must be suitably dry and cool, with a temperature ranging between 10℃ and 35℃. These are very important factors that affect the life cycle of the batteries inside.
4.1.3 Installation Mode This section describes the installation mode of the UPM system. The UPM system can be installed: Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System l
In a standard 19-inch cabinet
l
In a 600 mm-deep ETSI cabinet
l
In a 300 mm-deep ETSI cabinet
l
On the wall
4.2 Installing the Storage Battery and Power Box This section describes how to install the storage battery and power box into the cabinet.
WARNING Take the following precautions when installing the storage battery: l
The storage battery should be installed in a place more than 0.5 meter far from the heat source and the places where sparkles always occur.
l
The storage battery should be erected at the bottom of the cabinet.
l
Use insulation tools and wear ESD gloves and protective glasses when installing the storage battery.
CAUTION l
Before the installation, clean the connecting bar. Abrade the between the terminal and the connecting bar with the abrasive paper until metallic luster appears.
l
The storage battery can be stored at a temperature ranging from –15℃ to +40℃ for not more than six months before it is installed. If the storage battery has been stored for more than six months, it needs to be recharged before the installation.
4.2.1 Installing the Storage Batteries The storage batteries can installed in the storage battery pallet or the storage battery box. This section describes how to install the storage batteries into the cabinet by using the pallet. 4.2.2 Installing the Power Box in a 19-Inch Cabinet or an ETSI Cabinet This section describes how to install the UPM power box in a 19-inch cabinet. The method for installing the UPM power box in an ETSI cabinet is the same as the method for installing the UPM power box in a 19-inch cabinet, except for the different mounting angles of the power box and storage battery pallet. 4.2.3 Installing the Power Box on the Wall When the UPM power system needs to be installed on the wall, the storage batteries are placed directly on the floor near the power box. This section describes how to install the power box on the wall.
4.2.1 Installing the Storage Batteries The storage batteries can installed in the storage battery pallet or the storage battery box. This section describes how to install the storage batteries into the cabinet by using the pallet. 4-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Prerequisite The cabinet and chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Pallet
l
Four screws
Required/As Needed Required
Context NOTE
If the storage battery box is adopted, it can be placed beside the cabinet.
Procedure Step 1 Check if the partition bars are removed from the battery board. In addition, ensure the following: l
If the 20 AH battery is adopted, remove the two partition bars from the pallet, as shown in Figure 4-6.
l
If the 12 AH battery is adopted, do not remove the partition bars.
Figure 4-6 The pallet removed two partition bars
Step 2 Secure the ears on both sides of the pallet. Step 3 Fix the pallet in the cabinet with four captive screws. Step 4 Refer to Figure 4-7 to fix the storage batteries in the pallet. The connecting terminal of the battery should be away from the ear brackets of the pallet. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-7 Batteries installed in the pallet
----End
4.2.2 Installing the Power Box in a 19-Inch Cabinet or an ETSI Cabinet This section describes how to install the UPM power box in a 19-inch cabinet. The method for installing the UPM power box in an ETSI cabinet is the same as the method for installing the UPM power box in a 19-inch cabinet, except for the different mounting angles of the power box and storage battery pallet.
Prerequisite The cabinet and chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Mounting ears
l
Four M3 screws
l
Four screws
Required/As Needed When the 110 V/220 V power needs to be directly accessed, the UPM power box needs to be installed.
Procedure Step 1 See Figure 4-8 to fix the mounting ears to the power box with four M3 screws.
4-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-8 Installing the mounting ears (in a 19-inch cabinet)
NOTE
Figure 4-9 shows the mounting ears installed on the UPM power box in an ETSI cabinet. Figure 4-9 Installing the mounting ears (in an ETSI cabinet)
Step 2 Fix the power box in the cabinet with four captive screws, as shown in Figure 4-10.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-9
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-10 Installing the power box
----End
4.2.3 Installing the Power Box on the Wall When the UPM power system needs to be installed on the wall, the storage batteries are placed directly on the floor near the power box. This section describes how to install the power box on the wall.
Prerequisite The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Suspension bracket
l
Four expansion bolts
Required/As Needed When the 110 V/220 V power needs to be directly accessed, the UPM power box needs to be installed.
Procedure Step 1 Select a place on the wall that is suitable of installing the power box. Step 2 Fix the suspension bracket on the wall. Mark four mounting holes on the wall with a pencil. Step 3 Remove the suspension bracket. Drill four 12 holes at the marked place, with the depths of 52 mm to 60 mm. 4-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Step 4 Insert an expansion bolt and an expansion tube into each hole, as shown in Figure 4-11. Figure 4-11 Installing the expansion bolt and expansion tube
Expansion tube Expansion bolt
Step 5 Fix the power box on the suspension bracket through the four mounting holes at the bottom of the power box, as shown in Figure 4-12. Figure 4-12 Securing the OptiX 155/622H chassis
Step 6 Use the nut and the expansion bolt to tighten the suspension bracket with the power box on the wall, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-11
4 Installing the UPM Power System
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 4-13 Fixing the suspension bracket
Flat washer Spring gasket Nut
----End
4.3 Installing the UPM Power Cables This section describes how to install the UPM power cables and serial cables in the cabinet.
Prerequisite The UPM system and the OptiX 155/622H chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
4-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Context
DANGER l
If the power terminals on the power box need not be used, cover the terminals with insulating caps.
l
Cut off the AC power, and ensure that the return circuits of the batteries are in the off state. Do not operate the equipment with power on.
l
The anode and cathode of the batteries must correspond to the positive and negative poles of the BAT interface of the power conversion box. Otherwise, the power device may be damaged.
Procedure Step 1 Use the power cable to connect the power input port on the upper right side of the OptiX 155/622H to the LOAD2 power output port on the power box, as shown in Figure 4-15. Figure 4-14 shows how to connect the DC power to the system. Figure 4-14 Connecting the DC power to the system BAT Battery + Battery Load + Load LOAD1
LOAD2
Step 2 Use the power cable to connect the power input port on the lower right side of the OptiX 155/622H to the LOAD2 power output port on the power box, as shown in Figure 4-15. Step 3 Use the power cable to connect the BAT power output port on the power box to the storage battery, as shown in Figure 4-15. Select the proper cable type according to the battery model.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-13
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-15 Cable connection of the integrated wall-mounting cabinet OptiX 155/622H IU3
IU2
IU1
IU4 SCB
Power cable of load 1
COM2
Power cable of load 2 Communication cable
UPM RS232
Storage battery cable
Storage battery -48VDC
Step 4 Use the serial cable to connect the RS232 interface on the power box to the COM2 interface on the SCB board of the OptiX 155/622H, thus to implement the monitoring of the storage batteries and power box. Step 5 Use the AC power cable to connect the power box to the AC power supply device. ----End
4.4 Checking the Installation After the UPM system is installed, check the installation to ensure that the equipment is properly installed. The following installation requirements must be met:
4-14
l
The storage batteries must be installed in a place more than 0.5 meter far from the heat source and the places where sparkles always occur.
l
The storage batteries must be erected at the bottom of the cabinet.
l
The horizontal distance between the batteries must be more than 10 mm.
l
The bolts, nuts, and connection bars must be firmly secured or screwed to a torque ranging from 15 N.m to 30 N.m. Excessive force may damage the terminals.
l
The storage batteries must be installed in the environment free of direct sunlight, mass radioactive, infrared, and ultraviolet radiation, organic solvent gas, and corrosive gas.
l
The batteries are placed in a cool, clean, and dry place with proper ventilation.
l
The batteries must not be short-circuited.
l
The batteries must not be thrown into fire or heated.
l
Non-professional personnel must not disassemble, maintain or dissect the batteries.
l
The batteries must not be used or charged in the equipment that is completely sealed.
l
The air exhaust vents must not be blocked by any items. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
l
The conducting cable must be cut to a length as short as possible to decrease the voltage drop.
l
When the batteries work or before the charging circuit is closed, the system voltage must be normal and the anode and cathode of the batteries must be properly connected.
l
The batteries must not be charged with the anode and cathode reversely connected.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Installing and Routing the Cables
About This Chapter This chapter describes how to install the cables of the OptiX 155/622H. NOTE
Remove the front door and side s of the cabinet before installing the cables of the OptiX 155/622H. Re-install the front door and side s after the cables are installed.
5.1 Installing the PGND Cables This section describes how to install the PGND cables. 5.2 Installing the Power Cable This section describes how to install the power cable. 5.3 Installing the E1/T1 Cables T1 cables are installed in the same method as E1 cables. This section considers the installation of E1 cables as an example to describe how to install E1/T1 cables. 5.4 Installing E3/T3/STM-1e Cables The methods for installing the E3, T3 and STM-1e cables are the same. 5.5 Installing Ethernet Cables This section describes how to install Ethernet cables. 5.6 Installing the Framed E1 Cable This section describes how to install the Framed E1 cable. 5.7 Installing the NM Cable This section describes how to install the network management (NM) cable. 5.8 Installing the External Clock Cable This section describes how to install the external clock cable. 5.9 Installing the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable This section describes how to install the transparent data/housekeeping cable. 5.10 Checking the Cable Installation After the cable is installed, check whether the cable installation is correct.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
5.1 Installing the PGND Cables This section describes how to install the PGND cables. 5.1.1 About the Cables This section describes the PGND cables. 5.1.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the PGND cables.
5.1.1 About the Cables This section describes the PGND cables. Figure 5-1 shows the appearance of the PGND cable. Figure 5-1 PGND cable OT terminal
Label
5.1.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the PGND cables.
Prerequisite The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed in the cabinet.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
PGND cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Context NOTE
Based on the conditions of the project, determine the position of the grounding cable in the equipment room. For the grounding requirements, see Appendix 9 Operation Environment Requirements.
5-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
CAUTION l
The ground cable should be as short as possible and should not be twisted.
l
If the preserved cables are found not long enough for the routing, stop the routing process and replace the cables. Make sure that there is no t or weld point on the cable.
l
Flat washers and spring washers are used for securing the lugs, to provide proper and reliable between the lugs and the grounding point.
Procedure Step 1 Fasten the OT terminal of the PGND cable to the grounding bolt on the OptiX 155/622H. The installation result is as shown in Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2 Installation result of the PGND cable on the equipment side of the OptiX 155/622H
Step 2 Determine the length of the PGND cable according to the distance between the PGND grounding bolt and the protection grounding bar, and cut the redundant section. Step 3 Crimp the OT terminal that matches the protection grounding bar at the connector of the PGND cable. Step 4 Fasten the PGND cable to the protection grounding bar. Step 5 See Appendix 11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling to bind the PGND cable with binding straps. Step 6 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. For the method of making labels, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. ----End
5.2 Installing the Power Cable This section describes how to install the power cable. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
WARNING Do not install or remove the power cable when the equipment is powered on. Before you install or remove the power cable, power off the power supply device in the equipment room to prevent personal injury. 5.2.1 About the Power Cables This section introduces the power cables. 5.2.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the power cable.
5.2.1 About the Power Cables This section introduces the power cables. The -48 V and the +24 V power cable assemblies consist of two cables: the power cable and the BGND cable. One end of the power cable assembly is a 4-pin connector, which is used to connect the power interface of the equipment. The profile of the power cable assembly is as shown in Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3 Power cable Stud
Tag
A-A 31
A
4 2
A
Tag 1
W1 W2 Tag 2
NOTE
Certain –48 V and +24 V power cable assemblies have three cables. That is, a PGND cable is also installed on such power cable assembly.
5.2.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the power cable.
Prerequisite l
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed in the cabinet.
l
The power supply device of the equipment room must be available.
l
The voltage must be within the range from –38.4 V DC to –72 V DC.
Tools/Instruments General tools 5-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Installing Materials l
PGND cable
l
Power cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Context
CAUTION l
Do not install the cable when the equipment is powered on.
l
If the preserved cables are found not long enough for the routing, stop the routing process and replace the cables. Make sure that there is no t or weld point on the cable.
l
The yellow and green short-circuit cable on the connector of the power cable assembly is used to short-circuit the PGND and BGND of the OptiX 155/622H. If the power supply system already has the PGND and BGND short-circuited, you need to cut the yellow and green cable right down to its root.
Procedure Step 1 Plug the connector of the power cable to the power jack of the POI/POU board on the OptiX 155/622H. The installation result is as shown in Figure 5-4. Figure 5-4 Connection of the power cable
Step 2 Connect the other end of the power cable assembly to the corresponding terminals of the DC power distribution box. l
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
When the –48 V/–60 V power is accessed, connect the blue wire to the –48 V/–60 V power terminal and connect the black wire to the power ground. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables l
When the +24 V power is accessed, connect the red wire to the +24 power terminal, and connect the black wire to the power ground.
Step 3 See Appendix 11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling to bundle the power cable with a binding strap. Step 4 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. For the method of making labels, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. ----End
5.3 Installing the E1/T1 Cables T1 cables are installed in the same method as E1 cables. This section considers the installation of E1 cables as an example to describe how to install E1/T1 cables. 5.3.1 About the E1/T1 Cables The E1 cables are available in two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm cables. The T1 cables are available in only one type: 100-ohm cables. The 120-ohm E1 cable can be used to transmit T1 signals. 5.3.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the E1/T1 cables.
5.3.1 About the E1/T1 Cables The E1 cables are available in two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm cables. The T1 cables are available in only one type: 100-ohm cables. The 120-ohm E1 cable can be used to transmit T1 signals.
75-Ohm E1 Cable The 75-ohm E1 cable is terminated with a DB78 connector to transmit 16 E1 signals.Figure 5-5 shows the structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable, and Table 5-1 lists the pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable. Figure 5-5 Structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable
Metal screw
Main label W1 ~ W4
X1
5-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Table 5-1 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable Cabl e
Pin
Signa l
No.
Remar ks
Cable
Pin
Signal
No.
Remar ks
W1
2
Tip
1
R1
W2
4
Tip
1
R5
22
Ring
24
Ring
31
Tip
33
Tip
2
T5
12
Ring
14
Ring
41
Tip
43
Tip
3
R6
61
Ring
63
Ring
70
Tip
72
Tip
4
T6
51
Ring
53
Ring
3
Tip
5
Tip
5
R7
23
Ring
25
Ring
32
Tip
34
Tip
6
T7
13
Ring
15
Ring
42
Tip
44
Tip
7
R8
62
Ring
64
Ring
71
Tip
73
Tip
8
T8
52
Ring
54
Ring
6
Tip
8
Tip
1
R13
26
Ring
28
Ring
35
Tip
37
Tip
2
T13
16
Ring
18
Ring
45
Tip
47
Tip
3
R14
65
Ring
67
Ring
74
Tip
76
Tip
4
T14
55
Ring
57
Ring
7
Tip
9
Tip
5
R15
27
Ring
29
Ring
36
Tip
38
Tip
6
T15
17
Ring
19
Ring
46
Tip
48
Tip
7
R16
W3
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
R4
T4
R9
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
R12
W4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Cabl e
Pin
Signa l
66
Ring
75
Tip
56
Ring
No.
8
Remar ks
Cable
T12
Pin
Signal
68
Ring
77
Tip
58
Ring
No.
Remar ks
8
T16
120/100-Ohm E1/T1 Cable The 120/100-ohm E1 cable is terminated with a DB78 connector to transmit 16 E1/T1 signals. Figure 5-6 shows the structure of the 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable, andTable 5-2 lists the pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable. Figure 5-6 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable Metal screw
Main label W1 ~ W4
X1
Table 5-2 Pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable
5-8
Cabl e
Pin
Signa l
No.
Remar ks
Cable
Pin
Signal
No.
Remar ks
W1
2
Blue
1
R1
W2
6
Blue
1
R5
22
White
26
White
41
Orang e
45
Orange
2
T5
61
White
65
White
3
Green
7
Green
3
R6
23
White
27
White
42
Brown
46
Brown
4
T6
62
White
66
White
4
Grey
8
Grey
5
R7
24
White
28
White
43
Blue
47
Blue
6
T7
2
3
4
5
6
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Cabl e
W3
Pin
Signa l
63
Red
5
Orang e
25
Red
44
Green
64
Red
31
Blue
12
White
70
Orang e
51
White
32
Green
13
White
71
Brown
52
White
33
Grey
14
White
72
Blue
53
Red
34
Orang e
15
Red
73
Green
54
Red
No.
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Remar ks
Cable
R4
T4
R9
W4
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
R12
T12
Pin
Signal
67
Red
59
Orange
29
Red
48
Green
68
Red
35
Blue
16
White
71
Orange
55
White
36
Green
17
White
75
Brown
56
White
37
Grey
18
White
76
Blue
57
Red
38
Orange
19
Red
77
Green
58
Red
No.
Remar ks
7
R8
8
T8
1
R13
2
T13
3
R14
4
T14
5
R15
6
T15
7
R16
8
T16
5.3.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the E1/T1 cables.
Prerequisite l
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed.
l
The power cable and PGND cable must be installed.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
E1/T1 cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Procedure Step 1 Measure and cut the cables according to the distance between the cabinet and the DDF. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the cables into the cabinet through the cabling holes on the top of the cabinet. Step 4 Plug the cable connectors into the sockets on the E1 interface board. Take care when plugging the connectors to prevent wrong connection. Figure 5-7. Figure 5-7 Installing the cable with a DB78 connector
NOTE
Use a proper force to plug the cable connector into the interface board. When resistance exists, check the connector. Do not force the connector in; otherwise, the pins may be bent.
Step 5 Tighten the screws. Step 6 Bundle the cables properly with a binding strap. Step 7 Make the E1 cable connector on the DDF side. Step 8 Examine all the E1 cable connectors and make sure that the circuit of each cable runs smoothly. For details, see Appendix 14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector. Step 9 Install and route the cables on the DDF side. 5-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Step 10 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 11 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 12 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End
5.4 Installing E3/T3/STM-1e Cables The methods for installing the E3, T3 and STM-1e cables are the same. 5.4.1 About the E3/T3/STM-1e Cables The E3/T3/STM-1e cables are 75-ohm high-frequency signal cables that are terminated with SMB coaxial connectors. 5.4.2 Installation Procedures This section considers the installation of the STM-1e cable as an example to describe how to install E3/T3/STM-1e cables.
5.4.1 About the E3/T3/STM-1e Cables The E3/T3/STM-1e cables are 75-ohm high-frequency signal cables that are terminated with SMB coaxial connectors. Figure 5-8 shows the SMB connector. Figure 5-8 E3/T3/STM-1e cable
SMB connector
5.4.2 Installation Procedures This section considers the installation of the STM-1e cable as an example to describe how to install E3/T3/STM-1e cables.
Prerequisite l
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed.
l
The power cable and PGND cable must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Installing Materials l
E3/T3/STM-1e cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Procedure Step 1 Measure and cut the cables according to the distance between the cabinet and the DDF. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the cables into the cabinet through the cabling holes on the top of the cabinet. Step 4 Connect the cable connector to the SMB interface on the STM-1 electrical interface board. Step 5 Bundle the cables properly with a binding strap. Step 6 Build up the E1 cable connector on the DDF side. For details, see Appendix 14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector. Step 7 Check the connectors of all the STM-1 cables to ensure that there is no short circuit or open circuit in the cables. For the detailed methods of checking the cables, see Appendix 14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector. Step 8 Install and route the cables on the DDF side. Step 9 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 10 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 11 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End
5.5 Installing Ethernet Cables This section describes how to install Ethernet cables. 5.5.1 About the Ethernet Cable In of the structure, the Ethernet cable is an 8-core category-5 twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors on both ends. 5.5.2 Installing Procedures This section describes how to install Ethernet cables.
5.5.1 About the Ethernet Cable In of the structure, the Ethernet cable is an 8-core category-5 twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors on both ends. Figure 5-9 shows the connector of the Ethernet cable.
5-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Figure 5-9 Connector of the Ethernet cable PIN #8 PIN #1
RJ-45 connector
The Ethernet cables are available in two types: the straight-through cable and crossover cable. The straight-through cable and the crossover cable differ in the connection relation but have the same structure. The connection of the straight-through cable is provided in Table 5-3. Table 5-3 Connection relation of the straight-through cable Connector X1
8-Core Category-5 Twisted Pair
Connector X2
Pin 1
White (orange)
Pin 1
Pin 2
Orange
Pin 2
Pin 3
White (green)
Pin 3
Pin 4
Blue
Pin 4
Pin 5
White (blue)
Pin 5
Pin 6
Green
Pin 6
Pin 7
White (brown)
Pin 7
Pin 8
Brown
Pin 8
The connection relation of the crossover cable is provided in Table 5-4. Table 5-4 Connection relation of the crossover cable
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Connector X1
8-Core Category-5 Twisted Pair
Connector X2
Pin 1
White (orange)
Pin 3
Pin 2
Orange
Pin 6
Pin 3
White (green)
Pin 1
Pin 4
Blue
Pin 4
Pin 5
White (blue)
Pin 5
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-13
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Connector X1
8-Core Category-5 Twisted Pair
Connector X2
Pin 6
Green
Pin 2
Pin 7
White (brown)
Pin 7
Pin 8
Brown
Pin 8
5.5.2 Installing Procedures This section describes how to install Ethernet cables.
Prerequisite l
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed.
l
The power cable and PGND cable must be installed.
l
The Ethernet equipment must be properly installed in the equipment room, and the relevant interfaces must be reserved.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Ethernet cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Procedure Step 1 Cut a length of network cable according to the distance between the cabinet and the Ethernet equipment. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the Ethernet signal cable into the cabinet through the cabling hole for signal cables. Step 4 Connect the Ethernet cable that is routed into the cabinet to the RJ-45 interface on the Ethernet access board. Step 5 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the interface of the Ethernet equipment. Step 6 Properly bundle the Ethernet cables. Step 7 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 8 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 9 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End 5-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
5.6 Installing the Framed E1 Cable This section describes how to install the Framed E1 cable. 5.6.1 About the Framed E1 Cable The Framed E1 interface on the FP2D board adopts the DB78 connector and can transmit 16 Framed E1 signals. 5.6.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the Framed E1 cable.
5.6.1 About the Framed E1 Cable The Framed E1 interface on the FP2D board adopts the DB78 connector and can transmit 16 Framed E1 signals. The Framed E1 cables are available in two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm cables. Figure 5-10 shows the Framed E1 cable. Figure 5-10 Framed E1 cable on the FP2D board Metal screw
Main tag
View A W3 W4 A
W1 W2
X1
Table 5-5 provides the pin assignment relations of the 75-ohm Framed E1 cable. Table 5-5 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm Framed E1 cable
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Cabl e
Pin
Core
Seria l Num ber
Remar ks
Cabl e
Pin
Core
Seria l Num ber
Remar ks
W1
2
Tip
1
R1
W2
4
Tip
1
R5
22
Ring
24
Ring
31
Tip
33
Tip
2
T5
12
Ring
14
Ring
41
Tip
43
Tip
3
R6
2
3
T1
R2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Cabl e
W3
5-16
Pin
Core
61
Ring
70
Tip
51
Ring
3
Tip
23
Ring
32
Tip
13
Ring
42
Tip
62
Ring
71
Tip
52
Ring
6
Tip
26
Ring
35
Tip
16
Ring
45
Tip
65
Ring
74
Tip
55
Ring
7
Tip
27
Ring
36
Tip
17
Ring
46
Tip
66
Ring
75
Tip
56
Ring
Seria l Num ber
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Remar ks
Cabl e
T2
R3
T3
R4
T4
R9
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
R12
T12
W4
Pin
Core
63
Ring
72
Tip
53
Ring
5
Tip
25
Ring
34
Tip
15
Ring
44
Tip
64
Ring
73
Tip
54
Ring
8
Tip
28
Ring
37
Tip
18
Ring
47
Tip
67
Ring
76
Tip
57
Ring
9
Tip
29
Ring
38
Tip
19
Ring
48
Tip
68
Ring
77
Tip
58
Ring
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Seria l Num ber
Remar ks
4
T6
5
R7
6
T7
7
R8
8
T8
1
R13
2
T13
3
R14
4
T14
5
R15
6
T15
7
R16
8
T16
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Table 5-6 provides the pin assignment relations of the 120-ohm Framed E1 cable. Table 5-6 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm Framed E1 cable Cabl e
Pin
Core
Seria l Num ber
Rem arks
Cab le
Pin
Core
Seri al Nu mbe r
Rema rks
W1
2
Blue
1
R1
W2
6
Blue
1
R9
22
White
26
White
41
Orang e
45
Orang e
2
R10
61
White
65
White
3
Green
7
Green
3
R11
23
White
27
White
42
Brow n
46
Grow n
4
R12
62
White
66
White
4
Grey
8
Grey
5
R13
24
White
28
White
43
Blue
47
Blue
6
R14
63
Red
67
Red
5
Orang e
59
Orang e
7
R15
25
Red
29
Red
44
Green
48
Green
8
R16
64
Red
68
Red
31
Blue
35
Blue
1
T9
12
White
16
White
70
Orang e
74
Orang e
2
T10
51
White
55
White
32
Green
36
Green
3
T11
13
White
17
White
71
Grow n
75
Brow n
4
T12
W3
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
T1
T2
T3
T4
W4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-17
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Cabl e
Pin
Core
52
White
33
Grey
14
White
72
Blue
53
Red
34
Orang e
15
Red
73
Green
54
Red
Seria l Num ber
5
6
7
8
Rem arks
Cab le
T5
T6
T7
T8
Pin
Core
56
White
37
Grey
18
White
76
Blue
57
Red
38
Orang e
19
Red
77
Green
58
Red
Seri al Nu mbe r
Rema rks
5
T13
6
T14
7
T15
8
T16
5.6.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the Framed E1 cable.
Prerequisite l
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed.
l
The power cable and PGND cable must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Framed E1 cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Procedure Step 1 Measure and cut the cables according to the distance between the cabinet and the DDF. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the cables along the cabling trough and then into the cabinet through the cabling hole for signal cables. 5-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Step 4 Plug the cable connectors into the sockets on the FP2D board. The installation process is as shown in Figure 5-11. Figure 5-11 Installing the Framed E1 cable
Step 5 Bundle the cables properly with a binding strap. Step 6 Make the connector for the Framed E1 cable on the DDF side. For details, see Appendix 14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector. Step 7 Check all the cable connectors to ensure that there is no short-circuit or open circuit in the cables. For details, see Appendix 14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector. Step 8 Install and route the cables on the DDF side. Step 9 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 10 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 11 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End
5.7 Installing the NM Cable This section describes how to install the network management (NM) cable. 5.7.1 About the NM Cable The network cable is available in two types: crossover cable and straight-through cable. Either crossover cable or straight-through cable can be used as the NM cable. 5.7.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the NM cable in the upward cabling mode. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-19
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
5.7.1 About the NM Cable The network cable is available in two types: crossover cable and straight-through cable. Either crossover cable or straight-through cable can be used as the NM cable.
Network Cable The network cable adopts the RJ-45 connectors. Figure 5-12 shows the standard shielded network cable. Figure 5-12 Standard shielded network cable
The pin assignment information of the straight-through cable is provided in Table 5-3. The pin assignment information of the crossover cable is provided in Table 5-4.
NM Interface The NM interface exists on the SCB board, as shown in Figure 5-13. Figure 5-13 Position of the NM interface on the SCB board
ETHERNET
SYNC 1/2
COM2
COM3
COM4(F3)
F2
RUN
1
2
PHONE
CRT RST
ALM OUT1 MODEM(F)
OUT2
IN1/2
IN3/4
SCB NM interface
5.7.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the NM cable in the upward cabling mode.
Prerequisite The NMS must be installed, and the required NM interface must be available.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials
5-20
l
Network cable
l
Label
l
Binding strap Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Procedure Step 1 Cut a length of network cable according to the distance between the cabinet and the NM computer. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the NM cable into the cabinet through the cabling hole for signal cables. Step 4 Run the NM cable along the side and then route the NM cable into the cabinet. Step 5 Run the NM cable along the cabling trough, and plug the cable connector into the ETHERNET interface on the SCB board, as shown in Figure 5-14. Figure 5-14 Installing the NM cable
Step 6 Bundle the NM cable with a binding strap. Step 7 Connect the NM cable to the NM computer. Step 8 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 9 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 10 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End
5.8 Installing the External Clock Cable This section describes how to install the external clock cable. 5.8.1 About the External Clock Cable The external clock cable is used to input and output external clock signals. 5.8.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to route and install the external clock cable between the OptiX 155/622H chassis and the external equipment. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-21
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
5.8.1 About the External Clock Cable The external clock cable is used to input and output external clock signals. This 120-ohm cable uses an RJ-45 connector at one end. The RJ-45 connector is connected to the SYNC 1/2 external clock input or output interface of the SCB board. This cable also uses another connector (of a type as actually required) at the other end to connect to the external equipment, as shown in Figure 5-15. Figure 5-15 Structure of the external clock cable A-A 8 1
1
2
A
X1
1. Interface connector – RJ-45
2. Main label
A-A: Sectional view in direction A
Table 5-7 provides the pin assignment information of the SYNC 1/2 external clock interface. Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the SYNC 1/2 external clock interface Pin Number
Definition
Function
1
EXT1R+
Input of the first external clock
2
EXT1R-
4
EXT1T+
5
EXT1T-
3
EXT2R+
6
EXT2R-
7
EXT2T+
8
EXT2T-
output of the first external clock
Input of the second external clock
Output of the second external clock
5.8.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to route and install the external clock cable between the OptiX 155/622H chassis and the external equipment. 5-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Prerequisite The clock input/output equipment must be properly installed in the equipment room, and the required interface must be available.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
External clock cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Required/As Needed In the upward cabling mode, do as follows to install the external clock cable:
Procedure Step 1 Measure and cut the external clock cable according to the distance between the cabinet and other equipment, and make the cable connectors. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the clock cable into the cabinet through the cabling hole for signal cables. Step 4 Plug the connector of the clock cable into the SYNC 1/2 interface on the SCB board. Step 5 Bundle the clock cable properly with a binding strap. Step 6 Connect the other end of the clock cable to other equipment. Step 7 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 8 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 9 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End
5.9 Installing the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable This section describes how to install the transparent data/housekeeping cable. 5.9.1 About the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable The transparent data/housekeeping cable is used to transport transparent data/housekeeping signals. 5.9.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to install the transparent data/housekeeping cable. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-23
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
5.9.1 About the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable The transparent data/housekeeping cable is used to transport transparent data/housekeeping signals. One end of the cable is an RJ-45 connector that connects to one of the four transparent data and housekeeping interfaces on the SCB board. The other end of the cable connects to the external equipment or the centralized alarm system. The connector of this end must be made when required on site. Figure 5-16 shows the structure of the transparent data/housekeeping cable. Figure 5-16 Structure of the transparent data/housekeeping cable A-A 8 1
1
2
A
X1
1. Interface connector – RJ-45
2. Main label
A-A: Sectional view in direction A
The transparent data/housekeeping cable is connected to the transparent data and housekeeping interface. The first transparent data and housekeeping interface on the left of the SCB board integrates the COM2 and ALM OUT1/MODEM (F)interfaces. Table 5-8 provides the pin assignment information of the interface that integrates the COM2 and ALM OUT1/MODEM (F) interfaces. Table 5-8 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM2 and ALM OUT1/ MODEM (F) interfaces
5-24
Pin Number
Definition
Function
1
RS232_DTR_O
DTR signal of a modem
2
HDD_RXD0_O
Receiving transparent broadcast data (X1 byte)
3
HDD_TXD0_O
Transmitting transparent broadcast data (X1 byte)
4
PGND
Signal ground
5
RS232_RXD_O
Receiving data at the commissioning serial port/X.25 interface
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Pin Number
Definition
Function
6
RS232_TXD_O
Transmitting data at the commissioning serial port/X.25 interface
7
K1OUTA
Alarm output 1
8
K1OUTB
The second transparent data and housekeeping interface on the left of the SCB board integrates the COM3 and OUT2 interfaces. Table 5-9 provides the pin assignment information of the interface that integrates the COM3 and OUT2 interfaces. Table 5-9 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM3 and OUT2 interfaces Pin Number
Definition
Function
1
PGND
Signal ground
2
HDD_RXD1_O
Receiving transparent broadcast data (X2 byte)
3
HDD_TXD1_O
Transmitting transparent broadcast data (X2 byte)
4
PGND
Signal ground
5
F_RX_O
Extended serial port input
6
F_TX_O
Extended serial port output
7
K2OUTA
Alarm output 2
8
K2OUTB
The third transparent data and housekeeping interface on the left of the SCB board integrates the COM4 (F3) and IN1/2 interfaces. Table 5-10 provides the pin assignment information of the interface that integrates the COM4 (F3) and IN1/2 interfaces. Table 5-10 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM4 (F3) and IN1/2 interfaces
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Pin Number
Definition
Function
1
PGND
Signal ground
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-25
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Pin Number
Definition
Function
2
HDD_RXD2_O
Receiving transparent broadcast data (X3 byte)
3
HDD_TXD2_O
Transmitting transparent broadcast data (X3 byte)
4
PGND
Signal ground
5
KGIN_1
Alarm input 1
6
KGINGND_1
7
KGIN_2
8
KGINGND_2
Alarm input 2
The forth transparent data and housekeeping interface on the left of the SCB board integrates the F2 and IN3/4 interfaces. Table 5-11 provides the pin assignment information of the interface that integrates the F2 and IN3/4 interfaces. Table 5-11 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the F2 and IN3/4 interfaces Pin Number
Definition
Function
1
PGND
Signal ground
2
HDD_RXD3_O
Receiving transparent broadcast data (X4 byte))
3
HDD_TXD3_O
Transmitting transparent broadcast data (X4 byte)
4
PGND
Signal ground
5
KGIN_3
Alarm input 3
6
KGINGND_3
7
KGIN_4
8
KGINGND_4
Alarm input 4
5.9.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to install the transparent data/housekeeping cable.
Prerequisite l
5-26
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide l
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
The power cable and PGND cable must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Transparent data cable
l
Housekeeping cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Procedure Step 1 Measure and cut the transparent data/housekeeping cable according to the distance from the cabinet to the alarm monitor in the equipment room. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the cable into the cabinet through the cabling hole for signal cables. Step 4 Connect the cable to the alarm output interface on the SCB board. Plug the cable connector into the socket on the board. When you hear a click sound, the cable is properly connected. See Figure 5-17. Figure 5-17 Installing transparent data/housekeeping cable
Step 5 Bundle the transparent data/housekeeping cable properly with a binding strap. Step 6 Remove the temporary labels on the cables. Step 7 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-27
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Step 8 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. Ensure that the rectangular text area of the label faces rightward or downward. ----End
5.10 Checking the Cable Installation After the cable is installed, check whether the cable installation is correct. The following requirements must be met when the cable installation is completed:
5-28
l
All the cables must be bound with proper tightness. The spacing between the cable ties must be even, and the remaining parts of the cable ties must be cut off neatly. All cable ties must face the same direction, thus keeping the overall appearance nice.
l
All cables must be arranged smoothly, with no roundabout twists or turns.
l
When a trough is used for cabling outside the cabinet, the cables must not overflow the trough.
l
Cables must be secured on the beam of the cabling frame, if such a cabling frame is used for cabling. The cables must be bound neatly in rectangle shape (or in circular shape when the cables are single-cored).
l
If required, the cables must be bent in a radius as large as possible. The cables must not be bound where they are bent.
l
The –48 V power cable must be blue and be connected to the NEG (–) power terminal. The –48 V grounding cable must be black and be connected to the RTN (+) power terminal. The +24 V power cable must be red and be connected to the RTN (+) power terminal. The PGND cable must be yellowish green or yellow.
l
The power cables must be connected correctly and firmly.
l
The diameter of the power cables must meet the power distribution requirements.
l
The external power cables must be arranged separately from signal cables, with a space of more than 3 cm.
l
The power cables must be bent smoothly.
l
The power cables must be made of an entire piece of copper core, without any t in the middle.
l
Labels for the power cables must be filled in and affixed to the cables as required. All labels must be neat and face the same direction.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
About This Chapter The fiber jumpers are divided into internal fiber jumpers and external fiber jumpers. Internal fiber jumpers are used for connecting optical interfaces within a cabinet. External fiber jumpers are used for connecting optical interfaces of a cabinet to those of other cabinets or peripherals. NOTE
Before you install the fiber jumpers, remove the front door and side s of the cabinet. Assemble the front door and side s after the fiber jumpers are installed.
6.1 About Fiber Jumpers Based on the cable types, the fiber jumpers that the OptiX 155/622H uses are classified into two types, which are 2 mm single-mode and 2 mm multi-mode fiber jumpers. Based on the connector types, the fiber jumpers that the OptiX 155/622H uses are classified into three types, which are the fiber jumpers with SC, FC, and LC connectors. 6.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to route and install the external fiber jumpers. A corrugated pipe or winding pipe is required to protect the fiber jumpers between the cabinet and the ODF during the cabling. 6.3 Checking the Installation After the fiber jumper is installed, check whether the fiber jumper installation is correct.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-1
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6.1 About Fiber Jumpers Based on the cable types, the fiber jumpers that the OptiX 155/622H uses are classified into two types, which are 2 mm single-mode and 2 mm multi-mode fiber jumpers. Based on the connector types, the fiber jumpers that the OptiX 155/622H uses are classified into three types, which are the fiber jumpers with SC, FC, and LC connectors. The single-mode fiber jumper can be distinguished from the multi-mode fiber jumper by different cable colors. The single-mode fiber jumper is a yellow cable and the multi-mode fiber jumper is a red cable.
CAUTION Multi-mode optical transmission modules can only be connected to the multi-mode fibers. Single-mode optical modules can only be connected to the single-mode fibers. Figure 6-1 shows the fiber connectors that are used by the OptiX 155/622H.
6-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
Figure 6-1 Fiber connectors Protective cap
FC connector
LC connector Protective cap
Protective cap
SC connector
6.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to route and install the external fiber jumpers. A corrugated pipe or winding pipe is required to protect the fiber jumpers between the cabinet and the ODF during the cabling.
Prerequisite The ODF must be installed in the equipment room, and the required interface must be reserved.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Fiber jumper Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-3
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers l
Corrugated pipe or winding pipe
l
Binding strap
l
Label
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
NOTE
When fiber jumpers need to be routed outside the cabinet, a protective pipe is required, which may be a corrugated pipe or winding pipe. A corrugated pipe can house 12 to 15 fiber jumpers. A 12 mm winding pipe can wind 30 fiber jumpers, and a 6 mm winding pipe can wind about 18 fiber jumpers. This section describes how to install fiber jumpers when a corrugated pipe is used to protect the fiber jumpers.
Context
CAUTION Make sure that the connector is clean before installing the fiber jumper. Clean the connector of the fiber jumper if the connector has any dirt on it. For details, refer to the OptiX 155/622H (Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4 MSTP Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting. NOTE
On the optical interface board of the OptiX 155/622H, the interface with a transmit interface, and the one with a
symbol on the left is the
symbol on the right is the receive interface.
DANGER Avoid direct eye exposure to optical interfaces of optical interface boards and fiber jumpers. The laser beams of the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber may cause damage to the eyes.
Procedure Step 1 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the fiber jumpers. Step 2 Measure and cut the corrugated pipe according to the cabling distance between the cabinet and the ODF. Step 3 Route the fiber jumper through the corrugated pipe. It is forbidden to force the fiber jumper in or pull the fiber fiercely. After ing the fiber jumpers through the corrugated pipe, wrap the cut with adhesive tape to protect the fiber jumpers against wear and tear. TIP
To ease the ing of fiber jumpers through the corrugated pipe, let the jumpers fall by its gravity.
Step 4 Route the corrugated pipe into the cabinet through the fiber hole on the top of the cabinet. If there is not enough room for the corrugated pipe to through the fiber hole, place the corrugated pipe into the cable hole on the top of the cabinet for fixation.
6-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
Figure 6-2 Cable holes on the cabinet Cable hole
Fiber hole
Cable hole
Cable hole
Fiber hole
Step 5 Route the fiber jumper along the fiber path on the left of the cabinet and then to the chassis. Step 6 Take the protective cap off the fiber connector and clean the fiber connector with special cleaning tissue. NOTE
l
Keep the protective caps well for possible use in the future.
l
The unused fiber connectors must be covered with protective caps.
Step 7 Based on the connector type of the fiber jumper, connect the fiber jumper in either of the following methods: l
Fiber jumper with the LC connector: Align the LC connector with the optical interface, and then insert it in along the slide rail with proper strength until you hear a click. See Figure 6-3.
l
Fiber jumper with the FC connector: Align the FC connector with the optical interface, and ensure that the center of the connector is in the same line as the center of the optical interface. Insert the connector until it snaps into place. Then rotate the nut clockwise to secure the connector.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
Figure 6-3 Installing the fiber jumper
Step 8 Trim the fiber jumpers and bundle them with binding straps. For details, see Appendix 13 Binding Strap. Step 9 Install and route the fiber jumpers on the ODF side. Step 10 Remove the temporary labels on the cables. Step 11 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 12 Attach the labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. See Figure 6-4. Figure 6-4 Attaching a label Fiber jumper
Fiber jumper
Fiber jumper
Fold to the right TO: A03 33 33 33 33
Label
Fold upwards
----End
6.3 Checking the Installation After the fiber jumper is installed, check whether the fiber jumper installation is correct. The following requirements should be met when the installation of the fiber jumper is complete: 6-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
l
The labels on the two ends of the fiber jumper are filled in correctly and clearly. All the labels are arranged neatly and face toward the same direction.
l
The connection between the fiber jumper and the optical interface board or the flange is firm.
l
The t point of the fiber jumper is clean.
l
All the fiber jumpers are nicely bound in even spacing with proper tightness.
l
The fiber jumper between the equipment and the ODF is protected with a protection pipe. The two ends of the protective pipe should be extended into the equipment.
l
Forcible pulling and unnatural bending are not allowed in the fiber jumper cabling. And there should be no other cables on them.
l
The fiber jumper should be routed in such a way as to facilitate maintenance and capacity expansion.
l
The fiber jumpers are routed and connected in compliance with the requirements stated in the design documents.
l
The fiber jumpers are secured smoothly and interconnected reliably in the ODF. The redundant fiber jumpers are coiled tidily.
l
No other cables or items are placed on the fiber jumper.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
7
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
Installing the Orderwire Phone
About This Chapter This section describes how to install the orderwire phone. 7.1 About the Orderwire Interface Both ends of phone wire are RJ-11 connectors. One end is inserted to the pin hole at the bottom of the phone set, and the other is inserted to PHONE at the SCB board of the OptiX 155/622H. 7.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone This section describes the procedures for installing the orderwire phone in two installation modes. 7.3 Checking the Orderwire Phone Installation After the orderwire phone is installed, you need to check whether the installation is correct.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
7.1 About the Orderwire Interface Both ends of phone wire are RJ-11 connectors. One end is inserted to the pin hole at the bottom of the phone set, and the other is inserted to PHONE at the SCB board of the OptiX 155/622H. Figure 7-1 shows the orderwire interface on the SCB board. Figure 7-1 Orderwire interface
ETHERNET
SYNC 1/2
COM2
COM3
COM4(F3)
F2
RUN
1
2
PHONE
CRT RST
ALM OUT1 MODEM(F)
OUT2
IN1/2
IN3/4
SCB
Orderwire interface
7.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone This section describes the procedures for installing the orderwire phone in two installation modes. 7.2.1 Installing the Orderwire Phone in the Cabinet This section considers the installation of the orderwire phone in an ETSI 300 mm cabinet as an example to describe how to install the orderwire phone set in the cabinet and how to install the orderwire phone on the orderwire phone set. 7.2.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone in an Open Rack This section considers the installation of the orderwire phone in an open rack to describe how to insert the orderwire phone in the phone set and fix the orderwire phone set on the OptiX 155/622H chassis.
7.2.1 Installing the Orderwire Phone in the Cabinet This section considers the installation of the orderwire phone in an ETSI 300 mm cabinet as an example to describe how to install the orderwire phone set in the cabinet and how to install the orderwire phone on the orderwire phone set.
Prerequisite The cabinet and the OptiX 155/622H chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials
7-2
l
Orderwire phone
l
Orderwire cable Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide l
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
Orderwire phone set
Procedure Step 1 See Figure 7-2 to fix the orderwire phone set in the cabinet. Figure 7-2 Fixing the orderwire phone set in the cabinet
Step 2 Place the orderwire phone on the phone set and face the keyboard of the orderwire phone to the phone set. Step 3 Insert one end of the phone cable into the phone. Set the ringing switch to "ON" and the dialing mode switch to "T". Step 4 Insert the other connector of the orderwire cable into the PHONE interface on the SCB board. ----End
7.2.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone in an Open Rack This section considers the installation of the orderwire phone in an open rack to describe how to insert the orderwire phone in the phone set and fix the orderwire phone set on the OptiX 155/622H chassis. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
Prerequisite The cabinet and the OptiX 155/622H chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Orderwire phone
l
Orderwire cable
l
Orderwire phone set
Procedure Step 1 See Figure 7-3 to insert the orderwire phone in the phone set and fix the orderwire phone set on the OptiX 155/622H chassis. Figure 7-3 Position for installing the orderwire phone in the open rack
Orderwire phone
Orderwire phone
7-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
Step 2 Insert one end of the phone cable into the phone. Set the ringing switch to "ON" and the dialing mode switch to "T". Step 3 Insert the other connector of the orderwire cable into the PHONE interface on the SCB board. ----End
7.3 Checking the Orderwire Phone Installation After the orderwire phone is installed, you need to check whether the installation is correct. The following requirements should be met when the installation of the orderwire phone is completed: l
The installation position of the orderwire frame in the cabinet is correct.
l
The screws are firmly installed.
l
Set the ringing switch to "ON" and the dialing mode switch to "T".
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
Powering On and Checking the Equipment
About This Chapter This section describes the operations that are performed during powering on the equipment.
DANGER It is dangerous to touch the equipment power supply directly or indirectly by means of a damp object. 8.1 Powering On the Cabinet This topic describes how to power on the cabinet. 8.2 Powering On the Chassis To power on the chassis is the last step of the entire procedure for powering on the equipment. To prevent the powering on of the equipment from being impacted by incorrect installation, check the installation of the power supply and the distribution of power cables before powering on the chassis. 8.3 Checking the Fan Running Status The fan starts to work after the equipment is powered on. The fan indicators indicate the working state of the fans. If the indicator indicates that the fan is faulty, replace the faulty fan in time. This section describes how to determine the state of the fan hardware by checking the fan indicators.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-1
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8.1 Powering On the Cabinet This topic describes how to power on the cabinet. To power the cabinet, do as follows: l
Check the fuse capacity of the power supply device.
l
Measure the impedance between the power terminals of the cabinet.
l
Feed power to the cabinet.
l
Feed power to the subrack.
DANGER Direct touch or indirect touch through moist materials of the power supply is fatal. 8.1.1 Checking Fuse Currents of the Power Supply The fuse currents of the power supply device ensures that the OptiX 155/622H is normally operating even with the maximum power consumption. This topic describes how to check the fuse capacity of the power supply device to ensure that the fuse capacity meets the requirement for the normal operation of the OptiX 155/622H. 8.1.2 Testing the Resistance Between the Power Cable Terminals of the Cabinet To prevent a short circuit or reverse terminal connection when installing the power cables, test the resistance between the power cable terminals of the cabinet. This topic describes how to test the resistance between the power cable terminals. 8.1.3 Powering On a Cabinet If the power voltage of the cabinet is abnormal, the OptiX 155/622H operates in an abnormal manner or fails to operate. This topic describes how to power on the cabinet and test the power voltage. Perform this task to ensure the voltage of the power supply meets the requirements of the OptiX 155/622H.
8.1.1 Checking Fuse Currents of the Power Supply The fuse currents of the power supply device ensures that the OptiX 155/622H is normally operating even with the maximum power consumption. This topic describes how to check the fuse capacity of the power supply device to ensure that the fuse capacity meets the requirement for the normal operation of the OptiX 155/622H.
Prerequisite The power supply device must be installed and tested.
Tools/Instruments None.
8-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
Procedure Step 1 Check the maximum power consumption and fuse current of the OptiX 155/622H. l
Maximum power consumption: 100 W
l
Fuse capacity: 6 A (in normal cases) NOTE
For details on the power consumption of the boards, refer to the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/ STM-4 MSTP Optical Transmission System Hardware Description. NOTE
If the power consumption is configured to exceed 100 W, the system may become unstable.
Step 2 Compute the fuse current of the power supply device with a t consideration of the equipment configuration in the equipment room. Step 3 Check whether the fuse current of the power supply device meets the requirement. ----End
8.1.2 Testing the Resistance Between the Power Cable Terminals of the Cabinet To prevent a short circuit or reverse terminal connection when installing the power cables, test the resistance between the power cable terminals of the cabinet. This topic describes how to test the resistance between the power cable terminals.
Prerequisite The following cables must be installed and distributed: l
Power cables of the cabinet
l
Power grounding cables
l
PGND cables
Tools/Instruments Multimeter
Positions of the Power Cable Terminals It is used to access two –48 V or –60 V DC power supplies, which provide power to the subracks. Figure 8-1 shows the positions of the terminals in the DC distribution box.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
Figure 8-1 Figure 12-1 Positions of the terminals in the DC distribution box. Power terminal NEG(-) 1
2
3
4
1
ON
2
3
4
ON RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-)NEG2(-)
OFF
INPUT SW1/ SW2/ SW3/ 32A 32A 20A
SW4/ 20A
Chassis power switch
OFF SW1/ SW2/ SW3/ 32A 32A 20A
PGND
Power terminal RTN(+)
SW4/ 20A
Chassis power switch
Precautions
WARNING Switch off the external power supply device.
CAUTION If the power supply device is installed with a power monitoring unit, disconnect the power supply device from the power monitoring unit before testing the resistance between the terminals of the power cable. Otherwise, the power monitoring unit might affect the test result.
Procedure Step 1 Switch the power switches of the subracks on the DC PDU to the "OFF" position. Step 2 Use the multimeter to test the resistances between the power terminals NEG (–), RTN (+) and PGND. The values should all be ∞. For the positions of the power cable terminals, see Figure 8-1.
8-4
l
Resistance between NEG1 (–) and RTN1 (+): ∞
l
Resistance between NEG1 (–) and RTN2 (+): ∞
l
Resistance between NEG1 (–) and PGND: ∞
l
Resistance between NEG2 (–) and RTN2 (+): ∞
l
Resistance between NEG2 (–) and RTN1 (+): ∞
l
Resistance between NEG2 (–) and PGND: ∞ Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
CAUTION If the test result shows that the resistance is not ∞, a fault exists between NEG (–), RTN (+) and PGND. Clear the fault and then proceed with Step 2. For the troubleshooting methods, refer to the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4 MSTP Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting. Step 3 Switch the subrack power switches on the DC PDU to the "ON" position. Step 4 Step 4 Connect the positive pole of the multimeter to RTN (+) and the negative pole to NEG (–). Test the resistance between the following power cable terminals (the resistance should be larger than 20 ohms): l
Resistance between NEG1 (–) and RTN1 (+): > 20,000 ohms
l
Resistance between NEG1 (–) and RTN2 (+): > 20,000 ohms
l
Resistance between NEG2 (–) and RTN2 (+): > 20,000 ohms
l
Resistance between NEG2 (–) and RTN1 (+): > 20,000 ohms
CAUTION If the resistance between the terminals is less than 20 ohms, a short circuit occurs between the working power and the working ground. In this case, clear the fault and then perform Step 4. If the resistance between the terminals is less than 20,000 ohms, the power supply is faulty. In this case, locate and then clear the fault. For the troubleshooting methods, refer to the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4 MSTP Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting. Step 5 Switch the subrack power switches to the "OFF" position, after the test is complete. ----End
8.1.3 Powering On a Cabinet If the power voltage of the cabinet is abnormal, the OptiX 155/622H operates in an abnormal manner or fails to operate. This topic describes how to power on the cabinet and test the power voltage. Perform this task to ensure the voltage of the power supply meets the requirements of the OptiX 155/622H.
Prerequisite The following tasks must be performed: l
Checking the fuse currents of the power supply device
l
Testing the resistance between the power cable poles of the cabinet
Tools/Instruments Multimeter Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-5
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Procedure Step 1 Check the status of the power switch of the OptiX 155/622H chassis to ensure that the switch is in the "OFF" state. Step 2 Switch on the power supply device. Step 3 Test the voltage of the external power supply device to ensure that the positive and negative poles of the power supply are correctly connected. l
The voltage should range from –38.4 V to –57.6 V, if the standard input voltage is –48 V.
l
The voltage should range from –48.0 V to –72.0 V, if the standard input voltage is –60 V.
l
The voltage should range from +19.2 V to +28.0 V, if the standard input voltage is +24 V.
CAUTION If the output voltage of the power supply device is not within this working range, reconstruction should be made and power-on is forbidden. ----End
8.2 Powering On the Chassis To power on the chassis is the last step of the entire procedure for powering on the equipment. To prevent the powering on of the equipment from being impacted by incorrect installation, check the installation of the power supply and the distribution of power cables before powering on the chassis.
Prerequisite The cabinet must be powered on.
Tools/Instruments None.
Procedure Step 1 Ensure that the voltage is normal and turn on the power switch on the POI/POU board. The green RUN indicator on the rear should flash.
WARNING Do not insert or remove the power plug and the POI/POU board when the power is on. Step 2 If the equipment is configured with data, all boards should work normally five or six minutes after the equipment is powered on. The green RUN indicator on the chassis should flash (on for one second and then off for one second). 8-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
NOTE
If the green indicator is off or constantly on, the equipment is faulty. For the meanings of the board indicators, refer to the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4 MSTP Optical Transmission System Hardware Description.
Step 3 Check the cabinet power indicator on the top of the cabinet to ensure that the green indicator is constantly on. ----End
8.3 Checking the Fan Running Status The fan starts to work after the equipment is powered on. The fan indicators indicate the working state of the fans. If the indicator indicates that the fan is faulty, replace the faulty fan in time. This section describes how to determine the state of the fan hardware by checking the fan indicators.
Prerequisite The equipment must be powered on.
Tools/Instruments None.
Procedure Step 1 Check the yellow fan indicator FAN, which should be off normally. If the indicator is on, the fan is faulty. Step 2 You can feel wind blowing when you put your hand at the side of the FAN. ----End
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Operation Environment Requirements
About This Chapter This appendix describes the requirements for the operating environment. 9.1 Requirements for the Equipment Room Environment This section describes the operation environment of the optical transmission equipment. 9.2 Layout of Equipment Room This section describes the principles of the overall layout of the equipment room. 9.3 Construction of the Equipment Room This section describes the requirements for the construction of the equipment room. 9.4 Cleanliness of the Equipment Room This section describes the requirements for the cleanness of the equipment room. 9.5 Temperature and Humidity This section describes the requirements for the relative humidity and ambient temperature in the equipment room. 9.6 Corrosive Gas Control Requirements This section describes the requirements for the corrosive gases in the equipment room. 9.7 Electromagnetic Requirements This section describes the electromagnetic conditions and the measures for suppressing electromagnetic interferences. 9.8 Antistatic Protection This section describes the requirements for the ESD prevention and the preventive measures for the equipment room. 9.9 Lightning Protection and Grounding Requirements This section describes the requirements for lightning protection and grounding. 9.10 Power Supply This section describes the DC power supply system. 9.11 Lighting in the Equipment Room The OptiX transmission equipment room is equipped with three lighting systems. 9.12 Protection System Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-1
9 Operation Environment Requirements
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
This section describes the requirements for the protection system.
9-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
9.1 Requirements for the Equipment Room Environment This section describes the operation environment of the optical transmission equipment. A good operation environment is the key to guaranteeing the safe operation of the OptiX optical transmission equipment. Therefore, the equipment room should not be located in any area with high temperature, heavy dust, poisonous gas, dangerous explosives, low pressure, serious vibration or loud noises. Moreover, it should be built away from the general step-down electrical substations and traction substations. While deg the project, you need to consider the hydrographic, geological, seismic and traffic factors according to the communication network planning and communication technology, so as to choose the place that meets the environment design requirement. The engineering design in of construction, structure, heating, ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire fighting should comply with the environment requirements for optical synchronous transmission equipment. It should also comply with the international standards and specifications related to industrial enterprise, environment protection, fire fighting, and human protection, as well as the regulations and requirements for constructing and deg buildings. Site requirements are as follows: l
The site should be kept away from pollution sources. Ensure that the site is located more than 5 km away from heavy pollution sources such as the smeltery and coal mine, and more than 3.7 km away from medium pollution sources such as chemical, rubber, and galvanization industries, and more than 2 km away from light pollution sources such as food and tanner industries. If the pollution sources cannot be avoided, the equipment room must be located in the perennial upwind direction of the pollution sources. In addition, quality equipment room or protective products must be adopted.
l
The ventilation port for air exchange of the equipment room must be kept away from the exhaust of city waste pipes, big cesspools and sewage treatment tanks. The equipment room should be kept in the positive pressure state lest the corrosive gases enter the equipment room and erode components and circuit boards.
l
The equipment room should be kept away from the industrial and heating boilers.
l
The equipment room is located on the second floor or the higher floor. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the ground for equipment installation in the equipment room shall be at least 600 mm above the maximum flood level in the local record.
l
The equipment room should be kept away from livestock farms. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, it should be located in the perennial upwind direction of the livestock farms.
l
The equipment room should be kept 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt lake. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the equipment room should be airtight with cooling facilities. In addition, the salt-affected soil cannot be used as the construction material. Otherwise, the equipment applicable in atrocious environment must be adopted.
l
The historical livestock room or the chemical fertilizer warehouse cannot be used as the equipment room.
l
The equipment room should be solid enough to withstand wind and downpour.
l
The equipment room should be kept away from the road or sand field with dusts flying around. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the windows and doors of the equipment room should be kept away from the sources of pollution.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
9.2 Layout of Equipment Room This section describes the principles of the overall layout of the equipment room. The communication equipment room houses a complete set of communication transmission equipment, for example, SPC switching equipment, power supply, and so on. They should be arranged compactly for ease of maintenance and management. Figure 9-1 shows a typical layout of the equipment room. Figure 9-1 Layout of the equipment room Service console
Distribution frame (MDF) room
Control room
SPC switching room
Transmission room
Diesel room
Power distribution room
Battery room
Transformer room
Power line Communication line Network line
The principles for layout of the equipment room are as follows: l
The layout should meet the requirements for wiring and maintaining the communication cable and power cable.
l
The layout should avoid line roundabout for convenient maintenance, thus lowering the cable cost, reducing communication failures and improving the work efficiency.
l
The transmission equipment should not be installed in a separate room close to the MDF room or near the switch.
9.3 Construction of the Equipment Room This section describes the requirements for the construction of the equipment room. The construction of the equipment room shall meet the requirements as listed in Table 9-1. Table 9-1 Construction requirements for the equipment room
9-4
Item
Requirements
Area
The equipment room should be able to house all the devices of the terminal office at least.
Net height
Minimum indoor height refers to the net height under the roof beam or under the ventilation pipe. Normally it is no less than 3 m. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Item
Requirements
Indoor floor
The floor of the equipment room should be semi-conductive and not dustarousing. Generally, ESD-preventive raised floor is required. The floor boards should be laid tightly and firmly. For each square metre of floor space, the horizontal tolerance should not be greater than 2 mm. If no raised floor is available, electrostatic conductive floor material (with a volume resistivity ranging 1.0 x 107 ohms to 1.0 x 1010 ohms should be laid. The electrostatic conductive floor material or the ESD-preventive raised floor should be grounded well. It can be connected to the grounding device through a current limiting resistor and a connection wire. Resistance of the current limiting resistor should be 1 megaohm.
Load-bearing capacity of floor
> 450 kg/m2
Doors and windows
Doors are single-leaf, 2 m high and 1 m wide. All doors and windows should be sealed with dust-proof rubber strips. Double-layer glass is recommended for windows.
Wall
The wall can be covered with wallpaper or lusterless paint, but not the paint that is apt to get pulverized or peeled.
Indoor ducts
Indoor ducts are used for cabling. The inside of the ducts should be smooth and clean. The reserved length and width (margins) as well as the number, position and size of the holes should comply with the relevant requirements for placing the optical synchronous transmission equipment.
Water supply and drainage
The service pipes, drain pipes and rain pipes should not through the equipment room. Fire hydrants should not be placed in the equipment room, but in corridors or the place near the staircase where they can be easily seen and accessed to.
Internal partition wall
The place where the equipment is installed is separated from the equipment room door. The partition wall can hold back some dusts, as shown in Figure 9-2.
Installation position of the air conditioner
The air conditioner should be installed in the place where the discharged air from the air conditioner shall not be directed to the equipment.
Other requirements
In addition to the rodent-proof measures (for example, measures against mice), measures against proliferation of fungi and mildew should be taken in the equipment room.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Figure 9-2 Internal partition wall of the equipment room Air conditioner Equipment
Partition wall
9.4 Cleanliness of the Equipment Room This section describes the requirements for the cleanness of the equipment room. Dusts on the equipment may lead to electrostatic adherence, and consequently result in poor connection between metal connectors or connecting points. This will reduce the service life of the equipment, and even makes it faulty. Table 9-2 provides the specifications for the density and diameter of dust particles in the equipment room. Table 9-2 Limits of dust diameter and density in the equipment room Maximum Diameter (μm)
0.05
1
3
5
Maximum Density (particles/m3)
14×105
7×105
24×104
13×104
The equipment room shall be guarded against dust and corrosion by harmful gases such as SO2, H2S, NH3, and NO2. Table 9-3 provides the limits for them. Table 9-3 Limited density of harmful gas in the equipment room
9-6
Gas
Average (mg/m3)
Maximum (mg/m3)
SO2
0.2
1.5
H2S
0.006
0.03
NO2
0.04
0.15
NH3
0.05
0.15
Cl2
0.01
0.3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
To meet the above requirements, take the following measures: l
Keep the equipment room far away from pollution sources.
l
Seal the doors and windows.
l
The surfaces of the floor, wall, and ceiling should be made of rust-proof materials.
l
The screen doors and screen windows should be installed for the doors and windows that are open to the outdoor environment. The outer windows should have highly dust-proof function.
l
Clean the equipment room periodically (once every three months).
l
Always wear clean lab coat and protective footwear before getting into the equipment room. Change the antistatic uniform and shoes frequently to keep the antistatic uniform and shoes clean.
l
Cover the ceiling and walls of the equipment room with wallpapers or lusterless paint (pulverized paint prohibited) to prevent dust flake-off.
9.5 Temperature and Humidity This section describes the requirements for the relative humidity and ambient temperature in the equipment room. Proper temperature and humidity should be maintained inside the equipment room so that the transmission equipment can work normally in a constant manner, as provided in Table 9-4. Table 9-4 Requirements for temperature and humidity Temperature
Humidity
Long-term operating condition
Short-term operating conditions
Short-term operating conditions
Short-term operating conditions
0℃ to 45℃
–5℃ to +50℃
10% to 90%
5% to 95%
NOTE The temperature and humidity are measured 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m ahead of the cabinet when it works under normal environment conditions (without any protection plate in front of the cabinet). The short-term operating conditions indicate that the successive working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated annual working time does not exceed 15 days.
To meet the requirements, the following measures can be taken: l
The temperature-control devices should be equipped throughout the year, regardless of the weather conditions.
l
In dry areas, to meet the requirements for relative humidity, a humidifier should be used or you should clean the floor with a wet mop.
l
In areas of high moisture, a dehumidifier should be used.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
9.6 Corrosive Gas Control Requirements This section describes the requirements for the corrosive gases in the equipment room. Besides dust-proofing efforts, measures should be taken to prevent the equipment room from being corroded by harmful gases, for example, SO2, H2S, and NH3. Table 9-5 lists the content limit on corrosive gases. Table 9-5 Corrosive gas content specification Item
Unit
Content
SO2
mg/m3
≤ 0.20
H2S
mg/m3
≤ 0.006
NH3
mg/m3
≤ 0.05
Cl2
mg/m3
≤ 0.01
To comply with the preceding requirements, the following measures must be taken for the equipment room: l
Build the equipment room away from places with high corrosive gas density such as the area near a chemical plant.
l
The air intake of the equipment room should be at the opposite side to the pollution source.
l
Ensure that the storage batteries are isolated and away from each other. It is recommended that you store only one battery in a room.
l
Ensure that a professional monitoring company monitors the environment regularly.
9.7 Electromagnetic Requirements This section describes the electromagnetic conditions and the measures for suppressing electromagnetic interferences. The electromagnetic requirements are provided in Table 9-6. Table 9-6 Electromagnetic specification Item
9-8
Parameter
Low frequency magnetic field
Frequency(Hz)
50 to 20 000
Ampl. A/m(rms)
10 to 0.025
Amplitude modulation radiated electromagnetic fields
Frequency(MHz)
0.009 to 1000
Ampl. V/m(rms)
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Item
Parameter
Pulse modulation radiated electromagnetic fields
Frequency(GHz)
1 to 20
Ampl.(V/m(peak))
3
To suppress electromagnetic interferences, take the following measures: l
Build the equipment room away from electric transformers, high-voltage power lines and other equipment or devices with high current. That is, you must build the equipment room 20 meters or more away from the transformer. In addition, ensure that the equipment room is more than 50 meters away from high-voltage power lines.
l
Build the equipment room away from high-power radio transmitters. That is, build the equipment room at a place free of high-power radio transmitters within 500 meters.
l
If there is a mobile communication transmitter in the comprehensive building, make sure its interference level complies with the corresponding standard. Shielding and isolation measures must be taken for further protection if required.
l
Release and execute stipulations that forbid any personnel using wireless handy communication devices close to the equipment in the equipment room.
9.8 Antistatic Protection This section describes the requirements for the ESD prevention and the preventive measures for the equipment room. The absolute static voltage value should be less than 1000 V. To comply with this requirement, take the following measures: l
Ensure that all the operating personnel have basic static knowledge.
l
Control the humidity in the room to reduce the impact from static electricity.
l
Lay antistatic floor in the room.
l
Wear ESD shoes and uniforms before entering the room.
l
Use antistatic tools such as ESD wrist straps, antistatic tweezers and extraction tools when dealing with the equipment.
l
Ground all conducting materials in the room, including computer terminals.
l
Use antistatic worktables.
l
Keep non-antistatic materials (such as common bags, foams, and rubbers) at least 30 cm away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.
9.9 Lightning Protection and Grounding Requirements This section describes the requirements for lightning protection and grounding. Table 9-7 provides the requirements for lightning protection and grounding.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-9
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Table 9-7 Requirements for lightning protection and grounding
9-10
Item
Description
On structure of the equipment room
Build the equipment room with steel and concrete. The equipment room should be equipped with facilities such as a lightning arrester to protect it against direct lightning strokes. Make sure that the lightning protection grounding of the equipment room, or that of devices such as the lightning arrester, shares the same grounding body with the protection grounding of the building where the room is located.
Use TN-S for AC power supply
Equip the communication office with special electric transformers and a metal-jacketed or insulation-jacketed power cable. The power cable should through a steel pipe and should be buried in the earth before entering the office. Both ends of both the metal jacket and the steel pipe should be grounded properly. Make sure that the cable is buried not less than 15 meters deep. Each of the three live cables at the low-voltage side of the AC transformer should be equipped with a gapless zinc oxide arrester respectively. The chassis, the AC neutral cable of the lowvoltage side, and the metal jacket of the cable connected to the chassis should be grounded properly.
Equip the incoming power cable with a lightning arrester
Do not lead in or lead out AC/DC power cables aerially for the office. Equip the in-room low-voltage power cable with a lightning arrester in the voltage regulator or in the AC . The arrester should be grounded proximately. If the office is located in the city, it is recommended that you use an arrester with the nominal discharge current of not less than 20 kA. If the office is located in the suburb of intermediate lightning danger level or higher, an arrester with the surge current higher than 60 kA is recommended. If the office is located in an isolated huge building in the city or in the mountain area where lightning occurs often, use an arrester that has a surge current of more than 100 kA. The grounding cable should be less than 1 meter long.
DC power supply grounding
The working ground of the office, that is, the anode of a -48 V DC power supply or the cathode of a 24 V power supply, should be led from the indoor grounding bus line properly. The grounding cable should meet the requirement of the maximum load of the equipment. The power supply facilities for the office must contain a DC working neutral line, which is connected from the general grounding bus line or the protection grounding bar of the equipment room.
Equipotential connection
All communication equipment and auxiliary equipment in the room, such as the mobile base station and the transmitting, exchanging, power and distribution frame should be connected to the protection ground. The protection grounding of all equipment in the communication office should share the same general grounding bar, whereas the protection grounding of the same equipment room should all connect to the same protection grounding bar. The working ground and protection ground of the communication equipment in the equipment room should adopt the t grounding mode, that is, they share the same grounding network. Protection grounding measures should also be taken for the indoor cable rack, equipment chassis, metal ventilation pipe, metal door or window.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Item
Description
General requirements on grounding
The AC neutral line must not be connected to the protection ground of any communication equipment. Make sure that there is no fuse, switch or other similar devices on the grounding line. All grounding lines should be as short and straightforward as possible. Take measures to prevent them from being wound
On the grounding resistor
< 1 ohm. The upper end of the grounding body should be 0.7 meters or more underground. In cold areas, the grounding body should be buried in the frozen layer or lower. Make regular monitor efforts on the grounding resistor to make sure the grounding is always valid.
On routing of the signal cable
Signal cables should be led into the communication office from underground. Aerial routing of signal cables is not permitted. The leadin or leadout communication cable should be metal-jacketed. Otherwise, they should be routed in metal pipes. The grounding cable of the arrester should be as short as possible. The empty pairs in the cable should be connected to the protection ground in the equipment room.
On the grounding bus line
The general grounding bus line can be grounding loop or bar. The grounding cable should not contain aluminum material. If an interconnection occurs between different metal connectors, take measures to avoid by electric chemical corrosion. Generally, the crosssectional area is a copper bar of not less than 120 mm2 or zinc-plated flat steel of the same resistance. The grounding bus line should be kept insulated from the construction steel.
On the grounding lead-in wire
The grounding lead-in should not be longer than 30 meters. In addition, it is recommended that you use zinc plated flat steel with the crosssectional area of 40 mm x 4 mm or 50 mm x 5 mm.
9.10 Power Supply This section describes the DC power supply system. The working power voltage for the equipment ranges from –38.4 V to –57.6 V. The transmission equipment offers a transmission path for communication networks, and thus its interruption will have a wide influence. Therefore, the DC power distribution system should be protected against power failure and configured with storage batteries. To deal with a long-term power outage, a diesel generator should be equipped as the standby AC power supply for the backbone transmission equipment. The DC power supply system consists of storage battery, primary power supply (rectifier), DC distributor and control .
Storage battery The storage battery is an essential component of the DC power distribution system of the OptiX equipment functionally. It has the following functions: l
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Stabilizes the voltage for the transmission equipment to work reliably.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements l
Stores energy. In the case of outage of mains, the storage battery can feed power for a period of time, which depends on its capacity, so that the communication will not be interrupted immediately.
l
Filters for large capacitors. The storage batteries are useful for absorbing surge voltage from rectifiers and preventing noise and power frequency interference from getting into the communication equipment.
l
Automatically shuts down. When the voltage of the storage battery drops to below –43 V, the control circuit can automatically shut down the output.
The storage battery of OptiX optical transmission equipment is charged and discharges under a low, constant voltage. Table 9-8 provides the relevant requirements. Table 9-8 DC charge/discharge status and voltage requirements Powe r Supp ly Cate gory
Mains Supply Status
Battery Charge/ Discharge
DC Voltage Value
Termina l Voltage of Each Storage Battery
The Numb er of Storag e Batter ies in Each Group
–48 V DC
Normal
Floating charged by the rectifier
Floating charge voltage reaches 53.5 V.
2.23 V
24 PCS
Outage
Discharge
Discharge voltage reaches 43.2 V.
1.8 V
Resumed
Under loading conditions, automatically charged with a current 0.1 to 0.15 times of the battery capacity.
When the charging voltage reaches 56.4 V, it automatically changes to constant voltage mode, that is changes the charging status to floating charge.
2.35 V
Primary Power Supply (Rectifier) The primary power supply must meet the following requirements:
9-12
l
Primary power supplies shall be able to operate in parallel, and there should be current equalizing device between them.
l
The primary power supplies should be equipped with a current limiting device.
l
The output voltage of the primary power supply should meet the requirement for initial charging of storage batteries, that is 2.35 x 24 = 56.4 V DC (when the power supply is –48 V DC) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
l
A DC voltmeter and an ammeter should be installed for the primary power supplies.
l
The efficiency of the primary power supply should be more than 85% and its power factor more than 0.8.
l
Natural cooling is recommended for the primary power supply. The primary power supply should be able to work continuously with full load within 00℃–400℃.
l
The output noise voltage (measured with a psophometer, plus weighing factors) of the primary power supply should meet the requirements as provided in Table 9-9.
l
The primary power supply should be able to automatically shut down the output at a low voltage.
Table 9-9 DC voltage specifications Item
DC Power Supply for Transmission Equipment
Nominal value (V)
–48
Voltage fluctuation range (V)
–38.4 to –57.6
Noise voltage
0 Hz to 300 Hz
≤ 400 mV (peak value)
300 Hz to 3400 Hz
≤ 2 mV (weighted noise of psophometer)
3.4 kHz to 150 kHz
Single frequency: ≤ 5 mV effective value
Broadband: ≤ 100 mV effective value
150 kHz to 200 kHz
Single frequency: ≤ 3 mV effective value
Broadband: ≤ 30 mV effective value
200 kHz to 500 kHz
Single frequency: ≤ 2 mV effective value
500 kHz to 30 MHz
Single frequency: ≤ 1 mV effective value
DC distributor and control l
The capacity of the primary power supply should be designed according to the power consumption of the transmission equipment of the terminal office, and a certain margin should be reserved. Generally, high frequency switching power supplies with a high switching efficiency should be adopted, which should work in N+1 hot standby mode. There should be an output current equalizer for each power module. The failure of a single power module will not affect the normal operation of the whole DC power distribution system.
l
Each control can access a minimum of two groups of storage batteries. When one of them fails, the other can supply power instead.
l
Each control can access a minimum of 5 primary power supplies.
l
The power supply equipment should be capable of automation, so as to satisfy the nonattendant requirement.
l
When the primary power supply charges the storage batteries in floating charge mode, the number of primary power supplies put into operation depends on the load. When one
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-13
9 Operation Environment Requirements
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
primary power supply becomes faulty, it will drop out automatically, while the standby primary power supply will automatically go into operation. l
In the case of mains outage, storage batteries will discharge. When the mains resumes, it will automatically recharge the discharged storage batteries with a current 0.1 to 0.15 times of the battery capacity. When the charging voltage reaches 56.4 V, it will automatically change to constant-voltage charging.
l
When the storage batteries are fully charged, they will automatically change to floating charge.
The OptiX optical transmission equipment also has critical restriction on random transient noises, which include the abnormal operation noise of the equipment caused by external magnetic interference and the interference from the equipment itself and the grounding cables. The shorter the duration of the transient pulse, the higher values of such transient noises can be allowed. For the allowable values, see Figure 9-3. Figure 9-3 Transient noises
l
When the power supply equipment fails or works abnormally, visual and audible alarms should be given. Such alarm information should be able to be sent to the operation and maintenance center.
l
In case short circuit occurs to a tributary of the power supply system, the whole power distribution system should not be affected by the sharp voltage reduction. And the peak striking voltage should not cause any breakdowns to the transmission equipment.
Suggestions for Basic DC Power
9-14
l
The distributed power supply mode is recommended. That is, it is recommended that you adopt multiple DC power supply systems or locate the power supply equipment at different places.
l
Adopt the DC power supply systems that comply with the relevant standard, and set the output voltage of the communication power supply system to be within the required voltage range.
l
To improve the reliability of the power supply systems, improve the reliability of the AC power supply system and reduce the capacity of the storage batteries to a proper value. If difficulty exists when you improve the reliability of the AC power supply system, increase the capacity of the storage batteries to a proper value.
l
The total capacity of the high-frequency switch rectifier should meet the requirements for the input of the communication load power and the charging power of the storage batteries. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Redundant rectifier modules are required. If there are not more than 10 working rectifier modules, there should be one protection rectifier module. If there are more than 10 working rectifier modules, one protection rectifier module is required for each 10 working rectifier modules. l
The storage batteries should be installed as two groups or multiple groups. The total capacity of the storage batteries depends on the time during which the storage groups feed power to the load independently. In normal communication stations, a storage battery group should be able to feed power for at least one hour.
9.11 Lighting in the Equipment Room The OptiX transmission equipment room is equipped with three lighting systems. l
Active lighting system, which is powered by mains supply.
l
Backup lighting system, which is powered by backup power supply (diesel electric generator) of the office.
l
Emergency lighting system, which is powered by storage batteries when the mains supply has been interrupted but the backup power supply has not yet started to supply power.
9.12 Protection System This section describes the requirements for the protection system.
ESD protection The equipment-affecting electrostatic induction comes from the external electric field such as outdoor high voltage transmission line or lightning. It also comes from the internal system such as indoor environment, floor materials or equipment structure. Static electricity may damage the chips on integrated circuit boards and cause faults in software and electronic switch. Statistics shows that 60 percent of the damaged circuit boards are caused by static electricity. It is essential to take effective ESD protection measures. The following measures are recommended: l
Ground the equipment well. While laying the raised floor covered with semiconductive materials, copper foil should be used for grounding at a number of points on the floor (the copper foil should be placed between the cement ground and the semiconductive floor and should be connected to the grounding cable).
l
Take dust-proof measure. Dust may do great harm to the optical synchronous transmission equipment. Dusts or other particles getting into the equipment room may cause poor connection between connectors or metal connecting points. When the humidity in the room is high, dust can cause electrical leakage. It is found in maintenance that the equipment failure is often caused by accumulated dusts. Especially, when the humidity in the room is very low, electrostatic adherence is likely to occur.
l
Keep proper temperature and humidity. Too high humidity may make the metal components rusty, while too low humidity may induce static electricity.
l
Always wear an ESD-preventive wrist strap and lab coat when touching a circuit board to prevent electrostatic damage to the equipment.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-15
9 Operation Environment Requirements
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Interference prevention With the development of technologies and social economy, more and more electromagnetic signals are transmitted in the air. They may affect the communication quality by causing crosstalk and stray noise, and even result in communication interruption. The electromagnetic interference (EMI) sources include: l
The corona discharge of the electric transmission line
l
The transformer
l
Switches
l
Waveform distortion of the power supply network caused during the operation of large equipment
l
Radio frequency (RF) interference
l
Natural interference sources such as terrestrial magnetic field and external radiation
The interference, from either inside or outside the equipment or the application system, affects the equipment through conductive modes such as capacitance coupling, inductance coupling, electromagnetic wave radiation, common impedance (including grounding system) and cable (power and signal cables). In of external relations of the equipment, interference is from the signal cable, power cable, grounding system and spatial electromagnetic wave. Integrated circuits (ICs) have the interference resistance capability to a degree. However when the external noises go beyond their anti-interference tolerance, corrupted signals and even system malfunction will be caused. It is impossible to eliminate or shield all the interference sources, but the following measures can be taken to suppress the interference signals:
9-16
l
High frequency interference in the power supply network is generated when the primary coil of the power supply transformer is coupled to the secondary coil through distributed capacitors. To suppress such interference, we can use an appropriate transformer, and install a low- filter at the inlet of the power supply cable.
l
The interference of the transient voltage in the power supply network can be reduced by inputting power directly from the primary transformer with a filter capacitor for the optical synchronous transmission equipment.
l
When the optical synchronous transmission equipment works in the 50 Hz mains power supply network with the above interference, the surge voltage caused by the power supply network and the over-voltage generated by lightening will be ed to the power supply of the optical synchronous transmission equipment, which leads to computing errors of the processors. Therefore, before directly using the mains supply, effective measures against interference from power supply network should be taken.
l
The key to eliminate the interference from the grounding system is to avoid loops among various grounds, such as the signal ground (including analog and digital grounds), BGND, PGND and shield ground, or loops formed by large distributed capacitors. Otherwise, the common impedance interference from the grounding system may affect the operation of the equipment. In buildings other than high-rises, the working ground of the optical transmission equipment should be separated as far as possible from the ground for electricity equipment and lightning protection device.
l
Prevent electromagnetic radiation interference from the surroundings to the equipment. In some integrated communication buildings, if there is a high frequency transmitter there, its influence on the optical transmission equipment should meet the relevant requirements. Independent power supplies are recommended for them.
l
EMI from the telecommunications line should be restrained. Influenced by high frequency electromagnetic field (external interference), high longitudinal voltage will occur to the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
core and sheath of the communication cable. Because of the asymmetry of cores in the cables, the longitudinal voltage will generate a horizontal noise voltage at the ends of the cores. When both ends of the cable sheath are grounded, the sheath will function as a shielding layer, greatly reducing the longitudinal voltage and reducing the interference voltage. Other effective methods include: reduce the voltage or current of the interference source; reduce the line length and the spacing of the conducting wires to reduce the area of the affected loop; directly place the insulated conducting wires on the grounded floor; use a special grounding cable to avoid co-impedance; or twist the signal cable and the cable together to offset partial peripheral electromagnetic interference, and so on.
Fire protection For small equipment rooms, a certain number of portable fire extinguishers should be equipped in each room for an initial fire control. In large equipment rooms, fire extinguishing facilities should be equipped. An automatic fire alarm system should also be equipped in the equipment room. All telecommunication buildings with fire alarm system should have fire emergency lighting system and evacuation instruction marks at important places, paths and gateways.
Anti-earthquake demand The designed anti-earthquake intensity of the telecommunication equipment room must be one degree (Richter scale) higher than that for the common buildings. The equipment room building that cannot meet the requirement should be reinforced. When installing the OptiX optical transmission equipment, the following anti-earthquake measures should be taken. l
Use steel framework for the cabinet of the equipment. There are locking devices to fix the boards in the cabinet.
l
The cabinet is reinforced with slide rail on the top and s at the bottom.
Lightning protection Chimneys, antennae or other things that are over 15 m tall on the top of the equipment room building should be designed according to the lightning protection requirements for civil buildings. Measures should be taken against direct flash and intrusion of lightning current. In the main high-rise transmission building, protective measures should be taken to prevent side lightning strokes, especially in frequent lightning areas. Therefore designers should take actual conditions into consideration and take appropriate measures. For example, connect the metal external window frame to the lightning protection wire; along the height of the building, place the lightning protection metal bands at a definite spacing on the outside wall, and so on. The main equipment-room building should be provided with the following lightning protection measures: l
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
The building should be installed with lightning arrester nets or bands at the positions susceptible to lightning strokes. Lightning prevention wires or lightning rods should be installed on the top of chimneys and antennas that are protruding from the building. The cross-sectional area of the grounding wire of the lightning protection device should not be smaller than 2 mm2, while the space between the wires not larger than 30 m.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-17
9 Operation Environment Requirements
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
l
The earth resistance of the earthing/grounding system is recommended to be less than 10 ohms, and the equipment grounding should be in accordance with national and local electrical codes as well.
l
Outdoor cables and metal pipes should be grounded before entering the building, and the outdoor overhead cables should be equipped with lightening protection devices at the inlet of the building.
l
It is suggested to use roof plates, beams and pillars made of reinforced concrete and the reinforcement bar as the ground wires of lightening arresters.
In the past lightning protection grounding of the building was separate from the grounding for telecommunication system and power supply system, and a large distance was required between the grounding objects. However, the distance requirement is not satisfied due to small space of the building. In fact, they cannot be separated in most cases, so t grounding system is recommended for the lightening protection grounding of the building. The t grounding system shall connect the telecommunication BGND, PGND, lightning protection grounding of the building, and grounding of the power frequency AC power supply system. A high earth resistance of the t grounding system is required. The earth resistance required by telecommunication is far lower than 10 ohms, and the grounding requirements for different telecommunication devices vary, so the resistance of the t grounding system should be determined according to the minimum resistance required for the grounding device. It is recommended to use steel bars in the walls and pillars of the building as ground wires for lightening protection. These wires should be electrically connected so as to equalize the electric potential in the building.
9-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10
10 Grounding Specifications
Grounding Specifications
About This Chapter Suitable grounding helps to avoid accidental personal injury and guarantee the safe running of the equipment, and provide EMC shielding to improve the quality of service (QoS). 10.1 General Grounding Specifications This section introduces the general grounding specifications. 10.2 Grounding Specifications for the Building This section introduces the grounding specifications for the building. 10.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications This section introduces the equipment grounding specifications. 10.4 Grounding Specifications for Office Power This section introduces the grounding specifications for office power 10.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables This section introduces the grounding specifications for signal cables. 10.6 Specifications for Managing Ground Cables This section introduces the Specifications for managing ground cables.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10 Grounding Specifications
10.1 General Grounding Specifications This section introduces the general grounding specifications. General grounding specifications, as shown in Table 10-1. Table 10-1 General grounding specifications No.
Description
1
Working ground, protection ground (including shielding ground and lightning ground) should be bonded to the same grounding electrode.
2
Cable racks, equipment frames and enclosures, metallic air ducts and doors and windows in the equipment room should be grounded.
3
All the metallic equipment units that are normally neutral should be grounded.
4
The ground cables should firmly with the grounding bar in the equipment.
5
Connection to the already grounded equipment for grounding purpose is not allowed.
10.2 Grounding Specifications for the Building This section introduces the grounding specifications for the building. Grounding specifications for the building, as shown in Table 10-2. Table 10-2 Grounding specifications for the building No.
Description
1
Usually, the earth resistance of the telecommunication site where the base station equipment is located is recommended to be less than 10 ohm. It also should comply with the relative stipulation of the country.
10.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications This section introduces the equipment grounding specifications. Equipment grounding specifications, as shown in Table 10-3.
10-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10 Grounding Specifications
Table 10-3 Equipment grounding specifications No.
Description
1
All the network telecommunications equipment including mobile base station, transmission equipment, switching equipment and office power should be grounded. All the protection grounds (PGNDs) of such equipment should be finally bonded to a general grounding bar. The PGNDs in an equipment room should be bonded to the general grounding bar in the same equipment room.
2
The PGND of the equipment should be connected to the nearby grounding bar (supplied). Copper-core conducting cable with green-yellow plastic insulation cover should be used. The cross-sectional area of the conductive cable is required to be 25 mm2 or wider.
3
The grounding terminals at the front door, back door and side s of the cabinet should be separately connected to the grounding post of the cabinet. The crosssectional area of the cable is required to be 1.6 mm2.
4
The metallic units of the equipment cabinet should have good conductance. Any nonconductive paint should be removed from the metal-to-metal .
5
The cabinets the adjacent cabinets in a row through the fixing bolts and washers on the cabinet top. A surface of 30 x 50 mm2 around the bolt holes should not be covered with paint. Rust-proof and rot-proof measures should be taken. The surface of the washer and nut should be plated with nickel to ensure good electrical conductance.
6
When the cabinets of the same type are connected, cables not longer than 300 mm should be used to connect the grounding busbars of adjacent cabinets, if these busbars exist. The cross-sectional area of the short cables is required to be 6 mm2. Two ends of the short cable should be secured to the terminals of the grounding bar.
10.4 Grounding Specifications for Office Power This section introduces the grounding specifications for office power Grounding specifications for office power, as shown in Table 10-4. Table 10-4 Grounding specifications for office power
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
No.
Description
1
TN-S AC power system should be adopted in the equipment room.
2
A C-level AC lightning protector with rated current not less than 20 KA should be installed at the AC power cable inlet of the equipment room.
3
PGNDs of the office power and telecommunications equipment should finally connect to the same grounding electrode. Grounds of telecommunications equipment and office power in an equipment room should be bonded to the grounding bar in the same equipment room.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10 Grounding Specifications
No.
Description
4
Lightning-proof circuit should be added to AC power interface.
5
The positive electrode of -48V/-60V DC power or the negative electrode of 24 DC power should be grounded at the DC power outlet.
6
The working ground and PGND of DC power system and the PGND of switching equipment should finally connect to the same grounding electrode. Grounds of telecommunications equipment and office power in an equipment room should be bonded to the grounding bar in the same equipment room.
7
Surge-proof circuit should be added to DC power interface.
10.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables This section introduces the grounding specifications for signal cables. Grounding specifications for signal cables, as shown in Table 10-5. Table 10-5 Grounding specifications for signal cables No.
Description
1
In the case that the digital trunk line of the transmission equipment connects to the wireless base station, no matter directly or indirectly, then E1 lightning protector should be installed in the corresponding interface of the transmission equipment.
2
The outside cable should have metallic protection cover and two ends of the cover should be well grounded. The end in the equipment room can be connected to the grounding bar in the equipment room. Lightning protector should be installed in the interface connecting the coming cable. The ground cable of the lightning protector should be as short as possible.
3
Both the outer conductor of coaxial cable and the metal shield of shielded cable should firmly with the metal surface of the target equipment.
4
Idle wire pair in the signal cable should be grounded in the equipment room.
5
The TDA tone cable should through the main distribution frame (MDF) that has a security unit before it goes out the office. Metal shield of the cable should connect with the PGND of the MDF. The MDF and the cabinet should share the same grounding electrode.
6
Overhead signal cables in the telecommunications office or mobile base station area is not allowed.
10.6 Specifications for Managing Ground Cables This section introduces the Specifications for managing ground cables. Specifications for managing ground cables, as shown in Table 10-6. 10-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10 Grounding Specifications
Table 10-6 Specifications for managing ground cables
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
No.
Description
1
Ground cables should be routed separately with signal cables.
2
Ground cables should not be routed into the equipment room through overhead cable trays. They should be routed under ground or inside the room.
3
The PGNG cable must be a tless copper-core cable. Installing connectors, splices or breakers to ground cables is not allowed.
4
The PGND cable should use copper-core conducting cable with green-yellow plastic insulation cover.
5
The neutral wire of the AC power cable should not connect with the PGNDs of the telecommunications equipment in the equipment room.
6
The PGND cable should be as short as possible (no more than 30 m). Otherwise, the should adjust the position of grounding bar.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
11
11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
About This Chapter Introduces the requirements of cabling and bundling the cables. 11.1 The Requirements of Cabling Describes the method and requirements of cable routing. 11.2 The Requirements of Bundling Describes the method and requirements of cable binding.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-1
11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
11.1 The Requirements of Cabling Describes the method and requirements of cable routing. l
For equipment room installed with s and ESD protection floor, cables can be arranged in downward mode. That is, all cables can be routed through the interlayer of the floor or the cable trough. If the upward cabling mode is adopted, cabling rack is required above the cabinet for holding cables.
l
The specifications and cross-sectional area of the cable, and the route and position for cabling should be designed beforehand.
l
All cables should be arranged neatly, with their sheaths remaining intact.
l
Communication cables, such as alarm cables, network cables and clock cables, should be arranged separately with the power cable and optical fibers.
l
Turnings of the cable should be smooth, with the bend radius reaching 60mm or above.
l
Any damage to the insulation layer of the conducting line is not allowed.
l
The cable arrangement should take the future maintenance and capacity expansion into consideration.
11.2 The Requirements of Bundling Describes the method and requirements of cable binding. l
Bundling of the cable should be tidy, clear and elegant. As a general rule, cables are grouped by types, or grouped as needed when they are in a large number. Bind them with cable ties and route them in either upward or downward cabling mode in the cabling area at the two sides of the cabinet.
l
Cables must be bundled when arranged in ducts. Bind the cables closely with appropriate tightness. The space between the cable ties should be even and the overall appearance of the cabling nice.
l
You may not bind the cables when arranged in cable troughs. But they should be placed tidy and straight in the trough with no crossover. Moreover, the cables can not overflow the trough. At two ends and turnings of the trough, use a plastic clip for the cables.
l
Cables both inside and outside the cabinet must be bundled. Keep the cables bundled closely and neatly.
l
Use cable ties of different specifications for cables according to actual circumstances.
l
Do not connect two cable ties in bundling. Otherwise, the binding strength will be weakened.
l
After the bundling, cut the remaining part of the cable tie smoothly, removing all burrs.
l
The space between the cable ties is even and is three or four times the size of the bundle diameter.
l
When making turning for the bundled cable, keep the bend radius as big as possible to avoid breaking the cable cores at the turning.
Figure 11-1 shows the specific operation of bundling.
11-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
Figure 11-1 Cable bundling
1. No cable tie at turning
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
2. Cable tie
3. Burr
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4. Cut smoothly
11-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12
12 Engineering Labels
Engineering Labels
About This Chapter Engineering labels are affixed to both ends of various cables to identify the physical positions of cables on different devices. There are two types of engineering labels, specialized for the power cables and signal cables respectively. The power cables include –48 V / –60 V power cables, power ground cables (BGND) and protection ground cables (PGND). The signal cables include external alarm cables, network cables, clock cables, optical fibers and so on. Engineering labels for cables ensure the orderly and correct installation of cables of equipment and facilitate the easy subsequent equipment maintenance and inspection. NOTE
In case there is special requirement from the of the equipment on the description method of the labels, the labels should be printed accordingly. However, this must be stated in the self-check report.
12.1 Introduction to Labels Introduces the labels used in the equipment. 12.2 Information Carried on Labels This section gives the information carried on labels for signal cable and power cable. 12.3 Filling Information on Labels This section describes how to fill information on labels. The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout. 12.4 Affixing Labels After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the bottom page and affix it to the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. 12.5 Common Engineering Labels This section describes the common engineering labels. The other labels are omitted in this part. You can perform the operation as required on site.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
12.1 Introduction to Labels Introduces the labels used in the equipment. 12.1.1 Material This section describes the requirements for the thickness, color, materials, ambient temperature, and fill-in method of the labels. 12.1.2 Type and Shape There are two types of engineering labels for power cables and signal cables respectively.
12.1.1 Material This section describes the requirements for the thickness, color, materials, ambient temperature, and fill-in method of the labels. l
Material: Polyester (PET), with UL and CSA certifications
l
Color: chalk white
l
Thickness: 0.09 mm
l
Ambient temperature: –29 to 149 degrees Celsius
l
Laser printing or handwriting with oiliness markers
12.1.2 Type and Shape There are two types of engineering labels for power cables and signal cables respectively.
Label for Signal Cables The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure 12-1.
12-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Figure 12-1 Label for signal cables 84.0 7.5 7.0 5.5 (2)
5.5
10.0
11.0 11.0
TO:
1.5 (2)
(1)
0.6
5.5 5.5
1.0
7.0 7.5
(1) 2.0
37.0 Unit：mm
1.Dividing line
2.Cut dotted line
The dividing lines on the label help to specify more clearly the position of a cable. For example, there is one between the cabinet number and the frame number and another one between the frame number and the slot number. The dividing line is 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm in size with the color of PONTONE 656c (light blue). The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixing it to the cable, and its size is 1.0 mm x 2.0 mm. There is a mark "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label. The mark is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.
Label for Power Cables The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the cable ties that are bundled to the cable. The identification plate has an embossment of 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm around (symmetric on both sides), and the area in the middle is for affixing the label, as shown in Figure 12-2.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Figure 12-2 Label for power cables 10
26.2
TO:
11
12.2
(2)
0.6
R1.0
25
1.5
(1) 100
(3)
1.Cable tie
2.Label
0.6
3.Dividing line on the label
12.2 Information Carried on Labels This section gives the information carried on labels for signal cable and power cable. 12.2.1 For Power Cables Labels for power cables are only affixed on one side of the identification plates. On the labels, there is information (the part after the mark "TO:") about the location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control cabinet, distribution box or power socket. 12.2.2 For Signal Cables The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. 12.2.3 Remarks To use labels, focus on the following points.
12.2.1 For Power Cables Labels for power cables are only affixed on one side of the identification plates. On the labels, there is information (the part after the mark "TO:") about the location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control cabinet, distribution box or power socket.
12.2.2 For Signal Cables The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. The information is given like this:
12-4
l
Area 1 contains the location information of local end of the cable.
l
Area 2 (with the mark "TO:") contains the location information of the opposite end of the cable. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide l
12 Engineering Labels
Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.
Printed parts on the label for signal cables, as shown in Figure 12-3. Figure 12-3 Label for signal cables Area 1
Area 3
TO:
Area 2
Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the right side of the cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the location information of the opposite end, and the other side carries the location information of the local end. Therefore, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable, and vice versa. In other words, the local information at one end is called the opposite information at the other end.
12.2.3 Remarks To use labels, focus on the following points. l
When printing/writing and affixing labels, pay attention to keep the labels clean.
l
Since the label paper is made of moistureproof and waterproof material, ink-jet printers and ink pens are forbidden for printing and writing labels.
l
Labels should be affixed with good order in alignment.
l
Cable ties should be bundled in the same position of power cables, with identification plates on the same side.
l
The positions of "up", "down", "right" or "left" are all based on the viewpoint of the engineering person who is working on the label.
12.3 Filling Information on Labels This section describes how to fill information on labels. The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout. 12.3.1 Printing Labels Use a laser printer to print the label according to the template. 12.3.2 Writing Labels Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the equipment to write the labels. For easy recognition and good-looking, the font in handwriting should be close to the standard typeface as much as possible.
12.3.1 Printing Labels Use a laser printer to print the label according to the template. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Template for the Printing Template is available to print out the label. You can obtain the template by: l
ing the template from http://.huawei.com. The directory of the template is Documentation > Engineering Service > Engineering Quality > Quality Standard and Template.
l
Asking for the template from Huawei local office.
The template is written in Microsoft Word, as shown in Figure 12-4. Figure 12-4 Template of label
1 2
1.Cell
2.Cell
Cells Merging on the Template When using the template, you can directly modify the contents on the template, and the following should be observed: l
The settings of centered characters, direction, and fonts should not be changed.
l
When there are too many characters to be filled in, zoom out the characters, but make sure the printouts are clear and legible.
To merge the cells, you should first recover the table structure (if gridlines are displayed, you can start from Step 3 directly). 1.
Select the menu item Edit >Select All.
2.
Select the menu item Format > Borders and Shading >Borders. Select Box and click OK.
3.
Drag the mouse to select the cells to be merged and select the menu item Table > Merge Cells.
If two merged cells are still not enough to accommodate the characters, use multiple lines.
Requirements on the Printer To print the labels, laser jet printer must be used, although there is no restriction on the model of the printer. Before printing the label, set up the page and try the printing on ordinary blank paper (both sides are blank): 12-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
1.
Cover the blank paper onto the whole page of label paper, and check whether the page setup conforms to the requirement.
2.
Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have been set correctly.
3.
If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 12-5 appears before printing, click Ignore to continue the printing.
Figure 12-5 Warning prompt before printing
If the printout conforms to the requirement, print it to label paper. If the printout does not conform, adjust the page setup and try the printing again, until the correct printout is produced. The method of adjusting the page setup is as follows: 1.
Select the menu item File > Page Setup.
2.
Select the Margins tab page.
3.
Select Left for Gutter Position.
4.
Set Header and Footer to 0, and adjust the values of Top, Bottom, Left, and Right.
After the page setup has been made correct, save it for future use. This page setup is only necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.
Requirements on the Printed Label After you print the labels, check whether they comply with the template specifications: l
All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the bottom page of the label.
l
Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout, the dividing lines and the mark "TO:" should not be covered by the printed characters.
l
When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid covering the mark "TO:" when printing the texts by using the space bar to move the printing contents to the next line.
CAUTION Different from the ordinary paper, the label paper is composed of two pages. No matter what model of printer you are using, feed in the labels one after another by hand. Never use the autofeed mode in order to avoid jamming the labels. Different models of printers may have different feeding modes, make sure to feed in the labels correctly.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
12.3.2 Writing Labels Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the equipment to write the labels. For easy recognition and good-looking, the font in handwriting should be close to the standard typeface as much as possible.
Writing pen Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the device to write the labels. In special cases, black ball-pens are allowed, although not recommended. When writing with the ball-pen, take care not to leave the oil on the label, which may contaminate the label and blur the words. NOTE
The delivered marker has two nibs. Make sure to use the smaller nib to write the labels.
Handwriting For the sake of easy recognition and good looking, the font in handwriting should be close to the standard typeface as much as possible.Table 12-1 shows the standard typeface. Table 12-1 Standard typeface for handwriting 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
The font size depends on the number of figures and letters. The words must be medium-sized, legible, tidy and good-looking.
Writing direction Write the characters in proper size, and the direction is shown in Figure 12-6. Figure 12-6 Writing direction of the label
TO:
12.4 Affixing Labels After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the bottom page and affix it to the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. 12-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
12.4.1 Affixing the Label to the Signal Cable This section describes the positions where the labels should be affixed on the signal cables and the means by which the labels are folded. 12.4.2 Affixing the Label to the Power Cable This section describes the positions where the labels should be affixed on the power cables and the means by which the cable ties are bound to the power cables.
12.4.1 Affixing the Label to the Signal Cable This section describes the positions where the labels should be affixed on the signal cables and the means by which the labels are folded. The steps to affix the label to the cable are shown in Figure 12-7 The finished labels should be on the right or top of the cables, according to different cabling methods. The left part of the figures shows the method to affix the label when the cable is laid vertically, while the right part of the figures shows the method to affix the label when the cable is laid horizontally. It is recommended to paste a label at a point 2 cm from the connector. NOTE
In special cases, for example, to avoid cable bent or affecting other cables, other positions are allowed to affix the labels. l
Stick the label to the proper position on the cable, fold the narrow part of the label according to the directions shown in Figure 12-7.
Figure 12-7 Sticking the label onto proper position of the signal cable
1
2 TO: A03 33 33 33 33
(1)
1. Cable
(2)
(3)
2. Label
The length of the narrow part is based on an external cable diameter of 2.6 mm, after this part has been stuck to the back of the label, it may not overlap the entire printed part. l
Fold the printed part along the dotted line according to the directions shown in Figure 12-7.
l
After the printed part of the label has been folded, the narrow part of the label should be covered completely, as shown in Figure 12-7.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-9
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Fold the Label Fold the label upwards along the dashed line, and affix it. After being affixed, the label is shaped as (3) of Figure 12-7.
12.4.2 Affixing the Label to the Power Cable This section describes the positions where the labels should be affixed on the power cables and the means by which the cable ties are bound to the power cables. Remove the label from the bottom page, then affix it to the identification plate on the cable tie. The label should be stuck to the rectangular flute, and should be stuck to only one side of the identification plate. Make sure to affix the labels on the same side of the identification plates. The cable ties are bundled 2 cm from the connectors, and other positions are allowed in special circumstances. Cable ties should be bundled on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the finished identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling. Make sure the label is facing out, as shown in Figure 12-8. Figure 12-8 Appearance of affixed labels on power cables Cable
B03
TO:
TO: B03
-48V2
-48V2
Cable
12.5 Common Engineering Labels This section describes the common engineering labels. The other labels are omitted in this part. You can perform the operation as required on site. 12.5.1 Power Cables The labels are affixed to the DC cables that provide power for the cabinets, including the –48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable ties. 12.5.2 External Alarm Cables The external alarm cables are connected to the first subscriber cabinet of each row (used for power distribution). Labels posted on the first cabinet of each row should indicate which equipment is using the access terminal. 12.5.3 Ethernet Cables 12-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
The engineering label of the Ethernet cable is affixed to identify the Ethernet cable of the network port on a board. The label contains the following information: cabinet number, frame number, location number, physical slot number, and Ethernet port number. 12.5.4 Fibers Between Two Devices These labels are affixed to the fiber jumpers that connect the optical interfaces on the boards in a frame or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for fiber jumpers: one is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices, the other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF. 12.5.5 Fiber That Connects the Device and the ODF The label stuck on the fiber from the equipment to the ODF contains all necessary information on the cabinet and the ODF. 12.5.6 Trunk Cables The trunk cables include 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 cables, 120-ohm T1 cables, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/ s, 140 Mbit/s, 155 Mbit/s cables and 120-ohm to 75-ohm trunk cables, and clock cables. 12.5.7 Subscriber Cables The labels are affixed to both ends of the subscriber cables to identify the position of the cables on the device side and the main distribution frame (MDF) side.
12.5.1 Power Cables The labels are affixed to the DC cables that provide power for the cabinets, including the –48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable ties. Table 12-2 provides the information carried on the labels for the DC power cables. Table 12-2 Information on labels affixed to the DC power cables Content
Meaning
MN(BC) - -1
MN (BC): BC is written right under MN. On the loaded cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column number of the power distribution equipment such as the control cabinet and distribution box; BC identifies the row and column number of the –48 V connector (if there is no row number or column number, or the connector can be identified without them, BC can be omitted). BGND and PGND have no row and column number for identification. On the power cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the cabinet.
MN(BC) - -2 MN(BC) - BGND MN(BC) - PGND
The label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the control cabinet, or the distribution box. The information of the local end is not necessary. Table 12-2 lists the information of two –48 V power supplies on the label. The information for other DC voltages (such as 24 V, 60 V) should be provided in similar methods. Make sure that labels are affixed in correct direction. That is, after the cable ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same direction, as shown in Figure 12-9.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Figure 12-9 Example of the labels on the DC power cable TO: A01 B08
TO: B03
-48V2
The label on the loaded cabinet side, which carries the information about the position of the cable on the power distribution unit.
-48V2
The label on the distribution unit side, which carries the information about the position of the cable on the loaded cabinet side.
On the loaded cabinet side, the label marked with "A01/B08-–2" on the cable indicates that the cable is –48V2 DC supply, which is from the eighth connector on the second row of –48 V bus bar in the cabinet on Row A, and Column 1 in the equipment room. On the distribution unit side, the label marked with "B03--2" indicates that the cable is –2 DC supply, which is from the loaded cabinet on Row B, Column 03 in the equipment room. NOTE
l
In the power distribution unit (or the first power cabinet of a row in the transmission equipment room), every terminal block on the – connector bar has a numeric identification. For example, in the preceding label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes "8") is the numeric identification of the terminal block.
l
PGND and BGND are two copper bars on which the terminal blocks are connected. Regardless of which terminal is connected, it is necessary to provide the row and column numbers of the power distribution unit, instead of providing the specific serial number of the terminal block on the copper bar. For example, if the label on the loaded cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it indicates that the power cable is a BGND that connects the BGND copper bar in the power distribution unit on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room. Information on the labels for PGND cables should be given in a similar way.
12.5.2 External Alarm Cables The external alarm cables are connected to the first subscriber cabinet of each row (used for power distribution). Labels posted on the first cabinet of each row should indicate which equipment is using the access terminal. Labels are not required on the equipment side unless otherwise specified. In this case, fill in only Area 2 of the label. Table 12-3 provides the information of the labels of alarm box external cables. Table 12-3 Information on labels affixed to the external cables of the alarm box
12-12
Content
Meaning
Description
MN
MN: serial number of the cabinet in the equipment room
M: The cabinets going from front to back (in a row) in the equipment room are numbered from A to Z. N: The cabinets going from left to right (in a column) are numbered from 01 to 99. For example, "A01" indicates that the cabinet is located in Row A and Column 01.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
NOTE
The label on the alarm cable carries simple information, and only part of the text area needs to be filled in. It is recommended to keep the whole length of the label instead of cutting out the blank area. Figure 12-10 shows a label on the alarm cable, on which "A01" indicates that the alarm cable connects the first cabinet and the cabinet in Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room. Figure 12-10 Example of the label on the alarm cable
12.5.3 Ethernet Cables The engineering label of the Ethernet cable is affixed to identify the Ethernet cable of the network port on a board. The label contains the following information: cabinet number, frame number, location number, physical slot number, and Ethernet port number.
Meaning of the Label Table 12-4 provides the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the Ethernet cables that connect the boards in the frames. Table 12-4 Information on labels affixed to the Ethernet cables Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D
MN: cabinet number
A01
B: frame number
Numbered in top-down order with two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
D: Ethernet port number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
MN: cabinet number
B02
Z: location number
Indicates the valid location number of the site terminal device. If the cable is connected to a router in a cabinet, the serial numbers of the cabinet, the frame and the Ethernet interface of the router should be specified, for example, B02-03-12. If the cable is connected to the NMS, the specific location of the NMS should be provided.
MN-Z
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-13
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Example of the Label Figure 12-11 shows the label on the Ethernet cable. Figure 12-11 Example of the label on the Ethernet cable
"A01-03-10-05" indicates that on the local end of the Ethernet cable is connected to Ethernet Port 05, Slot 10, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room. "B02-03-12" indicates that the opposite end of the Ethernet cable is connected to Ethernet Port 12, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row B, and Column 02 in the equipment room.
12.5.4 Fibers Between Two Devices These labels are affixed to the fiber jumpers that connect the optical interfaces on the boards in a frame or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for fiber jumpers: one is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices, the other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF.
Meaning of the Label Table 12-5 provides the information on both the sides of the labels affixed to the fiber jumper that connects two devices. Table 12-5 Information on labels affixed to the fiber between two devices
12-14
Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T
MN: cabinet number
A01
B: frame number
Numbered in top-down order with two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
D: optical interface number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 05
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Content
12 Engineering Labels
Meaning
Example
R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface MN-B-C-D-R/T
MN: cabinet number B: frame number
The meanings are the same the meanings mentioned in the previous text. When the local device and the opposite end device are not in the same equipment room, MN can be the name of the equipment room.
C: physical slot number D: optical interface number R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface
Example of the Label Figure 12-12 shows the label on the fiber jumper between two devices. Figure 12-12 Example of the label on the fiber jumper between two devices
"A01-01-05-05-R" indicates that the local end of the fiber jumper is connected to Optical Receiving Interface 05 in Slot 5, Subrack 01 in the cabinet on Row A, and Column 01 in the equipment room. "G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the fiber jumper is connected to Optical Transmitting Interface 01 in Slot 01, Subrack 01 in the cabinet on Row G, and Column 01 in the equipment room.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
12.5.5 Fiber That Connects the Device and the ODF The label stuck on the fiber from the equipment to the ODF contains all necessary information on the cabinet and the ODF.
Meaning of the Label Table 12-6 provides the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the fiber jumper that connects the device and the ODF. Table 12-6 Information on labels affixed to the fiber between the device and the ODF Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T
MN: cabinet number
For example, A01
B: frame number
Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
D: optical interface number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 05
R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface ODF-MN-B-C-R/T
MN: row number and column number of ODF
M indicates a row that is numbered A to Z from front to back ordinally.
B: row number of the terminal device
Ranging from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01
N indicates a column that is numbered 01 to 99 from left to right ordinally, for example, G01 is the ODF of Row G and Column 01.
C: column number of the terminal device
12-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Content
12 Engineering Labels
Meaning
Example
R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface
Example of the Label Figure 12-13 shows the label on the fiber jumper between the device and the ODF. Figure 12-13 Example of the label on the fiber jumper between the device and the ODF
"ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the fiber jumper is connected to the optical receiving terminal on Row 01, Column 01 of the ODF in Row G and Column 01 in the equipment room. "A01-01-05-05-R" indicates that the opposite end of the fiber jumper is connected to Optical Receiving Interface 5 on Slot 05, frame 01 in the cabinet in Row A and Column 01 in the equipment room.
12.5.6 Trunk Cables The trunk cables include 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 cables, 120-ohm T1 cables, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/ s, 140 Mbit/s, 155 Mbit/s cables and 120-ohm to 75-ohm trunk cables, and clock cables. There are two types of labels for trunk cables. One type is used for the trunk cable connecting two devices, such as the trunk board and built-in transmission unit. The labels are stuck at both ends of one cable and indicate the positions of the two ends at the equipment side or at the two trunk boards in equipment. The other type is used for the cable connecting the device and the digital distribution frame (DDF). The labels are stuck at both ends of one cable and indicate the position of the two ends at the equipment and the DDF.
Meaning of the Label Table 12-7 provides the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the trunk cable that connects two devices. Table 12-8 provides the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the trunk cable that connects the device and the DDF.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-17
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Table 12-7 Information on labels affixed to the trunk cable between two devices Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T
MN: cabinet number
A01
B: frame number
Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
D: cable number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 12
R: optical receiving interface
-
MN-B-C-D-R/T
T: optical transmitting interface MN-B-C-D-R/T
R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface
Table 12-8 Information on labels affixed to the trunk cable between the device and the DDF Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T
MN: cabinet number
A01
B: frame number
Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
D: cable number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 05
R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface
12-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Content
Meaning
Example
DDF-MN-B-CD/R/T
MN: row number and column number of the DDF
M indicates a row that is numbered A to Z from front to back ordinally.
B: row number of the terminal
Ranging from 01 to 99, for example: 01-01
N indicates a column that is numbered 01 to 99 from left to right ordinally, for example, G01 is the DDF of Row G and Column 01.
C: column number of the terminal DDF-MN-B-CD/R/T
D: direction A or B R: optical receiving interface
There is such a mark in the DDF: A: indicating that the DDF terminals are connected to the optical network equipment B: indicating that the DDF terminals are connected to the switching equipment
T: optical transmitting interface
Example of the Label Figure 12-14 shows the label on the trunk cable between two devices. Figure 12-14 Example of the label on the trunk cable between two devices
"G01-01-05-12-T" indicates that the local end of the trunk cable is connected to the transmitting terminal of Trunk Cable 12 on Slot 05, Frame 01 in the cabinet in Row G, Column 01 in the equipment room. "D02-01-01-10-R" indicates that the opposite end of the trunk cable is connected to the receiving terminal of Trunk Cable 10 on Slot 01, Frame 01 in cabinet in Row D, Column 02 in the equipment room. Figure 12-15 shows the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF. Figure 12-15 Example of the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-19
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
"A01-03-01-01-R" indicates that local end of the trunk cable is connected to the receiving terminal of Trunk Cable 01 in Slot 01, Frame 03 of the cabinet in Row A, and Column 01 in the equipment room. "DDF-G01-01-01-AR" indicates that the opposite end of the trunk cable connects the receiving terminal of Direction A (connected to optical network equipment) in Row 01, and Column 01 of the DDF on Row G and Column 01 in the equipment room.
12.5.7 Subscriber Cables The labels are affixed to both ends of the subscriber cables to identify the position of the cables on the device side and the main distribution frame (MDF) side.
Meaning of the Label Table 12-9 provides the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the subscriber cables. Table 12-9 Information on labels affixed to the subscriber cables Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D
MN: cabinet number
A01
B: frame number
Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 03
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-bottom and left-right order in two digits, for example, 01
D: cable number
Numbered in top-bottom and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
MN: row number and column number of MDF
M indicates a row that is numbered A to Z from front to back ordinally.
B: row number of the terminal
Ranging from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01
MDF-MN-BC
N indicates a column that is numbered 01 to 99 from left to right ordinally. For example, G01 is the MDF of Row G and Column 01.
C: column number of the terminal
Example of the Label Figure 12-16 shows the label on the subscriber cable.
12-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Figure 12-16 Example of the label on the subscriber cable
TO:
"A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the subscriber cable is connected to Terminal 01 on Slot 1, Frame 03 of the cabinet in Row A, and Column 01 in the equipment room. "MDF-G01-01-01" indicates that the opposite end of the cable is connected to the terminal on Row 01, Column 01 of the MDF in Row G, and Column 01 in the equipment room.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-21
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
13
Binding Strap
About This Chapter This chapter introduces the architecture and usage of the binding strap, as well as precautions for bundling the optical fibers.
CAUTION To avoid any human-caused accidents, read this chapter carefully before bundling the fiber jumpers. 13.1 Binding Strap The section describes the architecture and cutting of the binding strap. 13.2 Bundling the Binding Strap This section describes how to bund the binding strap.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
13.1 Binding Strap The section describes the architecture and cutting of the binding strap. 13.1.1 Architecture The binding strap fulfills its locking function by cooperation of these two sides. 13.1.2 Cutting This procedure cutting the binding strap after installing the fiber jumpers.
13.1.1 Architecture The binding strap fulfills its locking function by cooperation of these two sides. The binding strap for optical fiber is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (black nylon material). The architecture of the binding strap ,as shown in Figure 13-1. Figure 13-1 Binding strap
1
2 1. Hook side
2. Mat side
13.1.2 Cutting This procedure cutting the binding strap after installing the fiber jumpers.
Prerequisite None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
13-2
l
Cutterbar
l
Binding strap Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
Precautions NOTE
You can use a pair of scissors if there is no cutterbar on site.
Procedure Step 1 Install the binding strap on the plastic axis of the cutterbar, as shown in Figure 13-2. Figure 13-2 Install binding strap on cutterbar
1
2
3
1. Binding strap
2. Plastic axis
3. Cutterbar
Step 2 Roll the binding strap and allow it to through the guiding trough of the cutterbar. Step 3 Cut the binding strap into appropriate length by slantly hauling the binding strap towards the cutter tooth of the cutterbar, as shown in Figure 13-3. Figure 13-3 Cut the binding strap
1
2
3 1. Binding strap
2. Guiding trough
3. Cutter tooth
----End
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
13.2 Bundling the Binding Strap This section describes how to bund the binding strap. 13.2.1 Procedures for Bundling the Binding Strap This procedure describes how to bind bundling of the binding strap 13.2.2 Expected Result The section describes the expected result of the binding strap. 13.2.3 Precautions Bundle the fibers as the follow items.
13.2.1 Procedures for Bundling the Binding Strap This procedure describes how to bind bundling of the binding strap
Prerequisite None
Tools, Equipment and Materials l
Optical fiber
l
Binding strap
Precautions NOTE
When you use a binding strap, keep the mat side inside and the hook side outside.
Procedure Step 1 Arrange the optical fibers into a bundle. Step 2 Cut off a piece of binding strap of appropriate length according to the size of the bundle. Step 3 Hold the fiber bundle with one hand and press one end of the binding strap on the bundle with the thumb. Step 4 Strain the binding strap by the other end with the other hand, as shown in Figure 13-4.
13-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
Figure 13-4 Step 2 of bundling optical fiber
Step 5 Turn the binding strap around the fiber bundle with appropriate strain till the mat side adhibits the hook side snugly, as shown in Figure 13-5. Figure 13-5 Step 3 of bundling optical fiber
----End
13.2.2 Expected Result The section describes the expected result of the binding strap. Figure 13-6 shows the bundling result. Figure 13-6 Bundling result of optical fiber
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
13.2.3 Precautions Bundle the fibers as the follow items.
13-6
l
It is only the mat side of the binding strap that s the optical fiber.
l
Arrange the optical fibers tidily into a bundle before bundling.
l
Bundle the optical fibers with appropriate tightness. Never bind them too tight.
l
The space between two binding straps should not exceed 40 cm.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Making and Testing the Cable Connector
About This Chapter This appendix describes how to make the BNC, SMB and L9 connectors for the coaxial cables, and how to test the coaxial cables with connectors at both ends. 14.1 Making the Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the BNC, SMB and L9 connectors for the coaxial cables. 14.2 Continuity Test of the Coaxial Cable This section considers the continuity test of the cable with the DB44 connector at one end and the SMB connector at the other end as an example to describe how to test the continuity of the cable by using the multimeter.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-1
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14.1 Making the Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the BNC, SMB and L9 connectors for the coaxial cables. 14.1.1 Making the Straight BNC Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the straight BNC male connector for the coaxial cable. 14.1.2 Making the L9-M Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describe how to make the L9-M male connector for the coaxial cable. 14.1.3 Making the Straight SMB Female Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the straight SMB female connector for the coaxial cable.
14.1.1 Making the Straight BNC Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the straight BNC male connector for the coaxial cable.
Prerequisite l
The DDF in the equipment room must be installed properly and the required interfaces must be reserved.
l
The interface type must be a straight BNC connector.
Tools/Instruments l
Coaxial cable
l
Wire stripper
l
BNC connector
Required/As Needed As needed.
Context Figure 14-1 shows the components of the straight BNC male connector and the coaxial cable.
14-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-1 BNC connector and the coaxial cable
A Heat shrink tube
B Crimping sleeve
C Connector
E External conductor of the coaxial cable
F Insulation layer of the coaxial cable
G Internal conductor of the coaxial cable
D Protection tube of the coaxial cable
Procedure Step 1 Based on the coaxial cable materials and sizes, strip off the coaxial cable. The external conductor, insulation layer and internal conductor of the coaxial cable are displayed. See Figure 14-2. For the length of the reserved external conductor (L1), the length of the reserved insulation layer (L2) and the length of the stripped sleeve (L3), refer to Table 14-1. Figure 14-2 Stripping off the coaxial cable
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
CAUTION l
When stripping the sleeve off the coaxial cable, avoid scratching the external conductor of the coaxial cable.
l
Determine the stripping size of the cable based on the size of the connector. See Figure 14-3.
Table 14-1 Stripping sizes of the common coaxial cables Cable Type
External Diameter of the Coaxial Cable
L1 (mm)
L2 (mm)
L3 (mm)
Remarks
SYFVZ-75-1-1(A)
2.2 mm
5 to 6
7 to 9
10 to 12
-
SYV-75-2-2
3.9 mm
5 to 6
7 to 9
10 to 12
National trunk 155M-I
SYV-75-4-2
6.7 mm
5 to 6
7 to 9
10 to 12
National trunk 155M-III
SFYV-75-2-1
3.2 mm
5 to 6
7 to 9
10 to 12
National trunk-II
SFYV-75-2-2
4.4 mm
5 to 6
7 to 9
10 to 12
National trunk 155M-II
Figure 14-3 Size of the straight BNC male connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable
Step 2 Lead the heat shrink tube and crimping sleeve along the coaxial cable. See Figure 14-4.
14-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-4 Leading the heat shrink tube and crimping sleeve through
Step 3 Unfold the external conductor of the coaxial cable into a trumpet shape. See Figure 14-5. Figure 14-5 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable
Step 4 Insert the insulation layer and internal conductor into the connector of the coaxial cable. The external conductor of the coaxial cable partly wraps that of the connector. See Figure 14-6. Figure 14-6 Inserting the straight BNC male connector into the coaxial cable
Step 5 Use a welding tool to weld the internal conductor of the coaxial cable with that of the coaxial cable connector. See Figure 14-7.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-5
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 14-7 Welding the internal conductor
Step 6 Push the crimping sleeve in the direction of the connector. Crimp the external conductor of the coaxial cable tight. Use a crimping tool to tighten the crimping sleeve and the coaxial cable connector. See Figure 14-8. Figure 14-8 Crimping the external conductor
Step 7 Use a heat gun to blow the heat shrink tube so that the tube can tightly clad the crimping sleeve. See Figure 14-9. Figure 14-9 Blowing the heat shrink tube
Step 8 Install the components of the coaxial cable to the equipment. See Figure 14-10.
14-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-10 Installing the components of the coaxial cable
----End
14.1.2 Making the L9-M Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describe how to make the L9-M male connector for the coaxial cable.
Prerequisite l
The DDF in the equipment room must be installed properly, with interfaces reserved for use.
l
The interface type must be a straight L9-M connector.
Tools/Instruments l
Wire stripper
l
Coaxial cable
l
L9-M male connector
Required/As Needed As needed.
Context Figure 14-11 shows the components of the straight L9 male connector and the coaxial cable.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-11 L9-M connector and the coaxial cable
A Protection tube of the connector
B Crimping sleeve
E External conductor of the F Insulation layer of the coaxial cable coaxial cable
C Connector
D Protection tube of the coaxial cable
G Internal conductor of the coaxial cable
Procedure Step 1 Based on the coaxial cable materials and sizes, strip off the coaxial cable. The external conductor, insulation layer and internal conductor of the coaxial cable are displayed. See Figure 14-12. For the length of the reserved external conductor (L1), the length of the reserved insulation layer (L2) and the length of the stripped sleeve (L3), see Table 14-1. Figure 14-12 Stripping off the coaxial cable
14-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
CAUTION l
When stripping the sleeve off the coaxial cable, avoid scratching the external conductor or the insulation layer of the coaxial cable.
l
Determine the stripping size of the cable based on the size of the connector. See Figure 14-13.
Figure 14-13 Size of the connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable
Step 2 Lead the protection tube and crimping sleeve along the coaxial cable. See Figure 14-14. Figure 14-14 Leading the protection tube and crimping sleeve through
Step 3 Unfold the external conductor of the coaxial cable into a trumpet shape. See Figure 14-15. Figure 14-15 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable
Step 4 Insert the insulation layer and internal conductor into the connector of the coaxial cable. The external conductor of the coaxial cable partly wraps that of the connector. See Figure 14-16. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-9
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 14-16 Inserting the coaxial connector into the coaxial cable
Step 5 Use a welding tool to weld the internal conductor of the coaxial cable with that of the coaxial connector. See Figure 14-17. Figure 14-17 Welding the internal conductor
Welding Step 6 Push the crimping sleeve in the direction of the connector. Crimp the external conductor of the coaxial cable tight. Use a crimping tool to tighten the crimping sleeve and the coaxial cable connector. See Figure 14-18. Figure 14-18 Crimping the external conductor
Step 7 Push the protection tube forward till it is secured to the thread of the connector. See Figure 14-19.
14-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-19 Rotating the protection tube tight
----End
14.1.3 Making the Straight SMB Female Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the straight SMB female connector for the coaxial cable.
Prerequisite l
The DDF in the equipment room must be installed properly, with interfaces reserved for use.
l
The interface type must be a straight SMB connector.
Tools/Instruments l
Wire stripper
l
Coaxial cable
l
Straight SMB connector
Required/As Needed As needed.
Context Figure 14-20 shows the components of the straight SMB female connector and the coaxial cable.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-20 Components of the straight SMB female connector and the coaxial cable
A
B
C
F
E
D
A Crimping sleeve
B Connector
D External conductor of the coaxial E Insulation layer of the coaxial cable cable
C Protection tube of the coaxial cable F Internal conductor of the coaxial cable
Procedure Step 1 Based on the coaxial cable materials and sizes, strip off the coaxial cable. The external conductor, insulation layer and internal conductor of the coaxial cable are displayed. See Figure 14-21. For the length of the reserved external conductor (L1), the length of the reserved insulation layer (L2) and the length of the stripped sleeve (L3), see Table 14-1. Figure 14-21 Stripping off the coaxial cable L3 L2 L1
C D F
E
CAUTION
14-12
l
When stripping the sleeve off the coaxial cable, avoid scratching the external conductor or the insulation layer of the coaxial cable.
l
Determine the stripping size of the cable based on the size of the connector. See Figure 14-22.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-22 Size of the connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
Step 2 Lead the crimping tube along the coaxial cable. See Figure 14-23. Figure 14-23 Leading the crimping sleeve through
C A
Step 3 Unfold the external conductor of the coaxial cable into a trumpet shape. See Figure 14-24. Figure 14-24 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable
D
Step 4 Insert the insulation layer and internal conductor into the connector of the coaxial cable. The external conductor of the coaxial cable partly wraps that of the connector. See Figure 14-25. Figure 14-25 Inserting the coaxial connector into the coaxial cable
B
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-13
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Step 5 Use a welding tool to weld internal conductor "F" of the coaxial cable with that of coaxial connector "B". See Figure 14-26. Figure 14-26 Welding the internal conductor
Step 6 Push the crimping sleeve in the direction of the connector. Crimp the external conductor of the coaxial cable tight. Use a crimping tool to tighten the crimping sleeve and the coaxial cable connector. See Figure 14-27. Figure 14-27 Crimping the external conductor
A
Step 7 After the components of the coaxial cable are processed, install them on the equipment. See Figure 14-28. Figure 14-28 Installing the components of the coaxial cable
----End
14-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
14.2 Continuity Test of the Coaxial Cable This section considers the continuity test of the cable with the DB44 connector at one end and the SMB connector at the other end as an example to describe how to test the continuity of the cable by using the multimeter.
Prerequisite During the cable routing, bundling and connector installing, open or broken circuits may occur in the cable. Therefore, you must test the coaxial cable after the earlier procedures are completed.
Tools/Instruments Multimeter
Required/As Needed Required
Procedure Step 1 Set the multimeter to the resistance position. Step 2 At the SMB connector, connect the two electro probes of the multimeter to the internal and external conductors respectively. Step 3 Based on the pin number table of the DB44 connector, use the shorted line to short circuit the two pins corresponding to the SMB connectors. See Figure 14-29. Figure 14-29 Testing the coaxial cable
Short circuit pin No.23 adn 38
A
Equipment side
R1
DDF side
Step 4 Read the multimeter. The resistance should be 0 ohm. Step 5 Remove the shorted line from the DB44 connector. Read the multimeter. The resistance should be infinite. Step 6 Repeat steps 2–5 to test other SMB connectors. ----End Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
A Glossary
A
Glossary
1 19-inch cabinet
A cabinet which is 19 inches in width and 600 mm in depth, compliant with the standards of the IEC297.
A alarm
A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or an emergency has occurred.
antistatic floor
The floor which is ESD preventive.
attenuator
A ive component that attenuates an electrical or optical signal.
B binding strap
The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
binding
In virtual concatenated payload configuration, to specify one binding number to identify the VC4s of the same virtual concatenated payload. If a fault occurs to one of the bound services, all bound services will switch as a whole.
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that minimises the number of synchronization links entering an office. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.
C
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
cabling frame
The frame which is used for cable routing over the cabinet.
cabling hole
A hole which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
cabling trough
The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
A Glossary
cabling
The methods to route the cables or fibers.
centralized alarm system
The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.
connection
A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional connections" capable of simultaneously transferring information in opposite directions between their respective inputs and outputs.
corrugated pipe
A plastic pipe which is used for fiber routing.
D DDF
Digital Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer cables.
downward cabling Route cables or fibers between the rack and other equipments from the bottom of the cabinet.
E ejector lever
A component at the two ends of the front of a board, which is used for inserting or removing the board.
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge. The phenomena the energy being produced by electrostatic resource discharge instantly.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
G guide slot
A slot on the expansion bolt.
I isolation
A nonreciprocal optical device intended to suppress backward reflections along an optical fiber transmission line while having minimum insertion loss in the forward direction.
L laser
The device that generates the directional light covering a narrow range of wavelengths. Laser light is more coherent than ordinary light. Semiconductor diode lasers are the used light source in fiber-optic system.
M
A-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
MSTP
A Glossary
Multi-service transmission platform. It is based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of these services.
O ODF
Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
P power distribution A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, box which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. It is another name of power box. process
A generic term for a collection of actions.
protection grounding cable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
R route
The path a trail takes.
S slide rail
A component in the cabinet, which is used to place the subrack.
The frame on the bottom of a cabinet, when installing the cabinet on the antistatic floor.
U upward cabling
Cables or fibers connect the rack with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
W
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
washer
A washer which is used to level the cabinet.
winding pipe
A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-3
Installation Guide
Issue
02
Date
2008-09-10
Part Number
00435192
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical and service. For any assistance, please our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Installation Preparation............................................................................................................1-1 1.1 About the OptiX 155/622H.............................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Installation Flow..............................................................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Required Documents and Tools......................................................................................................................1-3 1.3.1 Technical Documents.............................................................................................................................1-4 1.3.2 Tools and Instruments............................................................................................................................1-4 1.4 Installation Environment Check......................................................................................................................1-9 1.5 Unpacking the Equipment...............................................................................................................................1-9 1.5.1 Unpacking the Cabinet...........................................................................................................................1-9 1.5.2 Unpacking the Chassis.........................................................................................................................1-12 1.5.3 Unpacking Boards................................................................................................................................1-14 1.5.4 Requirements of Inspection..................................................................................................................1-16 1.6 Checking the Equipment...............................................................................................................................1-16
2 Installing the Chassis................................................................................................................2-1 2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in a Series-C Integrated Cabinet......................................................2-2 2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 600 mm-Deep Cabinet or a 19-Inch Cabinet.................2-3 2.2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis Along the Slide Rail................................................................2-4 2.2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Upward.................................2-6 2.2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Downward............................2-9 2.2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis – Cabling from the Front .............................................2-12 2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 300 mm-Deep Cabinet.................................................2-13 2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in the Open Rack............................................................................2-18 2.5 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an Access Network Cabinet.......................................................2-20 2.6 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis on the Wall.....................................................................................2-21 2.6.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using a Rotary Subrack...................................................2-22 2.6.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using the Suspension Bracket..........................................2-25 2.7 Desktop Mounting.........................................................................................................................................2-27 2.8 Checking the Installation...............................................................................................................................2-27
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis................................................................3-1 3.1 About the Chassis............................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Environmental Requirements..........................................................................................................................3-2 Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
Contents
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3.3 Installing the Chassis.......................................................................................................................................3-3 3.3.1 Locating Installation Holes of the Chassis.............................................................................................3-3 3.3.2 Installing the Expansion Bolts................................................................................................................3-5 3.3.3 Installing Mounting Parts ......................................................................................................................3-7 3.3.4 Fixing the Chassis..................................................................................................................................3-8 3.3.5 Installing the Handle..............................................................................................................................3-9 3.3.6 Assembling the Chassis .......................................................................................................................3-10 3.3.7 Installing and Routing the Cables .......................................................................................................3-11 3.3.8 Installation Result ................................................................................................................................3-13 3.4 Checking the Installation ..............................................................................................................................3-13
4 Installing the UPM Power System .........................................................................................4-1 4.1 About the UPM Power System ......................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.1 Power Box .............................................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.2 Storage Battery ......................................................................................................................................4-4 4.1.3 Installation Mode ...................................................................................................................................4-5 4.2 Installing the Storage Battery and Power Box ...............................................................................................4-6 4.2.1 Installing the Storage Batteries..............................................................................................................4-6 4.2.2 Installing the Power Box in a 19-Inch Cabinet or an ETSI Cabinet .....................................................4-8 4.2.3 Installing the Power Box on the Wall .................................................................................................4-10 4.3 Installing the UPM Power Cables ................................................................................................................4-12 4.4 Checking the Installation ..............................................................................................................................4-14
5 Installing and Routing the Cables .........................................................................................5-1 5.1 Installing the PGND Cables............................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.1 About the Cables....................................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.2 Installation Procedures...........................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Installing the Power Cable..............................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.1 About the Power Cables ........................................................................................................................5-4 5.2.2 Installation Procedures ..........................................................................................................................5-4 5.3 Installing the E1/T1 Cables.............................................................................................................................5-6 5.3.1 About the E1/T1 Cables.........................................................................................................................5-6 5.3.2 Installation Procedures ..........................................................................................................................5-9 5.4 Installing E3/T3/STM-1e Cables..................................................................................................................5-11 5.4.1 About the E3/T3/STM-1e Cables.........................................................................................................5-11 5.4.2 Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................5-11 5.5 Installing Ethernet Cables ............................................................................................................................5-12 5.5.1 About the Ethernet Cable.....................................................................................................................5-12 5.5.2 Installing Procedures............................................................................................................................5-14 5.6 Installing the Framed E1 Cable.....................................................................................................................5-15 5.6.1 About the Framed E1 Cable.................................................................................................................5-15 5.6.2 Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................5-18 5.7 Installing the NM Cable ...............................................................................................................................5-19 5.7.1 About the NM Cable ...........................................................................................................................5-20 ii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Contents
5.7.2 Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................5-20 5.8 Installing the External Clock Cable..............................................................................................................5-21 5.8.1 About the External Clock Cable...........................................................................................................5-22 5.8.2 Installation Procedure...........................................................................................................................5-22 5.9 Installing the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable ..................................................................................5-23 5.9.1 About the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable...............................................................................5-24 5.9.2 Installation Procedure ..........................................................................................................................5-26 5.10 Checking the Cable Installation..................................................................................................................5-28
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers...................................................................................6-1 6.1 About Fiber Jumpers ......................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Installation Procedure .....................................................................................................................................6-3 6.3 Checking the Installation ................................................................................................................................6-6
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone ..............................................................................................7-1 7.1 About the Orderwire Interface........................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone ......................................................................................................................7-2 7.2.1 Installing the Orderwire Phone in the Cabinet ......................................................................................7-2 7.2.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone in an Open Rack ..................................................................................7-3 7.3 Checking the Orderwire Phone Installation....................................................................................................7-5
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment.........................................................................8-1 8.1 Powering On the Cabinet................................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.1 Checking Fuse Currents of the Power Supply.......................................................................................8-2 8.1.2 Testing the Resistance Between the Power Cable Terminals of the Cabinet ........................................8-3 8.1.3 Powering On a Cabinet..........................................................................................................................8-5 8.2 Powering On the Chassis ................................................................................................................................8-6 8.3 Checking the Fan Running Status...................................................................................................................8-7
9 Operation Environment Requirements.................................................................................9-1 9.1 Requirements for the Equipment Room Environment....................................................................................9-3 9.2 Layout of Equipment Room............................................................................................................................9-4 9.3 Construction of the Equipment Room.............................................................................................................9-4 9.4 Cleanliness of the Equipment Room...............................................................................................................9-6 9.5 Temperature and Humidity.............................................................................................................................9-7 9.6 Corrosive Gas Control Requirements.............................................................................................................9-8 9.7 Electromagnetic Requirements.......................................................................................................................9-8 9.8 Antistatic Protection........................................................................................................................................9-9 9.9 Lightning Protection and Grounding Requirements.......................................................................................9-9 9.10 Power Supply..............................................................................................................................................9-11 9.11 Lighting in the Equipment Room................................................................................................................9-15 9.12 Protection System........................................................................................................................................9-15
10 Grounding Specifications.....................................................................................................10-1 10.1 General Grounding Specifications..............................................................................................................10-2 Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Contents
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10.2 Grounding Specifications for the Building.................................................................................................10-2 10.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications.........................................................................................................10-2 10.4 Grounding Specifications for Office Power................................................................................................10-3 10.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables...............................................................................................10-4 10.6 Specifications for Managing Ground Cables..............................................................................................10-4
11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling...................................................................11-1 11.1 The Requirements of Cabling.....................................................................................................................11-2 11.2 The Requirements of Bundling...................................................................................................................11-2
12 Engineering Labels................................................................................................................12-1 12.1 Introduction to Labels.................................................................................................................................12-2 12.1.1 Material..............................................................................................................................................12-2 12.1.2 Type and Shape..................................................................................................................................12-2 12.2 Information Carried on Labels....................................................................................................................12-4 12.2.1 For Power Cables...............................................................................................................................12-4 12.2.2 For Signal Cables...............................................................................................................................12-4 12.2.3 Remarks..............................................................................................................................................12-5 12.3 Filling Information on Labels.....................................................................................................................12-5 12.3.1 Printing Labels...................................................................................................................................12-5 12.3.2 Writing Labels....................................................................................................................................12-8 12.4 Affixing Labels...........................................................................................................................................12-8 12.4.1 Affixing the Label to the Signal Cable...............................................................................................12-9 12.4.2 Affixing the Label to the Power Cable.............................................................................................12-10 12.5 Common Engineering Labels....................................................................................................................12-10 12.5.1 Power Cables....................................................................................................................................12-11 12.5.2 External Alarm Cables.....................................................................................................................12-12 12.5.3 Ethernet Cables................................................................................................................................12-13 12.5.4 Fibers Between Two Devices...........................................................................................................12-14 12.5.5 Fiber That Connects the Device and the ODF.................................................................................12-16 12.5.6 Trunk Cables....................................................................................................................................12-17 12.5.7 Subscriber Cables.............................................................................................................................12-20
13 Binding Strap..........................................................................................................................13-1 13.1 Binding Strap...............................................................................................................................................13-2 13.1.1 Architecture........................................................................................................................................13-2 13.1.2 Cutting................................................................................................................................................13-2 13.2 Bundling the Binding Strap.........................................................................................................................13-4 13.2.1 Procedures for Bundling the Binding Strap.......................................................................................13-4 13.2.2 Expected Result..................................................................................................................................13-5 13.2.3 Precautions.........................................................................................................................................13-6
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector........................................................................14-1 14.1 Making the Connector for the Coaxial Cable..............................................................................................14-2 14.1.1 Making the Straight BNC Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable.....................................................14-2 iv
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Contents
14.1.2 Making the L9-M Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable.................................................................14-7 14.1.3 Making the Straight SMB Female Connector for the Coaxial Cable...............................................14-11 14.2 Continuity Test of the Coaxial Cable........................................................................................................14-15
A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figures
Figures Figure 1-1 Appearance of OptiX 155/622H.........................................................................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Installation flow..................................................................................................................................1-3 Figure 1-3 Straighten the tongues......................................................................................................................1-11 Figure 1-4 Remove the cover.............................................................................................................................1-11 Figure 1-5 Remove the surrounded wooden board............................................................................................1-12 Figure 1-6 Unpacking the chassis......................................................................................................................1-13 Figure 1-7 Board carton.....................................................................................................................................1-15 Figure 2-1 Fixing the chassis................................................................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 OptiX 155/622H that is installed in a series-C integrated cabinet......................................................2-3 Figure 2-3 Fixing the mounting ears....................................................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-4 Fixing the chassis................................................................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-5 Installing the chassis along the slide rail............................................................................................2-6 Figure 2-6 Removing the screws from the side of the chassis ............................................................................2-7 Figure 2-7 Fastening the chassis on the mounting ears........................................................................................2-7 Figure 2-8 Fastening the captive nuts to the standing posts.................................................................................2-8 Figure 2-9 Installing the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing upward ...............................................................................................................................................................................2-9 Figure 2-10 Fixing the mounting ear of the chassis...........................................................................................2-10 Figure 2-11 Fixing the chassis to the cabinet.....................................................................................................2-11 Figure 2-12 Installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet with the mounting ears facing downward .............................................................................................................................................................................2-12 Figure 2-13 Fixing the mounting ear to the chassis...........................................................................................2-13 Figure 2-14 Structure of the rotary subrack.......................................................................................................2-14 Figure 2-15 Putting flat the suspension bracket.................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-16 Fixing the chassis............................................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-17 Positioning hole at the bottom of the OptiX 155/622H chassis.....................................................2-16 Figure 2-18 Fixing the chassis ...........................................................................................................................2-16 Figure 2-19 OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet.......................................................................2-18 Figure 2-20 OptiX 155/622H installed in the type-B open rack........................................................................2-20 Figure 2-21 OptiX 155/622H equipment in the ONU512 and ONU1000A......................................................2-21 Figure 2-22 Positioning the suspension bracket.................................................................................................2-22 Figure 2-23 Inserting expansion bolts and expansion nuts................................................................................2-23 Figure 2-24 Positioning the suspension bracket.................................................................................................2-23 Figure 2-25 Schematic diagram for wall mounting............................................................................................2-24 Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
Figures
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide Figure 2-26 OptiX 155/622H that is installed on the wall by using the rotary subrack.....................................2-25 Figure 2-27 Hanging the chassis on the suspension bracket..............................................................................2-26 Figure 2-28 Fixing the chassis............................................................................................................................2-26 Figure 2-29 OptiX 155/622H installed on the wall by using the suspension bracket........................................2-27 Figure 3-1 Outline drawing of the OptiX 155/622H chassis................................................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Allowing 350 mm clearance above the chassis..................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-3 Determining the locations for the installation holes...........................................................................3-5 Figure 3-4 Expansion bolt assembly....................................................................................................................3-6 Figure 3-5 Putting the expansion bolt assembly into the hole.............................................................................3-6 Figure 3-6 Removing the bolt assembly...............................................................................................................3-7 Figure 3-7 Securing the hangers...........................................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-8 Fixing the chassis................................................................................................................................3-9 Figure 3-9 Fixing the handle..............................................................................................................................3-10 Figure 3-10 Installation result............................................................................................................................3-11 Figure 3-11 Connecting the cables of the UPM ................................................................................................3-12 Figure 3-12 Wall-mounted OptiX 155/622H chassis.........................................................................................3-13 Figure 4-1 Front view of the power box ..............................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 Rear view of the power box ...............................................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-3 Power cable and management cable ..................................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-4 Storage battery pallet..........................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-5 Storage battery box.............................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-6 The pallet removed two partition bars................................................................................................4-7 Figure 4-7 Batteries installed in the pallet ...........................................................................................................4-8 Figure 4-8 Installing the mounting ears (in a 19-inch cabinet)............................................................................4-9 Figure 4-9 Installing the mounting ears (in an ETSI cabinet)..............................................................................4-9 Figure 4-10 Installing the power box ................................................................................................................4-10 Figure 4-11 Installing the expansion bolt and expansion tube...........................................................................4-11 Figure 4-12 Securing the OptiX 155/622H chassis ...........................................................................................4-11 Figure 4-13 Fixing the suspension bracket ........................................................................................................4-12 Figure 4-14 Connecting the DC power to the system........................................................................................4-13 Figure 4-15 Cable connection of the integrated wall-mounting cabinet ...........................................................4-14 Figure 5-1 PGND cable........................................................................................................................................5-2 Figure 5-2 Installation result of the PGND cable on the equipment side of the OptiX 155/622H......................5-3 Figure 5-3 Power cable ........................................................................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-4 Connection of the power cable...........................................................................................................5-5 Figure 5-5 Structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable.......................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-6 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable..................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-7 Installing the cable with a DB78 connector .....................................................................................5-10 Figure 5-8 E3/T3/STM-1e cable........................................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-9 Connector of the Ethernet cable.......................................................................................................5-13 Figure 5-10 Framed E1 cable on the FP2D board .............................................................................................5-15 Figure 5-11 Installing the Framed E1 cable.......................................................................................................5-19 viii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figures
Figure 5-12 Standard shielded network cable....................................................................................................5-20 Figure 5-13 Position of the NM interface on the SCB board.............................................................................5-20 Figure 5-14 Installing the NM cable..................................................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-15 Structure of the external clock cable..............................................................................................5-22 Figure 5-16 Structure of the transparent data/housekeeping cable....................................................................5-24 Figure 5-17 Installing transparent data/housekeeping cable .............................................................................5-27 Figure 6-1 Fiber connectors................................................................................................................................. 6-3 Figure 6-2 Cable holes on the cabinet .................................................................................................................6-5 Figure 6-3 Installing the fiber jumper ................................................................................................................. 6-6 Figure 6-4 Attaching a label.................................................................................................................................6-6 Figure 7-1 Orderwire interface ............................................................................................................................7-2 Figure 7-2 Fixing the orderwire phone set in the cabinet ....................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-3 Position for installing the orderwire phone in the open rack .............................................................7-4 Figure 8-1 Figure 12-1 Positions of the terminals in the DC distribution box.....................................................8-4 Figure 9-1 Layout of the equipment room........................................................................................................... 9-4 Figure 9-2 Internal partition wall of the equipment room....................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-3 Transient noises................................................................................................................................9-14 Figure 11-1 Cable bundling................................................................................................................................11-3 Figure 12-1 Label for signal cables....................................................................................................................12-3 Figure 12-2 Label for power cables....................................................................................................................12-4 Figure 12-3 Label for signal cables....................................................................................................................12-5 Figure 12-4 Template of label............................................................................................................................12-6 Figure 12-5 Warning prompt before printing.....................................................................................................12-7 Figure 12-6 Writing direction of the label..........................................................................................................12-8 Figure 12-7 Sticking the label onto proper position of the signal cable.............................................................12-9 Figure 12-8 Appearance of affixed labels on power cables.............................................................................12-10 Figure 12-9 Example of the labels on the DC power cable..............................................................................12-12 Figure 12-10 Example of the label on the alarm cable.....................................................................................12-13 Figure 12-11 Example of the label on the Ethernet cable................................................................................12-14 Figure 12-12 Example of the label on the fiber jumper between two devices.................................................12-15 Figure 12-13 Example of the label on the fiber jumper between the device and the ODF..............................12-17 Figure 12-14 Example of the label on the trunk cable between two devices...................................................12-19 Figure 12-15 Example of the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF................................12-19 Figure 12-16 Example of the label on the subscriber cable.............................................................................12-21 Figure 13-1 Binding strap...................................................................................................................................13-2 Figure 13-2 Install binding strap on cutterbar....................................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-3 Cut the binding strap.......................................................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-4 Step 2 of bundling optical fiber......................................................................................................13-5 Figure 13-5 Step 3 of bundling optical fiber......................................................................................................13-5 Figure 13-6 Bundling result of optical fiber.......................................................................................................13-5 Figure 14-1 BNC connector and the coaxial cable.............................................................................................14-3 Figure 14-2 Stripping off the coaxial cable........................................................................................................14-3 Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
Figures
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide Figure 14-3 Size of the straight BNC male connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable....................14-4 Figure 14-4 Leading the heat shrink tube and crimping sleeve through............................................................14-5 Figure 14-5 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable...................................................................14-5 Figure 14-6 Inserting the straight BNC male connector into the coaxial cable.................................................14-5 Figure 14-7 Welding the internal conductor......................................................................................................14-6
Figure 14-8 Crimping the external conductor....................................................................................................14-6 Figure 14-9 Blowing the heat shrink tube..........................................................................................................14-6 Figure 14-10 Installing the components of the coaxial cable.............................................................................14-7 Figure 14-11 L9-M connector and the coaxial cable..........................................................................................14-8 Figure 14-12 Stripping off the coaxial cable......................................................................................................14-8 Figure 14-13 Size of the connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable.................................................14-9 Figure 14-14 Leading the protection tube and crimping sleeve through............................................................14-9 Figure 14-15 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable.................................................................14-9 Figure 14-16 Inserting the coaxial connector into the coaxial cable................................................................14-10 Figure 14-17 Welding the internal conductor..................................................................................................14-10 Figure 14-18 Crimping the external conductor................................................................................................14-10 Figure 14-19 Rotating the protection tube tight...............................................................................................14-11 Figure 14-20 Components of the straight SMB female connector and the coaxial cable................................14-12 Figure 14-21 Stripping off the coaxial cable....................................................................................................14-12 Figure 14-22 Size of the connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable...............................................14-13 Figure 14-23 Leading the crimping sleeve through.........................................................................................14-13 Figure 14-24 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable...............................................................14-13 Figure 14-25 Inserting the coaxial connector into the coaxial cable................................................................14-13 Figure 14-26 Welding the internal conductor..................................................................................................14-14 Figure 14-27 Crimping the external conductor................................................................................................14-14 Figure 14-28 Installing the components of the coaxial cable...........................................................................14-14 Figure 14-29 Testing the coaxial cable............................................................................................................14-15
x
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Tables
Tables Table 1-1 Installation tools...................................................................................................................................1-4 Table 1-2 Meters...................................................................................................................................................1-8 Table 1-3 Items to be checked before the equipment installation......................................................................1-16 Table 4-1 Description of the Indicators ...............................................................................................................4-3 Table 4-2 Pin definitions of the management interface .......................................................................................4-3 Table 5-1 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable............................................................................................. 5-7 Table 5-2 Pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable...............................................................................5-8 Table 5-3 Connection relation of the straight-through cable..............................................................................5-13 Table 5-4 Connection relation of the crossover cable........................................................................................5-13 Table 5-5 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm Framed E1 cable................................................................................5-15 Table 5-6 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm Framed E1 cable..............................................................................5-17 Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the SYNC 1/2 external clock interface.................................................................5-22 Table 5-8 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM2 and ALM OUT1/MODEM (F) interfaces.............................................................................................................................................................5-24 Table 5-9 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM3 and OUT2 interfaces................5-25 Table 5-10 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM4 (F3) and IN1/2 interfaces.......5-25 Table 5-11 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the F2 and IN3/4 interfaces.....................5-26 Table 9-1 Construction requirements for the equipment room............................................................................ 9-4 Table 9-2 Limits of dust diameter and density in the equipment room................................................................9-6 Table 9-3 Limited density of harmful gas in the equipment room.......................................................................9-6 Table 9-4 Requirements for temperature and humidity........................................................................................9-7 Table 9-5 Corrosive gas content specification..................................................................................................... 9-8 Table 9-6 Electromagnetic specification..............................................................................................................9-8 Table 9-7 Requirements for lightning protection and grounding.......................................................................9-10 Table 9-8 DC charge/discharge status and voltage requirements.......................................................................9-12 Table 9-9 DC voltage specifications..................................................................................................................9-13 Table 10-1 General grounding specifications.....................................................................................................10-2 Table 10-2 Grounding specifications for the building........................................................................................10-2 Table 10-3 Equipment grounding specifications................................................................................................10-3 Table 10-4 Grounding specifications for office power.......................................................................................10-3 Table 10-5 Grounding specifications for signal cables......................................................................................10-4 Table 10-6 Specifications for managing ground cables.....................................................................................10-5 Table 12-1 Standard typeface for handwriting...................................................................................................12-8 Table 12-2 Information on labels affixed to the DC power cables...................................................................12-11 Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
Tables
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide Table 12-3 Information on labels affixed to the external cables of the alarm box...........................................12-12 Table 12-4 Information on labels affixed to the Ethernet cables......................................................................12-13 Table 12-5 Information on labels affixed to the fiber between two devices....................................................12-14 Table 12-6 Information on labels affixed to the fiber between the device and the ODF.................................12-16 Table 12-7 Information on labels affixed to the trunk cable between two devices..........................................12-18 Table 12-8 Information on labels affixed to the trunk cable between the device and the DDF.......................12-18 Table 12-9 Information on labels affixed to the subscriber cables...................................................................12-20 Table 14-1 Stripping sizes of the common coaxial cables.................................................................................14-4
xii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
About This Document
About This Document Overview This document describes the procedures for installing the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) (hereinafter referred to as the OptiX 155/622H), including the installation of the chassis, integrated wall-mounting chassis, UPM power system, and fibers/cables. This document also describes the grounding specifications for the OptiX 155/622H.
Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Version
OptiX 155/622H
V300R005
Intended Audience The intended audience of this document is: Hardware installation engineer
Organization The manual is organized as follows:
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Chapter
Description
1 Installation Preparation
This chapter describes the appearance, installation flow, and installation preparation of the OptiX 155/622H.
2 Installing the Chassis
This chapter describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H.
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
This chapter describes how to install the integrated wallmounting chassis.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
About This Document
Chapter
Description
4 Installing the UPM Power System
This chapter describes how to install the UPM power system, and the precautions for the installation.
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
This chapter describes how to install the fibers/cables, and the precautions for the installation.
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
This chapter describes the connection relation and installation procedures of fiber jumpers, and the precautions for the installation.
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
This chapter describes how to install the orderwire phone.
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
This chapter describes the operations required to power on the OptiX 155/622H.
9 Operation Environment Requirements
This appendix describes the environment required for the normal operation of the OptiX 155/622H.
10 Grounding Specifications
This appendix describes the grounding specifications for the normal operation of the OptiX 155/622H.
11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
This appendix describes the plan for routing and bundling the cables, and the relevant precautions.
12 Engineering Labels
This appendix describes the structure of the engineering cable labels and the rules to follow when filling the labels.
13 Binding Strap
This appendix describes the structure of the binding strap for fiber jumpers, the method of using the binding straps, and the relevant precautions.
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
This appendix lists the methods for connecting the BNC, SMB, and L9 connectors to a coaxial cable and the method for testing the continuity of the cable.
A Glossary
This appendix lists the used in this document.
Conventions Symbol Conventions The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows. Symbol
Description
DANGER
2
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Symbol
About This Document
Description
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and s are in boldface. For example, as root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Terminal display is in Courier New.
Command Conventions
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italic.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
About This Document
GUI Conventions Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operation Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressingCtrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operation Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Update History Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 02 (2008-09-10) l
The name of this document is modified.
l
Certain known defects are fixed.
Updates in Issue 01 (2008-07-01) Initial field trial release. 4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1
1 Installation Preparation
Installation Preparation
About This Chapter This chapter describes the tools and documents that are required for installing the OptiX 155/622H, and the installation procedures. 1.1 About the OptiX 155/622H This section describes the structure, dimensions, and installation mode of the OptiX 155/622H. 1.2 Installation Flow Correct installation flow is the key to ensuring a smooth and trouble-free installation. 1.3 Required Documents and Tools To ensure the smooth installation of the equipment, the necessary documentation, tools and instruments must be available. 1.4 Installation Environment Check The OptiX 155/622H can operate normally only when the equipment room is in good condition. The OptiX 155/622H is protected against lightning and interference only when it is properly grounded. 1.5 Unpacking the Equipment This section directs you to unpack cabinets and boards. Unpack integrated subrack and other cases in the same way. 1.6 Checking the Equipment The cabinet, boards, network management computer and internal cables need to be checked before the equipment installation.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
1.1 About the OptiX 155/622H This section describes the structure, dimensions, and installation mode of the OptiX 155/622H. The OptiX 155/622H is integrated case-shaped equipment, which consists of the chassis, fan board, power board, and board area. There are a number of modes that can be used for installing the OptiX 155/622H. You can choose one of the following modes based on your requirements: l
Installation in the OptiX 155/622H-C series integrated cabinet
l
Installation in the 600 mm-deep ETSI cabinet
l
Installation in the 19-inch standard cabinet
l
Installation in the 300 mm-deep ETSI cabinet
l
Installation in the open rack
l
Installation in the cabinet of the access network
l
Wall mounting
l
Desktop mounting
l
Installation in the integrated wall-mounting chassis
The dimensions of the OptiX 155/622H are 436 mm (width) x 293 mm (depth) x 86 mm (height). When the OptiX 155/622H is fully configured, the equipment weight is 10 kg. The maximum power consumption is 100 W. For the equipment structure, see Figure 1-1. Figure 1-1 Appearance of OptiX 155/622H
1-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
1.2 Installation Flow Correct installation flow is the key to ensuring a smooth and trouble-free installation. Figure 1-2 shows the procedures for installing the OptiX 155/622H. Figure 1-2 Installation flow Start Installation preparation See Chapter 1
Installing an integrated wallmounting chassis
Installing the chassis See Chapter 2
See Chapter 3
Installing the UPM power system
Installing the PGND cable See section 5.1
See Chapter 4 Installing the power cable See section 5.2
Installing and routing the cables
See Chapter 5
Installing and routing fiber jumpers
See Chapter 6
Installing the orderwire phone
Installing E1/T1 cables
See section 5.3
Installing E3/T3/STM-1e See section 5.4 cables Installing Ethernet cables
See section 5.5
Installing the Framed E1 cable
See section 5.6
Installing the NM cable
See section 5.7
Installing the external clock cable
See section 5.8
See Chapter 7 Power-on check See Chapter 8
Installing the transparent data and housekeeping cable
See section 5.9
End
1.3 Required Documents and Tools To ensure the smooth installation of the equipment, the necessary documentation, tools and instruments must be available. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
1.3.1 Technical Documents The relevant technical documentation must be available before you install the equipment. 1.3.2 Tools and Instruments The required tools and instruments include the general tools, special tools, general instruments and special instruments.
1.3.1 Technical Documents The relevant technical documentation must be available before you install the equipment. l
Written contracts, agreements and complete equipment configuration tables, provided by the .
l
Design specifications of equipment room, detailed engineering drawings and sketches, provided by the .
l
The installation guide provided by Huawei.
1.3.2 Tools and Instruments The required tools and instruments include the general tools, special tools, general instruments and special instruments. lists of the tools and instruments used in installation, refer to Table 1-1 and Table 1-2 Table 1-1 Installation tools Name and Function
Appearance
Name and Function
Steel tape:
Measuring tape:
Used to measure the length less than 5 m.
Used to measure the length greater than 5 m.
Ruler (1 m):
Spirit level:
Used to measure the length less than 1 m.
Used to check the levelness.
Marker pen:
Pencil:
Used to make marks when you draw lines.
Used to take notes.
Powder marker:
Hand-held electric drill:
Used to make marks.
Appearance
Used to drill holes.
1-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Name and Function
Appearance
1 Installation Preparation
Name and Function
Percussion drill:
Vacuum cleaner:
Used to drill holes before you install a cabinet.
Used to suck dust or drilling chips.
Flathead screwdriver (M3–M6):
Philips screwdriver (M3–M6):
Used to fasten small screws and bolts. The flathead screwdriver has a line-shaped blade.
Used to fasten small screws and bolts. The Philips screwdriver has a cross-shaped blade.
Socket spanner (M8– M12):
Adjustable spanner:
Used to fasten bolts or nuts. The socket ends are of different specifications.
Used to fasten or loosen hexagonal or square bolts or nuts. The width of the open end is adjustable.
Ring spanner:
Double ring spanner:
Used to fasten bolts or nuts in a small enclosure.
Used to fasten bolts or nuts, especially in a small enclosure. Both ends of the spanner can be used.
Torque wrench:
Inner hexagon spanner:
Used to fasten bolts or nuts. The spanner handle can be used to restrict the range of the moment of fastening force, and the socket ends can be of different specifications.
Used to fasten bolts or nuts. The inner hexagon spanners are of two types, with a ball end and without a ball end.
Sharp-nose pliers:
Diagonal pliers:
Used to hold small fittings and twist fine wires in a small enclosure.
Used to cut insulation tubes and cable ties.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Appearance
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Name and Function
Appearance
Name and Function
Cord end pliers:
Pliers:
Used to crimp the cord end terminal adapted to a power cable with a small cross section.
Used to fold, bend, or cut wires.
Wire stripper:
Crimping pliers:
Used to remove the insulation layer and jacket from a communication cable with a small cross section.
Used to crimp the metal jacket at the end of a coaxial cable assembly.
RJ-45 connector crimping pliers:
Wire punchdown tool:
Used to crimp the RJ-45 connectors of telephone lines and network cables.
Used to install subscriber lines and trunk lines onto the cable distribution frame. This tool is also used to connect cables and modules to the cable distribution frame.
Handsaw:
File:
Used to cut feeders.
Used to smoothen the cut edge of a feeder.
Crowbar:
Rubber hammer:
Used to carry, lift, or lay down a device.
Used to knock or shape a workpiece.
Brush:
Tweezers:
Used to clean sundries such as dust and scraps.
Used to pick up light and small objects.
1-6
Appearance
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Name and Function
Appearance
Name and Function
Label:
-
Tape
Appearance
Used to mark equipment and cables. This facilitates equipment installation and maintenance. Solder wire: Used together with an electric soldering iron for soldering.
Electric soldering iron: Used to solder a conductor with a small cross section to a connector.
Antistatic wrist strap:
Antistatic gloves:
Used to prevent the electrostatic discharge (ESD) when you touch or operate a device or component.
Used to prevent the ESD from damaging a board or other electrostatic sensitive devices (ESSDs).
Ladder:
Fiber cleaning tools:
Used for work at heights.
Used to clean fibers.
Telescope
Hoisting tools: Used to hoist outdoor devices and components.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Table 1-2 Meters Name and Function
Appearance
Name and Function
Optical attenuator:
Optical power meter:
Used to adjust the power level of an optical signal by adjusting the attenuation.
Used to test the optical power.
Spectrum analyzer:
Multimeter:
Used to identify, analyze, and monitor the signals of optical waveform.
Used to measure the insulation of a cabinet, connection of a cable, and electric performance indexes of a device, such as voltage, current, and resistance.
SDH analyzer:
2 Mbit/s bit error tester:
Used to test all the indexes of the SDH network.
Ground resistance meter: Used to measure the ground resistance.
Com
1-8
Appearance
Used to measure the bit error rate (BER) of 2-Mbit/s signals during transmission. 500 VM ohmmeter: Used to measure the insulation resistance.
GPS
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
NOTE
The special tools and instruments shall be supplied by the party specified in the contract. The general tools and instruments are provided by the installer. All instruments should be tested and calibrated before use.
1.4 Installation Environment Check The OptiX 155/622H can operate normally only when the equipment room is in good condition. The OptiX 155/622H is protected against lightning and interference only when it is properly grounded. It is recommended that you read through Appendix 9 Operation Environment Requirements and Appendix 10 Grounding Specifications, and then check the equipment room accordingly before the construction. Reconstruct the places in the equipment room that do not comply with the relevant requirements to prevent troubles that may occur in later installation and maintenance.
1.5 Unpacking the Equipment This section directs you to unpack cabinets and boards. Unpack integrated subrack and other cases in the same way. 1.5.1 Unpacking the Cabinet This procedure describes how to unpack the cabinet so that you can proceed to the next installation procedure. 1.5.2 Unpacking the Chassis This section describes how to unpack the chassis. 1.5.3 Unpacking Boards If the board is separately delivered, unpack the board before you install it. 1.5.4 Requirements of Inspection The received goods must be inspected against the Packing List item by item.
1.5.1 Unpacking the Cabinet This procedure describes how to unpack the cabinet so that you can proceed to the next installation procedure.
Prerequisite None
Tools, Equipment and Materials l
Spanner
l
Screwdriver
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-9
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Precautions
WARNING Since the cabinet is rather heavy, erecting the cabinet improperly may cause personal injuries.
CAUTION l
The wooden case is direction-oriented and should not be placed upside down. Otherwise, fatal damages would be caused to the product.
l
During the transportation and handling of products, spare parts or components, make sure to avoid the collision of such things against doors, walls or shelves.
l
To avoid equipment damage in the course of moving, move the packing box to the equipment room or a place near the equipment room before unpacking.
l
In the process of transporting, handling and installing the equipment, it is forbidden to reach the uncoated metal surface of equipment parts or components with sweaty or dirty gloves.
CAUTION l
When handling the cabinet, both hands should hold on the solid places such as the base, the upper cable rack or bone frame, do not apply too much force on such places with poor rigidity as cable , cable fixing beam, so as to avoid any damage to the cabinet or any accident.
l
Remove the lining board of the rack at the place where the cabinet is to be installed. Otherwise, the signal lines and boards may be damaged during transportation or handling.
Procedure Step 1 Move the packing box to the equipment room or a place nearby before unpacking it. Step 2 Check the outer package. Stop unpacking immediately, if there is l
Serious damage to the outer package.
l
Water on the outside packaging box
l
Rust/water on the equipment.
Find the cause. Then, feed back the information to the local representative office. Step 3 Insert one end of the ejector lever into the hold for the tongue of the wooden case cover. Step 4 Turn the ejector lever to straighten the tongue, as shown in Figure 1-3. Or use a screwdriver or a hammer to operate the tongue.
1-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Figure 1-3 Straighten the tongues Steeledge Woodenboard
Tongue
Spanner
Step 5 After straightening all the tongues on the cover, remove the cover, as shown in Figure 1-4. Figure 1-4 Remove the cover
Step 6 Straighten all the tongues that the wooden boards around the wooden case. Step 7 Remove the wooden boards, as shown in Figure 1-5.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Figure 1-5 Remove the surrounded wooden board
Step 8 Take the cabinet out of the packing box. Step 9 Remove the plastic packing of the cabinet and erect the cabinet.
WARNING At least three persons are required to erect the cabinet: one person to hold the cabinet bottom, and two persons to lift the top of the cabinet and make the cabinet vertical. Step 10 Compare the equipment inside with the packing list. If there are any discrepancies, notify the local customer service center. NOTE
To protect the equipment , place the already unpacked equipment indoor. Take photos of the site storage environment, the rusted or corroded equipment/packing box/packaging materials. Properly keep these photos and store the packing box/packing materials.
----End
1.5.2 Unpacking the Chassis This section describes how to unpack the chassis.
Prerequisite The chassis must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments l
1-12
ESD gloves Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide l
Diagonal pliers
l
Paper knife
1 Installation Preparation
Required/As Needed Optional
Procedure Step 1 Move the packaging case to the equipment room. Step 2 Check the packaging case. Stop unpacking in the following cases: l
Serious damage to the outer package
l
Water on the outside packaging box
l
Rust/water on the equipment
Find out the cause, and provide to the local office of Huawei. Step 3 Check the equipment configuration according to the label on the carton, and make records. Step 4 Use a diagonal pliers to cut the binding straps. Use a paper knife to cut the adhesive tape along the edge of the carton cover. Do not cut in too deep; otherwise, the goods inside the carton may be damaged. See Figure 1-6. Figure 1-6 Unpacking the chassis 4
1
2 3
7 6
1. Carton
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
2. Packing strap
5
3. Carton label
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4. Equipment carton
1-13
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation 5. Foam plate
6. Equipment
7. Moisture barrier bag
Step 5 Open the carton, and take out the chassis packaging case. Step 6 Open the chassis packaging case, and take out the chassis. Check whether the chassis is damaged. ----End
1.5.3 Unpacking Boards If the board is separately delivered, unpack the board before you install it.
Prerequisite None
Tools, Equipment and Materials l
ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l
Diagonal pliers
l
Paper knife
Background Information Generally, the board has been installed in the subrack properly before delivery and is shipped together with the subrack. If a carton is used to pack boards for shipping, unpacking and checking are necessary when the boards arrive at the destination. (Generally, a carton is used when boards are required for capacity expansion.) The boards are put into shielding bags for transportation. Take ESD protection measures when you unpack the boards to prevent damage to them.
Precautions
CAUTION Electronic circuits and components are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). When handling circuit boards, make sure that you wear a securely grounded ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and only hold the edge of boards during operation.
Procedure Step 1 Wear a securely grounded ESD wrist strap(or ESD gloves) and make sure that it is securely grounded. Step 2 Cut the straps with diagonal pliers and use a paper knife to split the tape along the seam between the cover and the box body. See Figure 1-7.
CAUTION Do not cut too deep into the carton with the paper knife. Otherwise, the knife might scratch the articles inside.
1-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
Figure 1-7 Board carton Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape
Foam plate
Label on the board box
Board box
Strap
Carton label Cushon foam
Board box Board
Shielding bag
NOTE
l
Each board is packed in both a cushion foam and an shielding bag. Keep the bags properly. They can be used later for keeping the boards or packing the damaged boards returned for repair.
l
The ambient temperature and humidity may have an impact on the boards. In each shielding bag there is a small bag of desiccant, which shall not be thrown away.
l
Wait for at least 30 minutes before unpacking if the board is just moved from a cold, dry place to a warm, damp place. Otherwise, moisture will condense on the board surface and damage the components.
Step 3 Open the carton and check whether the number and type of the boards are consistent with what is marked on the carton label. Step 4 Check that there is no evident damage on the board package. Step 5 Open the board box and take the board out of the shielding bag. l
Hold the bottom of the shielding bag with the left hand.
l
Take the board out of the bag gently by its front with the right hand.
l
Do not touch any electronic component on the board surface to avoid damage.
l
Keep the bags properly.
Step 6 Check whether any board is physically damaged. If any board damage is found, Huawei. Step 7 If no problem is found, put the board back into the board box and put it in the place specified by the customer. l
If you are going to install the board right after unpacking, place the board on an antistatic surface to discharge the static electricity.
l
If you are going to install the board at a later time, pack the board using the original materials and place them at a cool dry place without direct sunshine or strong electromagnetic radiation.
----End Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
1.5.4 Requirements of Inspection The received goods must be inspected against the Packing List item by item. l
After the goods are inspected complete and intact, both the engineering supervisor and the customer must sign the Packing List. After that, the customer takes over the goods.
l
During the inspection, if some equipment is stated undelivered in the Packing List, directly report the situation to the order management engineer of the local office of Huawei for subsequent handling. Both the engineering supervisor and the customer shall sign the Packing List to confirm the situation.
l
If any short, wrong, extra or damaged equipment is found during the inspection, both parties shall sign the Unpacking Memo and the Packing List. The project supervisor shall fill in the Equipment Problem Report and send it to the order management engineer of the local office of Huawei within three days.
1.6 Checking the Equipment The cabinet, boards, network management computer and internal cables need to be checked before the equipment installation. Table 1-3 lists the items to be checked before the equipment installation. Table 1-3 Items to be checked before the equipment installation Item
Sub-Item
Requirements
Cabinet and chassis
Appearance
Neat, no scratch or disrepair, and no loosened components.
Inside part
No foreign items or water stain.
Internal cables
Neatly bundled. No cable is scattered, loosened, or damaged.
Silkscreen
Clear.
Connection component
The connection components are installed properly, with the pins neat.
Appearance
Neat, no scratch or disrepair, no loosened components.
Quantity
Consistent with that on the delivery list.
Installation compact disk
The required software installation compact disks are intact.
Appearance
Wiring is complete, reasonable and neat.
Connectors
Firm, correct, and no float insertion.
Boards
Internal cables
1-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
1 Installation Preparation
CAUTION l
If any item in the table fails to meet the requirement, Huawei in a timely manner.
l
If you detect that any board is damaged or that the received goods are not consistent with the packaging list, fill in a form and make records in a timely manner.
l
The internal cabled are installed before delivery from the factory. The internal cables include the power cable and grounding cable of the chassis, protection grounding cable, power cable of the hub, and cabinet indicator cable.
l
If you detect that any connector is damaged, that the connector is loose, or that the cable is scratched, first restore the cable. If the cable cannot be restored, configure another cable.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-17
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
2
Installing the Chassis
About This Chapter Choose the proper method for installing the OptiX 155/622H depending on the actual situation. This chapter describes how to install an independent chassis.
CAUTION Do not place any item heavier than 8 kg on the chassis. 2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in a Series-C Integrated Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in a series-C integrated cabinet. 2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 600 mm-Deep Cabinet or a 19-Inch Cabinet Four modes can be used to install the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet or a 19-inch cabinet. 2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 300 mm-Deep Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet. 2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in the Open Rack This topic describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in the open rack. 2.5 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an Access Network Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in an access network cabinet. 2.6 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis on the Wall There are two modes for installing the OptiX 155/622H on the wall. 2.7 Desktop Mounting In the case of desktop mounting, place the chassis on a desktop. 2.8 Checking the Installation After the installation is complete, check whether the equipment is properly installed.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in a Series-C Integrated Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in a series-C integrated cabinet.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
l
Space must be reserved in the cabinet for installing the chassis.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials Pallet
Procedure Step 1 Remove the side s from both the sides of the cabinet. Step 2 Remove the two screws from both the sides of the OptiX 155/622H chassis. The locations of the screws are shown in Figure 2-1. Step 3 Place the chassis on the mounting ears of the cabinet. The chassis must face the same direction as the cabinet. Step 4 Through the hole on the side of the mounting ears, install the screws removed in Step 2 onto the side of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Fixing the chassis
OptiX 155/622H
Mounting ear
2-2
Screw
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Step 5 Fasten the side s that were removed in Step 1 back to the cabinet. ----End
Result Figure 2-2 shows the OptiX 155/622H that is installed in a series-C integrated cabinet. Figure 2-2 OptiX 155/622H that is installed in a series-C integrated cabinet
OptiX 155/622H Digital distribution frame
Optical distribution frame
Optical fixed frame
2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 600 mm-Deep Cabinet or a 19-Inch Cabinet Four modes can be used to install the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet or a 19-inch cabinet. 2.2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis Along the Slide Rail This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet along the slide rail. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears. 2.2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Upward
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing upward. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears. 2.2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Downward This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing downward. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears. 2.2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis – Cabling from the Front This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with cables led out from the front . The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears.
2.2.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis Along the Slide Rail This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet along the slide rail. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
l
The slide rail configured for the OptiX 155/622H must be installed in the cabinet.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Mounting ears
l
Four M6x12 screws
Procedure Step 1 Remove the screws from both the sides of the OptiX 155/622H. Fix the mounting ear to the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-3.
2-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-3 Fixing the mounting ears
Mounting ear
Step 2 Place the chassis onto the slide rail with care. Step 3 Fix the chassis to the cabinet with four M6x12 screw assemblies, as shown in Figure 2-4. Figure 2-4 Fixing the chassis
Slide rail
----End
Result Figure 2-5 shows the OptiX 155/622H that is installed along the slide rail.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-5 Installing the chassis along the slide rail
2.2.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Upward This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing upward. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Four M6x12 screws
l
Four M6 captive nuts
Procedure Step 1 Remove the screws from both the sides of the OptiX 155/622H, as shown in Figure 2-6. 2-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-6 Removing the screws from the side of the chassis
Step 2 Place the chassis on the mounting ears and fasten it with the screws that were removed in Step 1, as shown in Figure 2-7. Figure 2-7 Fastening the chassis on the mounting ears
Step 3 Fasten four M6 captive nuts to the standing posts on both the sides of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-8.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-7
2 Installing the Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 2-8 Fastening the captive nuts to the standing posts
Captive nut Installation hole
Step 4 Fix the mounting ears along with the chassis to the cabinet with four M6x12 screw assemblies. ----End
Result Figure 2-9 shows the OptiX 155/622H that is installed in an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears upward.
2-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-9 Installing the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing upward
2.2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis with the Mounting Ears Facing Downward This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with the mounting ears facing downward. The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Mounting ears
l
Eight M6x12 screws
l
Four M6 captive nuts
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-9
2 Installing the Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Procedure Step 1 Fasten four M6 captive nuts to the standing posts on both the sides of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-8. Step 2 Remove the four screws from both the sides of the chassis. Fix the mounting ear to the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-10. Figure 2-10 Fixing the mounting ear of the chassis
Mounting ear
Step 3 Fasten the four M6 captive nuts to the standing posts on both the sides of the cabinet. Step 4 Fix the chassis to the cabinet with four M6x12 screw assemblies, as shown in Figure 2-11.
2-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-11 Fixing the chassis to the cabinet
----End
Result Figure 2-12 shows the OptiX 155/622H installed in a 19-inch cabinet with mounting ears downward.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-12 Installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19-inch cabinet with the mounting ears facing downward
2.2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis – Cabling from the Front This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H into an ETSI 600 mm-deep cabinet with cables led out from the front . The method for installing the OptiX 155/622H in a 19inch cabinet is the same, but requires different mounting ears.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials
2-12
l
Mounting ears
l
Four M6x12 screws
l
Four M6 captive nuts Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Procedure Step 1 Fasten four M6 captive nuts to the standing posts on both the sides of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-8. Step 2 Remove the four screws from both the sides of the chassis. Fix the mounting ear to the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-13. Figure 2-13 Fixing the mounting ear to the chassis
Mounting ear
Step 3 Fix the chassis to the cabinet with four M6x12 screw assemblies. ----End
2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 300 mm-Deep Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
M3 screw
l
Four M6 captive nuts
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-13
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis l
Four M6 screws
l
Rotary subrack
A rotary subrack is required for installing the OptiX 155/622H in the ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet. Figure 2-14 shows the structure of the rotary subrack. The dimensions of the rotary subrack are 513 mm (W) x 280 mm (D) x 522 mm (H). Figure 2-14 Structure of the rotary subrack
Suspension bracket
Procedure Step 1 Insert the positioning pins on both the sides of the rotary subrack at the same time in the direction of (1) in Figure 2-15. Remove the positioning pins from the lockholes, and then rotate downward the holder in the arrow direction of (2) until the holder is put flat.
2-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-15 Putting flat the suspension bracket
Positioning pin 1 2
Positioning hole
Suspension bracket
Step 2 Align the chassis with the positioning holes at the bottom of the chassis, and insert the chassis into the positioning pins on the rotary subrack. See Figure 2-16. For the positions of the positioning holes, see Figure 2-17. Figure 2-16 Fixing the chassis
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-17 Positioning hole at the bottom of the OptiX 155/622H chassis
Positioning hole
Step 3 Align the screw holes on both the sides of the chassis with the screw holes on both the sides of the suspension bracket. Use the M3 screws to fasten the suspension bracket to the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-18. Figure 2-18 Fixing the chassis
2-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Step 4 Pull out the positioning pins on both the sides of the rotary subrack. Rotate the suspension upward by 90 degrees, and align the pins to the lockholes. Then, release the pins and insert them into the holes. Step 5 Determine the location of the rotary subrack in the cabinet. Fasten four M6 captive nuts to the standing posts on both the sides of the cabinet. Step 6 Use four M6 screws to secure the rotary subrack in the cabinet. ----End
Result Figure 2-19 shows the OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-17
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-19 OptiX 155/622H in an ETSI 300 mm-deep cabinet
2.4 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in the Open Rack This topic describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in the open rack.
Prerequisite
2-18
l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Mounting ears
l
Four M6 floating nuts
l
Four M6 screws
Precautions None.
Procedure Step 1 Use the four screws that are removed from both the sides of the chassis to connect the mounting ears to the chassis. Step 2 Install the slide rails to the rack columns on both the sides. Step 3 Install the four M6 floating nuts to the rack columns on both the sides. Step 4 Use the four M6 screws to connect the mounting ears, and thus to fix the chassis to the rack. ----End
Result Figure 2-20 shows the OptiX 155/622H installed in the type-B open rack.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-19
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-20 OptiX 155/622H installed in the type-B open rack
Wire wrap
Slide rail
2.5 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an Access Network Cabinet This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H in an access network cabinet.
Prerequisite l
The cabinet must be installed.
l
The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials
2-20
l
Plug-in frame
l
Four screws
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Context The OptiX 155/622H can be installed in two types of access network cabinets: l
HONET-ONU512 cabinet
l
HONET-ONU1000A cabinet (series-B cabinet)
To install the OptiX 155/622H in the ONU512 and ONU1000A cabinets, use the plug-in frames that are provided for this purpose. Each plug-in frame provided for the ONU512 can be used to house one OptiX 155/622H. Each plug-in frame provided for the ONU1000A can be used to house up to two OptiX 155/622Hs.
Procedure Step 1 Remove the screws from both sides of the OptiX 155/622H. See Figure 2-6. Step 2 Place the chassis into the plug-in frame, and secure the chassis with the screws that are removed in Step 1. Step 3 Use four screws to secure the plug-in frame in the cabinet. See Figure 2-21. Figure 2-21 OptiX 155/622H equipment in the ONU512 and ONU1000A
Hole of the screw for installing the plug-in frame into the cabinet Plug-in frame OptiX 155/622H Hole of the screw for fixing the chassis in the plug-in frame
----End
2.6 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis on the Wall There are two modes for installing the OptiX 155/622H on the wall. 2.6.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using a Rotary Subrack This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H on the wall by using a rotary subrack. 2.6.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using the Suspension Bracket This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H on the wall by using the suspension bracket. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-21
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
2.6.1 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using a Rotary Subrack This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H on the wall by using a rotary subrack.
Prerequisite The chassis and the installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Suspension bracket
l
Rotary subrack
l
M3 screw
l
Three M8 expansion bolts
Procedure Step 1 Place the suspension bracket on the location where it is to be mounted with the mounting ear facing upward. There are three holes on the back of the suspension bracket. Mark the locations of these three holes on the wall, and remove the bracket, as shown in Figure 2-22. Figure 2-22 Positioning the suspension bracket
Hanger
Suspension bracket
Installation hole
Step 2 Drill three holes in the marked places with a Ф10 drill. Insert the M6 expansion bolts into the holes. See Figure 2-23.
2-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-23 Inserting expansion bolts and expansion nuts
Expansion tube Expansion bolt
Step 3 Insert the expansion bolts into the installation holes of the suspension bracket. Fasten the nuts to fix the bracket onto the wall, as shown in Figure 2-24. Figure 2-24 Positioning the suspension bracket Big flat washer
Spring gasket Nut
Expansion bolt Wall
Suspension bracket
Step 4 Hang the rotary subrack of the suspension bracket from the hanging hole. Fasten the screws on the rotary subrack to fasten the rotary subrack to the suspension bracket, as shown in Figure 2-25.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-23
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-25 Schematic diagram for wall mounting
2 1
3
NOTE
The numbers in this figure indicate the sequence of the operations.
Step 5 Mount the OptiX 155/622H chassis to the rotary subrack. For the procedures, see step 1 through 4 in section 2.3 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis in an ETSI 300 mm-Deep Cabinet. ----End
Result Figure 2-26 shows the OptiX 155/622H that is installed on the wall by using the rotary subrack. NOTE
When the OptiX 155/622H is installed on the wall, the interface area faces upward.
2-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-26 OptiX 155/622H that is installed on the wall by using the rotary subrack
2.6.2 Installing the OptiX 155/622H Chassis by Using the Suspension Bracket This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H on the wall by using the suspension bracket.
Prerequisite The chassis and installing materials must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Suspension bracket
l
Three M8 expansion bolts
Procedure Step 1 Place the suspension bracket where it is to be mounted, with the mounting ear facing upward. There are three holes on the back of the bracket. Mark the locations of the three screw holes on the wall. Remove the bracket, as shown in Figure 2-22. Step 2 Drill three holes in the marked places with a Ф10 drill. Insert the M8 expansion bolts into the holes as shown in Figure 2-23. Step 3 Insert the expansion bolts into the installation holes of the suspension bracket. Fasten the nuts to fix the suspension bracket to the wall, as shown in Figure 2-24. Step 4 Hang the chassis onto the suspension bracket properly so that the mounting ears are inserted into the position holes of the OptiX 155/622H chassis, as shown in Figure 2-27. The locations of the positioning holes are as shown in Figure 2-17. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-25
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-27 Hanging the chassis on the suspension bracket
Step 5 Fasten the screws to secure the chassis to the suspension bracket, as shown in Figure 2-28. Figure 2-28 Fixing the chassis
----End
Result Figure 2-29 shows the OptiX 155/622H that is installed on the wall by using the suspension bracket. NOTE
When the OptiX 155/622H is installed on the wall, the interface area faces upwards.
2-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
2 Installing the Chassis
Figure 2-29 OptiX 155/622H installed on the wall by using the suspension bracket
2.7 Desktop Mounting In the case of desktop mounting, place the chassis on a desktop.
2.8 Checking the Installation After the installation is complete, check whether the equipment is properly installed. The following requirements should be met when the chassis installation is complete: l
The position for installing the chassis must comply with the engineering design file.
l
The chassis must be firmly secured, and must comply with the shakeproof requirements stated in the engineering design file.
l
Boards can be plugged normally. After a board is inserted into the chassis, the screws on the must be tightened.
l
All the idle slots must be configured with blank s.
l
The components of the equipment must not be deformed.
l
The equipment room must be clean and tidy. The items such as scrapped packaging cases must be disposed of. The spare installation parts must be placed in order.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-27
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
About This Chapter This chapter describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H chassis on the wall. 3.1 About the Chassis An integrated wall-mounting chassis of the OptiX 155/622H can house one set of the OptiX 155/622H, one UPM power box, and one storage battery. 3.2 Environmental Requirements This section describes the environmental requirements for installing an integrated wall-mounting chassis of the OptiX 155/622H. 3.3 Installing the Chassis This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H integrated wall-mounting chassis. 3.4 Checking the Installation After the chassis is installed, check whether the installation is properly complete.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3.1 About the Chassis An integrated wall-mounting chassis of the OptiX 155/622H can house one set of the OptiX 155/622H, one UPM power box, and one storage battery. The dimensions of the integrated wall-mounting chassis (hereinafter referred to as chassis): 450 mm (W) x 218 mm (D) x 465 mm (H) Figure 3-1 shows the chassis with the top cover removed. Figure 3-1 Outline drawing of the OptiX 155/622H chassis
3.2 Environmental Requirements This section describes the environmental requirements for installing an integrated wall-mounting chassis of the OptiX 155/622H. When installing the chassis, make sure that the location and the power meet the following requirements:
3-2
l
Wall: The wall must be made of reinforced concrete or brick, and must not be less than 180 mm thick because it must a mounting weight of 50 kg. It cannot be a sandy soil wall, stone wall or hollow clay brick wall.
l
Corrosion-proof, shockproof: The location where the chassis is mounted must be free from corrosion, poisonous smoke, dust or gas. The intensity of the seismic design in the location must comply with the local practices.
l
Sunshine protection: The chassis should not be directly exposed to sunlight. High temperature in the chassis may affect the normal operation and the life of the equipment.
l
Fire Protection: There must not be any dangerous goods such as inflammable substances or explosives at the location where the chassis is mounted. There should be portable fire extinguishers within a certain distance, for use when a fire occurs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide l
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
AC Power: –
Rated voltage: 220 V AC
–
Operating range: 150 V AC to 300 V AC
–
Frequency: 50 Hz ± 10%
–
Voltage waveform distortion factor: below 5%
3.3 Installing the Chassis This section describes how to install the OptiX 155/622H integrated wall-mounting chassis. 3.3.1 Locating Installation Holes of the Chassis This section describes how to position the holes for installing the chassis. 3.3.2 Installing the Expansion Bolts This section describes how to install the expansion bolts. 3.3.3 Installing Mounting Parts This section describes how to install the mounting parts. 3.3.4 Fixing the Chassis This section describes how to fix the chassis. 3.3.5 Installing the Handle Install the handle of the OptiX 155/622H so that you can easily remove/insert the OptiX 155/622H from/into the chassis. 3.3.6 Assembling the Chassis There are two frames in the chassis. The frame close to the wall is used to house the storage battery. The frame away from the wall is used to house the OptiX 155/622H and the UPM power box. 3.3.7 Installing and Routing the Cables This section describes how to install and route the cables of an integrated wall-mounting chassis. 3.3.8 Installation Result See the wall-mounting result diagram and check whether the equipment is properly installed.
3.3.1 Locating Installation Holes of the Chassis This section describes how to position the holes for installing the chassis.
Prerequisite The chassis and relevant accessories must be delivered to the installation site.
Tools/Instruments l
General tools
l
Installation template used to position the holes for installing the chassis
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Procedure Step 1 Determine the location for the installation. There should be 350 mm clearance above the top of the chassis. Thus, you can remove certain parts easily during future maintenance operations of the storage battery. See Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 Allowing 350 mm clearance above the chassis
350 mm
Step 2 Place the installation template on the location in a flat position. Mark the locations of the installation holes, as shown in Figure 3-3.
3-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Figure 3-3 Determining the locations for the installation holes
m 8m 35
513 mm
Step 3 Remove the template. Use a Ф10 drill bit. Drill four installation holes with a percussion drill. The holes must be 72 mm to 80 mm deep at the marked locations. ----End
3.3.2 Installing the Expansion Bolts This section describes how to install the expansion bolts.
Prerequisite The holes for installing the chassis must be positioned.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials Four M8x80 expansion bolts
Procedure Step 1 Clear the dusts from the interior and exterior of the installation holes. Figure 3-4 shows the expansion bolt assembly. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-5
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 3-4 Expansion bolt assembly 1 2 3
4
6 5
7
1. M8x80 expansion bolt 2. Spring washer 5. Expansion nut
3. Flat washer
4. Expansion tube
6. Guide slot on expansion tube 7. Guide rib on expansion nut
Step 2 Insert the guide rib on the expansion nut into the guide slot on the expansion tube. Step 3 Insert the expansion bolt assembly vertically into the hole, as shown in Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5 Putting the expansion bolt assembly into the hole
Step 4 Drive the expansion bolt assembly completely into the floor with a hammer, for example, a claw hammer. Step 5 Loose the bolt. Then remove the bolt, the spring washer and the flat washer, as shown in Figure 3-6.
3-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Figure 3-6 Removing the bolt assembly
Step 6 Repeat Steps 2-5 to install the other three expansion bolt assemblies. ----End
3.3.3 Installing Mounting Parts This section describes how to install the mounting parts. Secure the four mounting parts onto the chassis with eight M5 bolts, as shown in Figure 3-7.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-7
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 3-7 Securing the hangers
3.3.4 Fixing the Chassis This section describes how to fix the chassis.
Prerequisite The mounting parts must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Procedure Step 1 Align the expansion bolts to the installation holes. Mount the chassis to the wall, as shown in Figure 3-8. Step 2 Press the chassis downward, until the expansion bolts touch the upper parts of the installation holes, as shown in Figure 3-8. Step 3 Fix the chassis to the wall with flat washers, spring washers and nuts, as shown in Figure 3-8.
3-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Figure 3-8 Fixing the chassis
----End
3.3.5 Installing the Handle Install the handle of the OptiX 155/622H so that you can easily remove/insert the OptiX 155/622H from/into the chassis.
Prerequisite The chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials Handle of the OptiX 155/622H chassis
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-9
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Procedure Step 1 Remove the screws on the left and right sides of the OptiX 155/622H. Step 2 Align the positioning holes of the handle to the screw holes on the side of the chassis. Fix the handle to the side of the chassis with the screws, as shown in Figure 3-9. Figure 3-9 Fixing the handle
----End
3.3.6 Assembling the Chassis There are two frames in the chassis. The frame close to the wall is used to house the storage battery. The frame away from the wall is used to house the OptiX 155/622H and the UPM power box.
Prerequisite The chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials
3-10
l
Storage battery
l
UPM power box
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Context
CAUTION l
Take out the UPM power box first and then remove the OptiX 155/622H.
l
Place the storage battery, OptiX 155/622H, and UPM power box into the chassis. You need not secure them in the chassis.
l
Ensure that the storage battery, OptiX 155/622H, and the –48 V power interface of the UPM power box face upward, close to the right side of the chassis.
Procedure Step 1 Insert the storage battery into the frame of the chassis that is close to the wall. Step 2 Insert the OptiX 155/622H into the frame of the chassis away from the wall. Note that the board area should face upward. Step 3 Insert the UPM into the chassis. Ensure that it is close to the OptiX 155/622H. Note that the interface area faces upward and that the 220 V power interface should be close to the left side of the chassis. Step 4 Figure 3-10 shows the installation result of the chassis on the wall. Figure 3-10 Installation result Cabling hole UPM Storage battery
Handle
OptiX 155/622H
OptiX 155/622H
Right leading-out hole
Left leading-out hole
----End
3.3.7 Installing and Routing the Cables This section describes how to install and route the cables of an integrated wall-mounting chassis. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Prerequisite The chassis must be assembled.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
–48 V power cable
l
220 V power cable
l
Fiber jumper
l
Corrugated pipe NOTE
When fiber jumpers need be routed outside the cabinet, a corrugated pipe or winding pipe is required. Each corrugated pipe can house 12 to 15 fiber jumpers. Cut the corrugated pipe according to the routing distance between the cabinet and the ODF.
Procedure Step 1 See Figure 3-11, and connect the storage battery to the –48 V power cable of the UPM power system. This power cable is placed through the cabling hole within the chassis. Figure 3-11 Connecting the cables of the UPM OptiX 155/622H IU3
IU2
IU1
IU4 SCB
Power cable of load 1
COM2
Power cable of load 2 Communication cable
UPM RS232
Storage battery cable
Storage battery -48VDC
Step 2 Connect the –48 V power cable from the UPM power box to the OptiX 155/622H. See Figure 3-11. Step 3 Connect the 220 V power cable of the UPM power box. This power cable is led out through the left leading-out hole on the top cover of the chassis. 3-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
Step 4 The fiber jumpers on the OptiX 155/622H are led out through the left leading-out hole on the top cover of the chassis. Note that the led-out fiber jumpers should be covered with the corrugated pipe and should not be bundled with the power cable. Step 5 The cables of the OptiX 155/622H are led out through the right leading-out hole on the top cover of the chassis. Step 6 After the above actions are done, close the top cover of the chassis and lock it. Keep the key in a proper place for use in future maintenance. ----End
3.3.8 Installation Result See the wall-mounting result diagram and check whether the equipment is properly installed. Figure 3-12 shows the integrated wall-mounted OptiX 155/622H chassis. Figure 3-12 Wall-mounted OptiX 155/622H chassis
3.4 Checking the Installation After the chassis is installed, check whether the installation is properly complete. The following requirements should be met when the chassis installation is complete: l
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
The position for installing the chassis must comply with the engineering design file. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-13
3 Installing an Integrated Wall-Mounting Chassis
3-14
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
l
The chassis must be firmly secured, and the installation of the chassis must comply with the shockproof requirements stated in the engineering design file.
l
The storage battery, UPM power system, and OptiX 155/622H case must be installed in the proper positions and in the correct directions.
l
The top cover of the chassis must be properly closed and locked.
l
The equipment room must be clean and tidy. The items such as scrapped packaging cases must be disposed of. Place the spare installation parts in order.
l
Keep the antistatic bags of the boards in a proper place for future use.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Installing the UPM Power System
About This Chapter The UPM power conversion system is used to convert the 110 V/220 V AC power into the –48 V DC power, and thus feed power to the OptiX 155/622H. The UPM power system consists of the power box and storage battery. 4.1 About the UPM Power System The UPM power system (hereinafter referred to as UPM) consists of the power box and storage battery. 4.2 Installing the Storage Battery and Power Box This section describes how to install the storage battery and power box into the cabinet. 4.3 Installing the UPM Power Cables This section describes how to install the UPM power cables and serial cables in the cabinet. 4.4 Checking the Installation After the UPM system is installed, check the installation to ensure that the equipment is properly installed.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
4.1 About the UPM Power System The UPM power system (hereinafter referred to as UPM) consists of the power box and storage battery. 4.1.1 Power Box The dimensions of the power box are 438 mm (W) x 240 mm (D) x 44 mm (H). The model of the power box is GIE4805S. 4.1.2 Storage Battery The battery can be installed in the storage battery pallet or storage battery box. 4.1.3 Installation Mode This section describes the installation mode of the UPM system.
4.1.1 Power Box The dimensions of the power box are 438 mm (W) x 240 mm (D) x 44 mm (H). The model of the power box is GIE4805S.
Appearance Figure 4-1 shows the front view of the power box. Figure 4-2 shows the rear view of the power box. The power box can output two –48 V power supplies. The output power of each power supply is 270 W. Figure 4-1 Front view of the power box
4 GIE
4-2
5S 80
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-2 Rear view of the power box 5
4 AC100~240
RUN ALM Vout
ALM
ALM Vout RS232
1
2
3
6
7
1. AC power input interface
2. Rectifier module
3. Monitoring module
4. Management interface
5. Interface for storage battery
6. –48 V power input interface
7. –48 V power output interface
Indicators Table 4-1 provides the descriptions of the indicators of the power box. Table 4-1 Description of the Indicators Module
Indicat or
Status
Description
Rectifier module
ALM
On (red)
The rectifier module is faulty. The ALM indicator should be off when the rectifier module is normal.
Vout
On (green)
The output of the rectifier module is normal.
RUN
Flash (green)
The entire power system is normal.
ALM
On (red)
The entire power system is faulty. The ALM indicator should be off when the entire power system is normal.
Monitorin g module
Management Interface The management interface of the power box adopts the DB9 connector, of which the pin definitions are defined as listed in Table 4-2. Table 4-2 Pin definitions of the management interface
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Pin
Definition
1
-
2
RS232 RX
3
RS232 TX
4
-
5
RS232 GND Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Pin
Definition
6
Battery discharge undervoltage alarm
7
AC power input failure alarm
8
Common grounding point
9
The rectifier module is faulty.
Cables The cables at the interfaces of the power box are the power cable and management cable. Figure 4-3 shows the power cable and management cable. Figure 4-3 Power cable and management cable
a
b
a. Power cable
b. Management cable
4.1.2 Storage Battery The battery can be installed in the storage battery pallet or storage battery box. The dimensions of the storage battery pallet are 436 mm (W) x 173.5 mm (D) x 125 mm (H). The appearance of the storage battery pallet is shown in Figure 4-4. Install the storage battery pallet before using it. Place the storage battery in the storage battery pallet.
4-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-4 Storage battery pallet
Partition bar
Ear brackct
The dimensions of the storage battery box are 436 mm (W) x 315 mm (D) x 133 mm (H). The appearance of the storage battery box is shown in Figure 4-5. Figure 4-5 Storage battery box
CAUTION l
Ensure that the storage battery box is stable. Ensure that the battery box is in the upright position (check the direction of the symbols on the storage battery box ).
l
The environment must be suitably dry and cool, with a temperature ranging between 10℃ and 35℃. These are very important factors that affect the life cycle of the batteries inside.
4.1.3 Installation Mode This section describes the installation mode of the UPM system. The UPM system can be installed: Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System l
In a standard 19-inch cabinet
l
In a 600 mm-deep ETSI cabinet
l
In a 300 mm-deep ETSI cabinet
l
On the wall
4.2 Installing the Storage Battery and Power Box This section describes how to install the storage battery and power box into the cabinet.
WARNING Take the following precautions when installing the storage battery: l
The storage battery should be installed in a place more than 0.5 meter far from the heat source and the places where sparkles always occur.
l
The storage battery should be erected at the bottom of the cabinet.
l
Use insulation tools and wear ESD gloves and protective glasses when installing the storage battery.
CAUTION l
Before the installation, clean the connecting bar. Abrade the between the terminal and the connecting bar with the abrasive paper until metallic luster appears.
l
The storage battery can be stored at a temperature ranging from –15℃ to +40℃ for not more than six months before it is installed. If the storage battery has been stored for more than six months, it needs to be recharged before the installation.
4.2.1 Installing the Storage Batteries The storage batteries can installed in the storage battery pallet or the storage battery box. This section describes how to install the storage batteries into the cabinet by using the pallet. 4.2.2 Installing the Power Box in a 19-Inch Cabinet or an ETSI Cabinet This section describes how to install the UPM power box in a 19-inch cabinet. The method for installing the UPM power box in an ETSI cabinet is the same as the method for installing the UPM power box in a 19-inch cabinet, except for the different mounting angles of the power box and storage battery pallet. 4.2.3 Installing the Power Box on the Wall When the UPM power system needs to be installed on the wall, the storage batteries are placed directly on the floor near the power box. This section describes how to install the power box on the wall.
4.2.1 Installing the Storage Batteries The storage batteries can installed in the storage battery pallet or the storage battery box. This section describes how to install the storage batteries into the cabinet by using the pallet. 4-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Prerequisite The cabinet and chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Pallet
l
Four screws
Required/As Needed Required
Context NOTE
If the storage battery box is adopted, it can be placed beside the cabinet.
Procedure Step 1 Check if the partition bars are removed from the battery board. In addition, ensure the following: l
If the 20 AH battery is adopted, remove the two partition bars from the pallet, as shown in Figure 4-6.
l
If the 12 AH battery is adopted, do not remove the partition bars.
Figure 4-6 The pallet removed two partition bars
Step 2 Secure the ears on both sides of the pallet. Step 3 Fix the pallet in the cabinet with four captive screws. Step 4 Refer to Figure 4-7 to fix the storage batteries in the pallet. The connecting terminal of the battery should be away from the ear brackets of the pallet. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-7 Batteries installed in the pallet
----End
4.2.2 Installing the Power Box in a 19-Inch Cabinet or an ETSI Cabinet This section describes how to install the UPM power box in a 19-inch cabinet. The method for installing the UPM power box in an ETSI cabinet is the same as the method for installing the UPM power box in a 19-inch cabinet, except for the different mounting angles of the power box and storage battery pallet.
Prerequisite The cabinet and chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Mounting ears
l
Four M3 screws
l
Four screws
Required/As Needed When the 110 V/220 V power needs to be directly accessed, the UPM power box needs to be installed.
Procedure Step 1 See Figure 4-8 to fix the mounting ears to the power box with four M3 screws.
4-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-8 Installing the mounting ears (in a 19-inch cabinet)
NOTE
Figure 4-9 shows the mounting ears installed on the UPM power box in an ETSI cabinet. Figure 4-9 Installing the mounting ears (in an ETSI cabinet)
Step 2 Fix the power box in the cabinet with four captive screws, as shown in Figure 4-10.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-9
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-10 Installing the power box
----End
4.2.3 Installing the Power Box on the Wall When the UPM power system needs to be installed on the wall, the storage batteries are placed directly on the floor near the power box. This section describes how to install the power box on the wall.
Prerequisite The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Suspension bracket
l
Four expansion bolts
Required/As Needed When the 110 V/220 V power needs to be directly accessed, the UPM power box needs to be installed.
Procedure Step 1 Select a place on the wall that is suitable of installing the power box. Step 2 Fix the suspension bracket on the wall. Mark four mounting holes on the wall with a pencil. Step 3 Remove the suspension bracket. Drill four 12 holes at the marked place, with the depths of 52 mm to 60 mm. 4-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Step 4 Insert an expansion bolt and an expansion tube into each hole, as shown in Figure 4-11. Figure 4-11 Installing the expansion bolt and expansion tube
Expansion tube Expansion bolt
Step 5 Fix the power box on the suspension bracket through the four mounting holes at the bottom of the power box, as shown in Figure 4-12. Figure 4-12 Securing the OptiX 155/622H chassis
Step 6 Use the nut and the expansion bolt to tighten the suspension bracket with the power box on the wall, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-11
4 Installing the UPM Power System
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 4-13 Fixing the suspension bracket
Flat washer Spring gasket Nut
----End
4.3 Installing the UPM Power Cables This section describes how to install the UPM power cables and serial cables in the cabinet.
Prerequisite The UPM system and the OptiX 155/622H chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
4-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Context
DANGER l
If the power terminals on the power box need not be used, cover the terminals with insulating caps.
l
Cut off the AC power, and ensure that the return circuits of the batteries are in the off state. Do not operate the equipment with power on.
l
The anode and cathode of the batteries must correspond to the positive and negative poles of the BAT interface of the power conversion box. Otherwise, the power device may be damaged.
Procedure Step 1 Use the power cable to connect the power input port on the upper right side of the OptiX 155/622H to the LOAD2 power output port on the power box, as shown in Figure 4-15. Figure 4-14 shows how to connect the DC power to the system. Figure 4-14 Connecting the DC power to the system BAT Battery + Battery Load + Load LOAD1
LOAD2
Step 2 Use the power cable to connect the power input port on the lower right side of the OptiX 155/622H to the LOAD2 power output port on the power box, as shown in Figure 4-15. Step 3 Use the power cable to connect the BAT power output port on the power box to the storage battery, as shown in Figure 4-15. Select the proper cable type according to the battery model.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-13
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
Figure 4-15 Cable connection of the integrated wall-mounting cabinet OptiX 155/622H IU3
IU2
IU1
IU4 SCB
Power cable of load 1
COM2
Power cable of load 2 Communication cable
UPM RS232
Storage battery cable
Storage battery -48VDC
Step 4 Use the serial cable to connect the RS232 interface on the power box to the COM2 interface on the SCB board of the OptiX 155/622H, thus to implement the monitoring of the storage batteries and power box. Step 5 Use the AC power cable to connect the power box to the AC power supply device. ----End
4.4 Checking the Installation After the UPM system is installed, check the installation to ensure that the equipment is properly installed. The following installation requirements must be met:
4-14
l
The storage batteries must be installed in a place more than 0.5 meter far from the heat source and the places where sparkles always occur.
l
The storage batteries must be erected at the bottom of the cabinet.
l
The horizontal distance between the batteries must be more than 10 mm.
l
The bolts, nuts, and connection bars must be firmly secured or screwed to a torque ranging from 15 N.m to 30 N.m. Excessive force may damage the terminals.
l
The storage batteries must be installed in the environment free of direct sunlight, mass radioactive, infrared, and ultraviolet radiation, organic solvent gas, and corrosive gas.
l
The batteries are placed in a cool, clean, and dry place with proper ventilation.
l
The batteries must not be short-circuited.
l
The batteries must not be thrown into fire or heated.
l
Non-professional personnel must not disassemble, maintain or dissect the batteries.
l
The batteries must not be used or charged in the equipment that is completely sealed.
l
The air exhaust vents must not be blocked by any items. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
4 Installing the UPM Power System
l
The conducting cable must be cut to a length as short as possible to decrease the voltage drop.
l
When the batteries work or before the charging circuit is closed, the system voltage must be normal and the anode and cathode of the batteries must be properly connected.
l
The batteries must not be charged with the anode and cathode reversely connected.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Installing and Routing the Cables
About This Chapter This chapter describes how to install the cables of the OptiX 155/622H. NOTE
Remove the front door and side s of the cabinet before installing the cables of the OptiX 155/622H. Re-install the front door and side s after the cables are installed.
5.1 Installing the PGND Cables This section describes how to install the PGND cables. 5.2 Installing the Power Cable This section describes how to install the power cable. 5.3 Installing the E1/T1 Cables T1 cables are installed in the same method as E1 cables. This section considers the installation of E1 cables as an example to describe how to install E1/T1 cables. 5.4 Installing E3/T3/STM-1e Cables The methods for installing the E3, T3 and STM-1e cables are the same. 5.5 Installing Ethernet Cables This section describes how to install Ethernet cables. 5.6 Installing the Framed E1 Cable This section describes how to install the Framed E1 cable. 5.7 Installing the NM Cable This section describes how to install the network management (NM) cable. 5.8 Installing the External Clock Cable This section describes how to install the external clock cable. 5.9 Installing the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable This section describes how to install the transparent data/housekeeping cable. 5.10 Checking the Cable Installation After the cable is installed, check whether the cable installation is correct.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
5.1 Installing the PGND Cables This section describes how to install the PGND cables. 5.1.1 About the Cables This section describes the PGND cables. 5.1.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the PGND cables.
5.1.1 About the Cables This section describes the PGND cables. Figure 5-1 shows the appearance of the PGND cable. Figure 5-1 PGND cable OT terminal
Label
5.1.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the PGND cables.
Prerequisite The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed in the cabinet.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
PGND cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Context NOTE
Based on the conditions of the project, determine the position of the grounding cable in the equipment room. For the grounding requirements, see Appendix 9 Operation Environment Requirements.
5-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
CAUTION l
The ground cable should be as short as possible and should not be twisted.
l
If the preserved cables are found not long enough for the routing, stop the routing process and replace the cables. Make sure that there is no t or weld point on the cable.
l
Flat washers and spring washers are used for securing the lugs, to provide proper and reliable between the lugs and the grounding point.
Procedure Step 1 Fasten the OT terminal of the PGND cable to the grounding bolt on the OptiX 155/622H. The installation result is as shown in Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2 Installation result of the PGND cable on the equipment side of the OptiX 155/622H
Step 2 Determine the length of the PGND cable according to the distance between the PGND grounding bolt and the protection grounding bar, and cut the redundant section. Step 3 Crimp the OT terminal that matches the protection grounding bar at the connector of the PGND cable. Step 4 Fasten the PGND cable to the protection grounding bar. Step 5 See Appendix 11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling to bind the PGND cable with binding straps. Step 6 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. For the method of making labels, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. ----End
5.2 Installing the Power Cable This section describes how to install the power cable. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
WARNING Do not install or remove the power cable when the equipment is powered on. Before you install or remove the power cable, power off the power supply device in the equipment room to prevent personal injury. 5.2.1 About the Power Cables This section introduces the power cables. 5.2.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the power cable.
5.2.1 About the Power Cables This section introduces the power cables. The -48 V and the +24 V power cable assemblies consist of two cables: the power cable and the BGND cable. One end of the power cable assembly is a 4-pin connector, which is used to connect the power interface of the equipment. The profile of the power cable assembly is as shown in Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3 Power cable Stud
Tag
A-A 31
A
4 2
A
Tag 1
W1 W2 Tag 2
NOTE
Certain –48 V and +24 V power cable assemblies have three cables. That is, a PGND cable is also installed on such power cable assembly.
5.2.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the power cable.
Prerequisite l
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed in the cabinet.
l
The power supply device of the equipment room must be available.
l
The voltage must be within the range from –38.4 V DC to –72 V DC.
Tools/Instruments General tools 5-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Installing Materials l
PGND cable
l
Power cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Context
CAUTION l
Do not install the cable when the equipment is powered on.
l
If the preserved cables are found not long enough for the routing, stop the routing process and replace the cables. Make sure that there is no t or weld point on the cable.
l
The yellow and green short-circuit cable on the connector of the power cable assembly is used to short-circuit the PGND and BGND of the OptiX 155/622H. If the power supply system already has the PGND and BGND short-circuited, you need to cut the yellow and green cable right down to its root.
Procedure Step 1 Plug the connector of the power cable to the power jack of the POI/POU board on the OptiX 155/622H. The installation result is as shown in Figure 5-4. Figure 5-4 Connection of the power cable
Step 2 Connect the other end of the power cable assembly to the corresponding terminals of the DC power distribution box. l
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
When the –48 V/–60 V power is accessed, connect the blue wire to the –48 V/–60 V power terminal and connect the black wire to the power ground. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables l
When the +24 V power is accessed, connect the red wire to the +24 power terminal, and connect the black wire to the power ground.
Step 3 See Appendix 11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling to bundle the power cable with a binding strap. Step 4 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. For the method of making labels, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. ----End
5.3 Installing the E1/T1 Cables T1 cables are installed in the same method as E1 cables. This section considers the installation of E1 cables as an example to describe how to install E1/T1 cables. 5.3.1 About the E1/T1 Cables The E1 cables are available in two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm cables. The T1 cables are available in only one type: 100-ohm cables. The 120-ohm E1 cable can be used to transmit T1 signals. 5.3.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the E1/T1 cables.
5.3.1 About the E1/T1 Cables The E1 cables are available in two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm cables. The T1 cables are available in only one type: 100-ohm cables. The 120-ohm E1 cable can be used to transmit T1 signals.
75-Ohm E1 Cable The 75-ohm E1 cable is terminated with a DB78 connector to transmit 16 E1 signals.Figure 5-5 shows the structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable, and Table 5-1 lists the pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable. Figure 5-5 Structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable
Metal screw
Main label W1 ~ W4
X1
5-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Table 5-1 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable Cabl e
Pin
Signa l
No.
Remar ks
Cable
Pin
Signal
No.
Remar ks
W1
2
Tip
1
R1
W2
4
Tip
1
R5
22
Ring
24
Ring
31
Tip
33
Tip
2
T5
12
Ring
14
Ring
41
Tip
43
Tip
3
R6
61
Ring
63
Ring
70
Tip
72
Tip
4
T6
51
Ring
53
Ring
3
Tip
5
Tip
5
R7
23
Ring
25
Ring
32
Tip
34
Tip
6
T7
13
Ring
15
Ring
42
Tip
44
Tip
7
R8
62
Ring
64
Ring
71
Tip
73
Tip
8
T8
52
Ring
54
Ring
6
Tip
8
Tip
1
R13
26
Ring
28
Ring
35
Tip
37
Tip
2
T13
16
Ring
18
Ring
45
Tip
47
Tip
3
R14
65
Ring
67
Ring
74
Tip
76
Tip
4
T14
55
Ring
57
Ring
7
Tip
9
Tip
5
R15
27
Ring
29
Ring
36
Tip
38
Tip
6
T15
17
Ring
19
Ring
46
Tip
48
Tip
7
R16
W3
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
R4
T4
R9
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
R12
W4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Cabl e
Pin
Signa l
66
Ring
75
Tip
56
Ring
No.
8
Remar ks
Cable
T12
Pin
Signal
68
Ring
77
Tip
58
Ring
No.
Remar ks
8
T16
120/100-Ohm E1/T1 Cable The 120/100-ohm E1 cable is terminated with a DB78 connector to transmit 16 E1/T1 signals. Figure 5-6 shows the structure of the 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable, andTable 5-2 lists the pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable. Figure 5-6 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable Metal screw
Main label W1 ~ W4
X1
Table 5-2 Pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm E1/T1 cable
5-8
Cabl e
Pin
Signa l
No.
Remar ks
Cable
Pin
Signal
No.
Remar ks
W1
2
Blue
1
R1
W2
6
Blue
1
R5
22
White
26
White
41
Orang e
45
Orange
2
T5
61
White
65
White
3
Green
7
Green
3
R6
23
White
27
White
42
Brown
46
Brown
4
T6
62
White
66
White
4
Grey
8
Grey
5
R7
24
White
28
White
43
Blue
47
Blue
6
T7
2
3
4
5
6
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Cabl e
W3
Pin
Signa l
63
Red
5
Orang e
25
Red
44
Green
64
Red
31
Blue
12
White
70
Orang e
51
White
32
Green
13
White
71
Brown
52
White
33
Grey
14
White
72
Blue
53
Red
34
Orang e
15
Red
73
Green
54
Red
No.
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Remar ks
Cable
R4
T4
R9
W4
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
R12
T12
Pin
Signal
67
Red
59
Orange
29
Red
48
Green
68
Red
35
Blue
16
White
71
Orange
55
White
36
Green
17
White
75
Brown
56
White
37
Grey
18
White
76
Blue
57
Red
38
Orange
19
Red
77
Green
58
Red
No.
Remar ks
7
R8
8
T8
1
R13
2
T13
3
R14
4
T14
5
R15
6
T15
7
R16
8
T16
5.3.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the E1/T1 cables.
Prerequisite l
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed.
l
The power cable and PGND cable must be installed.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
E1/T1 cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Procedure Step 1 Measure and cut the cables according to the distance between the cabinet and the DDF. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the cables into the cabinet through the cabling holes on the top of the cabinet. Step 4 Plug the cable connectors into the sockets on the E1 interface board. Take care when plugging the connectors to prevent wrong connection. Figure 5-7. Figure 5-7 Installing the cable with a DB78 connector
NOTE
Use a proper force to plug the cable connector into the interface board. When resistance exists, check the connector. Do not force the connector in; otherwise, the pins may be bent.
Step 5 Tighten the screws. Step 6 Bundle the cables properly with a binding strap. Step 7 Make the E1 cable connector on the DDF side. Step 8 Examine all the E1 cable connectors and make sure that the circuit of each cable runs smoothly. For details, see Appendix 14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector. Step 9 Install and route the cables on the DDF side. 5-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Step 10 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 11 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 12 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End
5.4 Installing E3/T3/STM-1e Cables The methods for installing the E3, T3 and STM-1e cables are the same. 5.4.1 About the E3/T3/STM-1e Cables The E3/T3/STM-1e cables are 75-ohm high-frequency signal cables that are terminated with SMB coaxial connectors. 5.4.2 Installation Procedures This section considers the installation of the STM-1e cable as an example to describe how to install E3/T3/STM-1e cables.
5.4.1 About the E3/T3/STM-1e Cables The E3/T3/STM-1e cables are 75-ohm high-frequency signal cables that are terminated with SMB coaxial connectors. Figure 5-8 shows the SMB connector. Figure 5-8 E3/T3/STM-1e cable
SMB connector
5.4.2 Installation Procedures This section considers the installation of the STM-1e cable as an example to describe how to install E3/T3/STM-1e cables.
Prerequisite l
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed.
l
The power cable and PGND cable must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Installing Materials l
E3/T3/STM-1e cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Procedure Step 1 Measure and cut the cables according to the distance between the cabinet and the DDF. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the cables into the cabinet through the cabling holes on the top of the cabinet. Step 4 Connect the cable connector to the SMB interface on the STM-1 electrical interface board. Step 5 Bundle the cables properly with a binding strap. Step 6 Build up the E1 cable connector on the DDF side. For details, see Appendix 14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector. Step 7 Check the connectors of all the STM-1 cables to ensure that there is no short circuit or open circuit in the cables. For the detailed methods of checking the cables, see Appendix 14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector. Step 8 Install and route the cables on the DDF side. Step 9 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 10 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 11 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End
5.5 Installing Ethernet Cables This section describes how to install Ethernet cables. 5.5.1 About the Ethernet Cable In of the structure, the Ethernet cable is an 8-core category-5 twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors on both ends. 5.5.2 Installing Procedures This section describes how to install Ethernet cables.
5.5.1 About the Ethernet Cable In of the structure, the Ethernet cable is an 8-core category-5 twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors on both ends. Figure 5-9 shows the connector of the Ethernet cable.
5-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Figure 5-9 Connector of the Ethernet cable PIN #8 PIN #1
RJ-45 connector
The Ethernet cables are available in two types: the straight-through cable and crossover cable. The straight-through cable and the crossover cable differ in the connection relation but have the same structure. The connection of the straight-through cable is provided in Table 5-3. Table 5-3 Connection relation of the straight-through cable Connector X1
8-Core Category-5 Twisted Pair
Connector X2
Pin 1
White (orange)
Pin 1
Pin 2
Orange
Pin 2
Pin 3
White (green)
Pin 3
Pin 4
Blue
Pin 4
Pin 5
White (blue)
Pin 5
Pin 6
Green
Pin 6
Pin 7
White (brown)
Pin 7
Pin 8
Brown
Pin 8
The connection relation of the crossover cable is provided in Table 5-4. Table 5-4 Connection relation of the crossover cable
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Connector X1
8-Core Category-5 Twisted Pair
Connector X2
Pin 1
White (orange)
Pin 3
Pin 2
Orange
Pin 6
Pin 3
White (green)
Pin 1
Pin 4
Blue
Pin 4
Pin 5
White (blue)
Pin 5
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-13
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Connector X1
8-Core Category-5 Twisted Pair
Connector X2
Pin 6
Green
Pin 2
Pin 7
White (brown)
Pin 7
Pin 8
Brown
Pin 8
5.5.2 Installing Procedures This section describes how to install Ethernet cables.
Prerequisite l
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed.
l
The power cable and PGND cable must be installed.
l
The Ethernet equipment must be properly installed in the equipment room, and the relevant interfaces must be reserved.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Ethernet cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Procedure Step 1 Cut a length of network cable according to the distance between the cabinet and the Ethernet equipment. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the Ethernet signal cable into the cabinet through the cabling hole for signal cables. Step 4 Connect the Ethernet cable that is routed into the cabinet to the RJ-45 interface on the Ethernet access board. Step 5 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the interface of the Ethernet equipment. Step 6 Properly bundle the Ethernet cables. Step 7 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 8 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 9 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End 5-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
5.6 Installing the Framed E1 Cable This section describes how to install the Framed E1 cable. 5.6.1 About the Framed E1 Cable The Framed E1 interface on the FP2D board adopts the DB78 connector and can transmit 16 Framed E1 signals. 5.6.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the Framed E1 cable.
5.6.1 About the Framed E1 Cable The Framed E1 interface on the FP2D board adopts the DB78 connector and can transmit 16 Framed E1 signals. The Framed E1 cables are available in two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm cables. Figure 5-10 shows the Framed E1 cable. Figure 5-10 Framed E1 cable on the FP2D board Metal screw
Main tag
View A W3 W4 A
W1 W2
X1
Table 5-5 provides the pin assignment relations of the 75-ohm Framed E1 cable. Table 5-5 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm Framed E1 cable
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Cabl e
Pin
Core
Seria l Num ber
Remar ks
Cabl e
Pin
Core
Seria l Num ber
Remar ks
W1
2
Tip
1
R1
W2
4
Tip
1
R5
22
Ring
24
Ring
31
Tip
33
Tip
2
T5
12
Ring
14
Ring
41
Tip
43
Tip
3
R6
2
3
T1
R2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Cabl e
W3
5-16
Pin
Core
61
Ring
70
Tip
51
Ring
3
Tip
23
Ring
32
Tip
13
Ring
42
Tip
62
Ring
71
Tip
52
Ring
6
Tip
26
Ring
35
Tip
16
Ring
45
Tip
65
Ring
74
Tip
55
Ring
7
Tip
27
Ring
36
Tip
17
Ring
46
Tip
66
Ring
75
Tip
56
Ring
Seria l Num ber
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Remar ks
Cabl e
T2
R3
T3
R4
T4
R9
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
R12
T12
W4
Pin
Core
63
Ring
72
Tip
53
Ring
5
Tip
25
Ring
34
Tip
15
Ring
44
Tip
64
Ring
73
Tip
54
Ring
8
Tip
28
Ring
37
Tip
18
Ring
47
Tip
67
Ring
76
Tip
57
Ring
9
Tip
29
Ring
38
Tip
19
Ring
48
Tip
68
Ring
77
Tip
58
Ring
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Seria l Num ber
Remar ks
4
T6
5
R7
6
T7
7
R8
8
T8
1
R13
2
T13
3
R14
4
T14
5
R15
6
T15
7
R16
8
T16
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Table 5-6 provides the pin assignment relations of the 120-ohm Framed E1 cable. Table 5-6 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm Framed E1 cable Cabl e
Pin
Core
Seria l Num ber
Rem arks
Cab le
Pin
Core
Seri al Nu mbe r
Rema rks
W1
2
Blue
1
R1
W2
6
Blue
1
R9
22
White
26
White
41
Orang e
45
Orang e
2
R10
61
White
65
White
3
Green
7
Green
3
R11
23
White
27
White
42
Brow n
46
Grow n
4
R12
62
White
66
White
4
Grey
8
Grey
5
R13
24
White
28
White
43
Blue
47
Blue
6
R14
63
Red
67
Red
5
Orang e
59
Orang e
7
R15
25
Red
29
Red
44
Green
48
Green
8
R16
64
Red
68
Red
31
Blue
35
Blue
1
T9
12
White
16
White
70
Orang e
74
Orang e
2
T10
51
White
55
White
32
Green
36
Green
3
T11
13
White
17
White
71
Grow n
75
Brow n
4
T12
W3
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
T1
T2
T3
T4
W4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-17
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Cabl e
Pin
Core
52
White
33
Grey
14
White
72
Blue
53
Red
34
Orang e
15
Red
73
Green
54
Red
Seria l Num ber
5
6
7
8
Rem arks
Cab le
T5
T6
T7
T8
Pin
Core
56
White
37
Grey
18
White
76
Blue
57
Red
38
Orang e
19
Red
77
Green
58
Red
Seri al Nu mbe r
Rema rks
5
T13
6
T14
7
T15
8
T16
5.6.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the Framed E1 cable.
Prerequisite l
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed.
l
The power cable and PGND cable must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Framed E1 cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Procedure Step 1 Measure and cut the cables according to the distance between the cabinet and the DDF. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the cables along the cabling trough and then into the cabinet through the cabling hole for signal cables. 5-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Step 4 Plug the cable connectors into the sockets on the FP2D board. The installation process is as shown in Figure 5-11. Figure 5-11 Installing the Framed E1 cable
Step 5 Bundle the cables properly with a binding strap. Step 6 Make the connector for the Framed E1 cable on the DDF side. For details, see Appendix 14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector. Step 7 Check all the cable connectors to ensure that there is no short-circuit or open circuit in the cables. For details, see Appendix 14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector. Step 8 Install and route the cables on the DDF side. Step 9 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 10 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 11 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End
5.7 Installing the NM Cable This section describes how to install the network management (NM) cable. 5.7.1 About the NM Cable The network cable is available in two types: crossover cable and straight-through cable. Either crossover cable or straight-through cable can be used as the NM cable. 5.7.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the NM cable in the upward cabling mode. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-19
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
5.7.1 About the NM Cable The network cable is available in two types: crossover cable and straight-through cable. Either crossover cable or straight-through cable can be used as the NM cable.
Network Cable The network cable adopts the RJ-45 connectors. Figure 5-12 shows the standard shielded network cable. Figure 5-12 Standard shielded network cable
The pin assignment information of the straight-through cable is provided in Table 5-3. The pin assignment information of the crossover cable is provided in Table 5-4.
NM Interface The NM interface exists on the SCB board, as shown in Figure 5-13. Figure 5-13 Position of the NM interface on the SCB board
ETHERNET
SYNC 1/2
COM2
COM3
COM4(F3)
F2
RUN
1
2
PHONE
CRT RST
ALM OUT1 MODEM(F)
OUT2
IN1/2
IN3/4
SCB NM interface
5.7.2 Installation Procedures This section describes how to install the NM cable in the upward cabling mode.
Prerequisite The NMS must be installed, and the required NM interface must be available.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials
5-20
l
Network cable
l
Label
l
Binding strap Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Procedure Step 1 Cut a length of network cable according to the distance between the cabinet and the NM computer. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the NM cable into the cabinet through the cabling hole for signal cables. Step 4 Run the NM cable along the side and then route the NM cable into the cabinet. Step 5 Run the NM cable along the cabling trough, and plug the cable connector into the ETHERNET interface on the SCB board, as shown in Figure 5-14. Figure 5-14 Installing the NM cable
Step 6 Bundle the NM cable with a binding strap. Step 7 Connect the NM cable to the NM computer. Step 8 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 9 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 10 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End
5.8 Installing the External Clock Cable This section describes how to install the external clock cable. 5.8.1 About the External Clock Cable The external clock cable is used to input and output external clock signals. 5.8.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to route and install the external clock cable between the OptiX 155/622H chassis and the external equipment. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-21
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
5.8.1 About the External Clock Cable The external clock cable is used to input and output external clock signals. This 120-ohm cable uses an RJ-45 connector at one end. The RJ-45 connector is connected to the SYNC 1/2 external clock input or output interface of the SCB board. This cable also uses another connector (of a type as actually required) at the other end to connect to the external equipment, as shown in Figure 5-15. Figure 5-15 Structure of the external clock cable A-A 8 1
1
2
A
X1
1. Interface connector – RJ-45
2. Main label
A-A: Sectional view in direction A
Table 5-7 provides the pin assignment information of the SYNC 1/2 external clock interface. Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the SYNC 1/2 external clock interface Pin Number
Definition
Function
1
EXT1R+
Input of the first external clock
2
EXT1R-
4
EXT1T+
5
EXT1T-
3
EXT2R+
6
EXT2R-
7
EXT2T+
8
EXT2T-
output of the first external clock
Input of the second external clock
Output of the second external clock
5.8.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to route and install the external clock cable between the OptiX 155/622H chassis and the external equipment. 5-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Prerequisite The clock input/output equipment must be properly installed in the equipment room, and the required interface must be available.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
External clock cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Required/As Needed In the upward cabling mode, do as follows to install the external clock cable:
Procedure Step 1 Measure and cut the external clock cable according to the distance between the cabinet and other equipment, and make the cable connectors. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the clock cable into the cabinet through the cabling hole for signal cables. Step 4 Plug the connector of the clock cable into the SYNC 1/2 interface on the SCB board. Step 5 Bundle the clock cable properly with a binding strap. Step 6 Connect the other end of the clock cable to other equipment. Step 7 Remove the temporary labels from the cables. Step 8 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 9 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. ----End
5.9 Installing the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable This section describes how to install the transparent data/housekeeping cable. 5.9.1 About the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable The transparent data/housekeeping cable is used to transport transparent data/housekeeping signals. 5.9.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to install the transparent data/housekeeping cable. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-23
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
5.9.1 About the Transparent Data/Housekeeping Cable The transparent data/housekeeping cable is used to transport transparent data/housekeeping signals. One end of the cable is an RJ-45 connector that connects to one of the four transparent data and housekeeping interfaces on the SCB board. The other end of the cable connects to the external equipment or the centralized alarm system. The connector of this end must be made when required on site. Figure 5-16 shows the structure of the transparent data/housekeeping cable. Figure 5-16 Structure of the transparent data/housekeeping cable A-A 8 1
1
2
A
X1
1. Interface connector – RJ-45
2. Main label
A-A: Sectional view in direction A
The transparent data/housekeeping cable is connected to the transparent data and housekeeping interface. The first transparent data and housekeeping interface on the left of the SCB board integrates the COM2 and ALM OUT1/MODEM (F)interfaces. Table 5-8 provides the pin assignment information of the interface that integrates the COM2 and ALM OUT1/MODEM (F) interfaces. Table 5-8 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM2 and ALM OUT1/ MODEM (F) interfaces
5-24
Pin Number
Definition
Function
1
RS232_DTR_O
DTR signal of a modem
2
HDD_RXD0_O
Receiving transparent broadcast data (X1 byte)
3
HDD_TXD0_O
Transmitting transparent broadcast data (X1 byte)
4
PGND
Signal ground
5
RS232_RXD_O
Receiving data at the commissioning serial port/X.25 interface
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Pin Number
Definition
Function
6
RS232_TXD_O
Transmitting data at the commissioning serial port/X.25 interface
7
K1OUTA
Alarm output 1
8
K1OUTB
The second transparent data and housekeeping interface on the left of the SCB board integrates the COM3 and OUT2 interfaces. Table 5-9 provides the pin assignment information of the interface that integrates the COM3 and OUT2 interfaces. Table 5-9 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM3 and OUT2 interfaces Pin Number
Definition
Function
1
PGND
Signal ground
2
HDD_RXD1_O
Receiving transparent broadcast data (X2 byte)
3
HDD_TXD1_O
Transmitting transparent broadcast data (X2 byte)
4
PGND
Signal ground
5
F_RX_O
Extended serial port input
6
F_TX_O
Extended serial port output
7
K2OUTA
Alarm output 2
8
K2OUTB
The third transparent data and housekeeping interface on the left of the SCB board integrates the COM4 (F3) and IN1/2 interfaces. Table 5-10 provides the pin assignment information of the interface that integrates the COM4 (F3) and IN1/2 interfaces. Table 5-10 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the COM4 (F3) and IN1/2 interfaces
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Pin Number
Definition
Function
1
PGND
Signal ground
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-25
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
Pin Number
Definition
Function
2
HDD_RXD2_O
Receiving transparent broadcast data (X3 byte)
3
HDD_TXD2_O
Transmitting transparent broadcast data (X3 byte)
4
PGND
Signal ground
5
KGIN_1
Alarm input 1
6
KGINGND_1
7
KGIN_2
8
KGINGND_2
Alarm input 2
The forth transparent data and housekeeping interface on the left of the SCB board integrates the F2 and IN3/4 interfaces. Table 5-11 provides the pin assignment information of the interface that integrates the F2 and IN3/4 interfaces. Table 5-11 Pin assignment information of the interface integrating the F2 and IN3/4 interfaces Pin Number
Definition
Function
1
PGND
Signal ground
2
HDD_RXD3_O
Receiving transparent broadcast data (X4 byte))
3
HDD_TXD3_O
Transmitting transparent broadcast data (X4 byte)
4
PGND
Signal ground
5
KGIN_3
Alarm input 3
6
KGINGND_3
7
KGIN_4
8
KGINGND_4
Alarm input 4
5.9.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to install the transparent data/housekeeping cable.
Prerequisite l
5-26
The OptiX 155/622H chassis must be properly installed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide l
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
The power cable and PGND cable must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Transparent data cable
l
Housekeeping cable
l
Binding strap
l
Label
Procedure Step 1 Measure and cut the transparent data/housekeeping cable according to the distance from the cabinet to the alarm monitor in the equipment room. Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cables. Step 3 Route the cable into the cabinet through the cabling hole for signal cables. Step 4 Connect the cable to the alarm output interface on the SCB board. Plug the cable connector into the socket on the board. When you hear a click sound, the cable is properly connected. See Figure 5-17. Figure 5-17 Installing transparent data/housekeeping cable
Step 5 Bundle the transparent data/housekeeping cable properly with a binding strap. Step 6 Remove the temporary labels on the cables. Step 7 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-27
5 Installing and Routing the Cables
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Step 8 Attach the cable labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. Ensure that the rectangular text area of the label faces rightward or downward. ----End
5.10 Checking the Cable Installation After the cable is installed, check whether the cable installation is correct. The following requirements must be met when the cable installation is completed:
5-28
l
All the cables must be bound with proper tightness. The spacing between the cable ties must be even, and the remaining parts of the cable ties must be cut off neatly. All cable ties must face the same direction, thus keeping the overall appearance nice.
l
All cables must be arranged smoothly, with no roundabout twists or turns.
l
When a trough is used for cabling outside the cabinet, the cables must not overflow the trough.
l
Cables must be secured on the beam of the cabling frame, if such a cabling frame is used for cabling. The cables must be bound neatly in rectangle shape (or in circular shape when the cables are single-cored).
l
If required, the cables must be bent in a radius as large as possible. The cables must not be bound where they are bent.
l
The –48 V power cable must be blue and be connected to the NEG (–) power terminal. The –48 V grounding cable must be black and be connected to the RTN (+) power terminal. The +24 V power cable must be red and be connected to the RTN (+) power terminal. The PGND cable must be yellowish green or yellow.
l
The power cables must be connected correctly and firmly.
l
The diameter of the power cables must meet the power distribution requirements.
l
The external power cables must be arranged separately from signal cables, with a space of more than 3 cm.
l
The power cables must be bent smoothly.
l
The power cables must be made of an entire piece of copper core, without any t in the middle.
l
Labels for the power cables must be filled in and affixed to the cables as required. All labels must be neat and face the same direction.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
About This Chapter The fiber jumpers are divided into internal fiber jumpers and external fiber jumpers. Internal fiber jumpers are used for connecting optical interfaces within a cabinet. External fiber jumpers are used for connecting optical interfaces of a cabinet to those of other cabinets or peripherals. NOTE
Before you install the fiber jumpers, remove the front door and side s of the cabinet. Assemble the front door and side s after the fiber jumpers are installed.
6.1 About Fiber Jumpers Based on the cable types, the fiber jumpers that the OptiX 155/622H uses are classified into two types, which are 2 mm single-mode and 2 mm multi-mode fiber jumpers. Based on the connector types, the fiber jumpers that the OptiX 155/622H uses are classified into three types, which are the fiber jumpers with SC, FC, and LC connectors. 6.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to route and install the external fiber jumpers. A corrugated pipe or winding pipe is required to protect the fiber jumpers between the cabinet and the ODF during the cabling. 6.3 Checking the Installation After the fiber jumper is installed, check whether the fiber jumper installation is correct.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-1
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6.1 About Fiber Jumpers Based on the cable types, the fiber jumpers that the OptiX 155/622H uses are classified into two types, which are 2 mm single-mode and 2 mm multi-mode fiber jumpers. Based on the connector types, the fiber jumpers that the OptiX 155/622H uses are classified into three types, which are the fiber jumpers with SC, FC, and LC connectors. The single-mode fiber jumper can be distinguished from the multi-mode fiber jumper by different cable colors. The single-mode fiber jumper is a yellow cable and the multi-mode fiber jumper is a red cable.
CAUTION Multi-mode optical transmission modules can only be connected to the multi-mode fibers. Single-mode optical modules can only be connected to the single-mode fibers. Figure 6-1 shows the fiber connectors that are used by the OptiX 155/622H.
6-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
Figure 6-1 Fiber connectors Protective cap
FC connector
LC connector Protective cap
Protective cap
SC connector
6.2 Installation Procedure This section describes how to route and install the external fiber jumpers. A corrugated pipe or winding pipe is required to protect the fiber jumpers between the cabinet and the ODF during the cabling.
Prerequisite The ODF must be installed in the equipment room, and the required interface must be reserved.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Fiber jumper Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-3
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers l
Corrugated pipe or winding pipe
l
Binding strap
l
Label
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
NOTE
When fiber jumpers need to be routed outside the cabinet, a protective pipe is required, which may be a corrugated pipe or winding pipe. A corrugated pipe can house 12 to 15 fiber jumpers. A 12 mm winding pipe can wind 30 fiber jumpers, and a 6 mm winding pipe can wind about 18 fiber jumpers. This section describes how to install fiber jumpers when a corrugated pipe is used to protect the fiber jumpers.
Context
CAUTION Make sure that the connector is clean before installing the fiber jumper. Clean the connector of the fiber jumper if the connector has any dirt on it. For details, refer to the OptiX 155/622H (Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4 MSTP Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting. NOTE
On the optical interface board of the OptiX 155/622H, the interface with a transmit interface, and the one with a
symbol on the left is the
symbol on the right is the receive interface.
DANGER Avoid direct eye exposure to optical interfaces of optical interface boards and fiber jumpers. The laser beams of the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber may cause damage to the eyes.
Procedure Step 1 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the fiber jumpers. Step 2 Measure and cut the corrugated pipe according to the cabling distance between the cabinet and the ODF. Step 3 Route the fiber jumper through the corrugated pipe. It is forbidden to force the fiber jumper in or pull the fiber fiercely. After ing the fiber jumpers through the corrugated pipe, wrap the cut with adhesive tape to protect the fiber jumpers against wear and tear. TIP
To ease the ing of fiber jumpers through the corrugated pipe, let the jumpers fall by its gravity.
Step 4 Route the corrugated pipe into the cabinet through the fiber hole on the top of the cabinet. If there is not enough room for the corrugated pipe to through the fiber hole, place the corrugated pipe into the cable hole on the top of the cabinet for fixation.
6-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
Figure 6-2 Cable holes on the cabinet Cable hole
Fiber hole
Cable hole
Cable hole
Fiber hole
Step 5 Route the fiber jumper along the fiber path on the left of the cabinet and then to the chassis. Step 6 Take the protective cap off the fiber connector and clean the fiber connector with special cleaning tissue. NOTE
l
Keep the protective caps well for possible use in the future.
l
The unused fiber connectors must be covered with protective caps.
Step 7 Based on the connector type of the fiber jumper, connect the fiber jumper in either of the following methods: l
Fiber jumper with the LC connector: Align the LC connector with the optical interface, and then insert it in along the slide rail with proper strength until you hear a click. See Figure 6-3.
l
Fiber jumper with the FC connector: Align the FC connector with the optical interface, and ensure that the center of the connector is in the same line as the center of the optical interface. Insert the connector until it snaps into place. Then rotate the nut clockwise to secure the connector.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
Figure 6-3 Installing the fiber jumper
Step 8 Trim the fiber jumpers and bundle them with binding straps. For details, see Appendix 13 Binding Strap. Step 9 Install and route the fiber jumpers on the ODF side. Step 10 Remove the temporary labels on the cables. Step 11 Make new labels. For details, see Appendix 12 Engineering Labels. Step 12 Attach the labels 2 cm away from the connectors at the two ends. See Figure 6-4. Figure 6-4 Attaching a label Fiber jumper
Fiber jumper
Fiber jumper
Fold to the right TO: A03 33 33 33 33
Label
Fold upwards
----End
6.3 Checking the Installation After the fiber jumper is installed, check whether the fiber jumper installation is correct. The following requirements should be met when the installation of the fiber jumper is complete: 6-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
6 Installing and Routing Fiber Jumpers
l
The labels on the two ends of the fiber jumper are filled in correctly and clearly. All the labels are arranged neatly and face toward the same direction.
l
The connection between the fiber jumper and the optical interface board or the flange is firm.
l
The t point of the fiber jumper is clean.
l
All the fiber jumpers are nicely bound in even spacing with proper tightness.
l
The fiber jumper between the equipment and the ODF is protected with a protection pipe. The two ends of the protective pipe should be extended into the equipment.
l
Forcible pulling and unnatural bending are not allowed in the fiber jumper cabling. And there should be no other cables on them.
l
The fiber jumper should be routed in such a way as to facilitate maintenance and capacity expansion.
l
The fiber jumpers are routed and connected in compliance with the requirements stated in the design documents.
l
The fiber jumpers are secured smoothly and interconnected reliably in the ODF. The redundant fiber jumpers are coiled tidily.
l
No other cables or items are placed on the fiber jumper.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
7
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
Installing the Orderwire Phone
About This Chapter This section describes how to install the orderwire phone. 7.1 About the Orderwire Interface Both ends of phone wire are RJ-11 connectors. One end is inserted to the pin hole at the bottom of the phone set, and the other is inserted to PHONE at the SCB board of the OptiX 155/622H. 7.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone This section describes the procedures for installing the orderwire phone in two installation modes. 7.3 Checking the Orderwire Phone Installation After the orderwire phone is installed, you need to check whether the installation is correct.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
7.1 About the Orderwire Interface Both ends of phone wire are RJ-11 connectors. One end is inserted to the pin hole at the bottom of the phone set, and the other is inserted to PHONE at the SCB board of the OptiX 155/622H. Figure 7-1 shows the orderwire interface on the SCB board. Figure 7-1 Orderwire interface
ETHERNET
SYNC 1/2
COM2
COM3
COM4(F3)
F2
RUN
1
2
PHONE
CRT RST
ALM OUT1 MODEM(F)
OUT2
IN1/2
IN3/4
SCB
Orderwire interface
7.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone This section describes the procedures for installing the orderwire phone in two installation modes. 7.2.1 Installing the Orderwire Phone in the Cabinet This section considers the installation of the orderwire phone in an ETSI 300 mm cabinet as an example to describe how to install the orderwire phone set in the cabinet and how to install the orderwire phone on the orderwire phone set. 7.2.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone in an Open Rack This section considers the installation of the orderwire phone in an open rack to describe how to insert the orderwire phone in the phone set and fix the orderwire phone set on the OptiX 155/622H chassis.
7.2.1 Installing the Orderwire Phone in the Cabinet This section considers the installation of the orderwire phone in an ETSI 300 mm cabinet as an example to describe how to install the orderwire phone set in the cabinet and how to install the orderwire phone on the orderwire phone set.
Prerequisite The cabinet and the OptiX 155/622H chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials
7-2
l
Orderwire phone
l
Orderwire cable Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide l
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
Orderwire phone set
Procedure Step 1 See Figure 7-2 to fix the orderwire phone set in the cabinet. Figure 7-2 Fixing the orderwire phone set in the cabinet
Step 2 Place the orderwire phone on the phone set and face the keyboard of the orderwire phone to the phone set. Step 3 Insert one end of the phone cable into the phone. Set the ringing switch to "ON" and the dialing mode switch to "T". Step 4 Insert the other connector of the orderwire cable into the PHONE interface on the SCB board. ----End
7.2.2 Installing the Orderwire Phone in an Open Rack This section considers the installation of the orderwire phone in an open rack to describe how to insert the orderwire phone in the phone set and fix the orderwire phone set on the OptiX 155/622H chassis. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
Prerequisite The cabinet and the OptiX 155/622H chassis must be installed.
Tools/Instruments General tools
Installing Materials l
Orderwire phone
l
Orderwire cable
l
Orderwire phone set
Procedure Step 1 See Figure 7-3 to insert the orderwire phone in the phone set and fix the orderwire phone set on the OptiX 155/622H chassis. Figure 7-3 Position for installing the orderwire phone in the open rack
Orderwire phone
Orderwire phone
7-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
7 Installing the Orderwire Phone
Step 2 Insert one end of the phone cable into the phone. Set the ringing switch to "ON" and the dialing mode switch to "T". Step 3 Insert the other connector of the orderwire cable into the PHONE interface on the SCB board. ----End
7.3 Checking the Orderwire Phone Installation After the orderwire phone is installed, you need to check whether the installation is correct. The following requirements should be met when the installation of the orderwire phone is completed: l
The installation position of the orderwire frame in the cabinet is correct.
l
The screws are firmly installed.
l
Set the ringing switch to "ON" and the dialing mode switch to "T".
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
Powering On and Checking the Equipment
About This Chapter This section describes the operations that are performed during powering on the equipment.
DANGER It is dangerous to touch the equipment power supply directly or indirectly by means of a damp object. 8.1 Powering On the Cabinet This topic describes how to power on the cabinet. 8.2 Powering On the Chassis To power on the chassis is the last step of the entire procedure for powering on the equipment. To prevent the powering on of the equipment from being impacted by incorrect installation, check the installation of the power supply and the distribution of power cables before powering on the chassis. 8.3 Checking the Fan Running Status The fan starts to work after the equipment is powered on. The fan indicators indicate the working state of the fans. If the indicator indicates that the fan is faulty, replace the faulty fan in time. This section describes how to determine the state of the fan hardware by checking the fan indicators.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-1
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8.1 Powering On the Cabinet This topic describes how to power on the cabinet. To power the cabinet, do as follows: l
Check the fuse capacity of the power supply device.
l
Measure the impedance between the power terminals of the cabinet.
l
Feed power to the cabinet.
l
Feed power to the subrack.
DANGER Direct touch or indirect touch through moist materials of the power supply is fatal. 8.1.1 Checking Fuse Currents of the Power Supply The fuse currents of the power supply device ensures that the OptiX 155/622H is normally operating even with the maximum power consumption. This topic describes how to check the fuse capacity of the power supply device to ensure that the fuse capacity meets the requirement for the normal operation of the OptiX 155/622H. 8.1.2 Testing the Resistance Between the Power Cable Terminals of the Cabinet To prevent a short circuit or reverse terminal connection when installing the power cables, test the resistance between the power cable terminals of the cabinet. This topic describes how to test the resistance between the power cable terminals. 8.1.3 Powering On a Cabinet If the power voltage of the cabinet is abnormal, the OptiX 155/622H operates in an abnormal manner or fails to operate. This topic describes how to power on the cabinet and test the power voltage. Perform this task to ensure the voltage of the power supply meets the requirements of the OptiX 155/622H.
8.1.1 Checking Fuse Currents of the Power Supply The fuse currents of the power supply device ensures that the OptiX 155/622H is normally operating even with the maximum power consumption. This topic describes how to check the fuse capacity of the power supply device to ensure that the fuse capacity meets the requirement for the normal operation of the OptiX 155/622H.
Prerequisite The power supply device must be installed and tested.
Tools/Instruments None.
8-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
Procedure Step 1 Check the maximum power consumption and fuse current of the OptiX 155/622H. l
Maximum power consumption: 100 W
l
Fuse capacity: 6 A (in normal cases) NOTE
For details on the power consumption of the boards, refer to the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/ STM-4 MSTP Optical Transmission System Hardware Description. NOTE
If the power consumption is configured to exceed 100 W, the system may become unstable.
Step 2 Compute the fuse current of the power supply device with a t consideration of the equipment configuration in the equipment room. Step 3 Check whether the fuse current of the power supply device meets the requirement. ----End
8.1.2 Testing the Resistance Between the Power Cable Terminals of the Cabinet To prevent a short circuit or reverse terminal connection when installing the power cables, test the resistance between the power cable terminals of the cabinet. This topic describes how to test the resistance between the power cable terminals.
Prerequisite The following cables must be installed and distributed: l
Power cables of the cabinet
l
Power grounding cables
l
PGND cables
Tools/Instruments Multimeter
Positions of the Power Cable Terminals It is used to access two –48 V or –60 V DC power supplies, which provide power to the subracks. Figure 8-1 shows the positions of the terminals in the DC distribution box.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
Figure 8-1 Figure 12-1 Positions of the terminals in the DC distribution box. Power terminal NEG(-) 1
2
3
4
1
ON
2
3
4
ON RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-)NEG2(-)
OFF
INPUT SW1/ SW2/ SW3/ 32A 32A 20A
SW4/ 20A
Chassis power switch
OFF SW1/ SW2/ SW3/ 32A 32A 20A
PGND
Power terminal RTN(+)
SW4/ 20A
Chassis power switch
Precautions
WARNING Switch off the external power supply device.
CAUTION If the power supply device is installed with a power monitoring unit, disconnect the power supply device from the power monitoring unit before testing the resistance between the terminals of the power cable. Otherwise, the power monitoring unit might affect the test result.
Procedure Step 1 Switch the power switches of the subracks on the DC PDU to the "OFF" position. Step 2 Use the multimeter to test the resistances between the power terminals NEG (–), RTN (+) and PGND. The values should all be ∞. For the positions of the power cable terminals, see Figure 8-1.
8-4
l
Resistance between NEG1 (–) and RTN1 (+): ∞
l
Resistance between NEG1 (–) and RTN2 (+): ∞
l
Resistance between NEG1 (–) and PGND: ∞
l
Resistance between NEG2 (–) and RTN2 (+): ∞
l
Resistance between NEG2 (–) and RTN1 (+): ∞
l
Resistance between NEG2 (–) and PGND: ∞ Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
CAUTION If the test result shows that the resistance is not ∞, a fault exists between NEG (–), RTN (+) and PGND. Clear the fault and then proceed with Step 2. For the troubleshooting methods, refer to the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4 MSTP Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting. Step 3 Switch the subrack power switches on the DC PDU to the "ON" position. Step 4 Step 4 Connect the positive pole of the multimeter to RTN (+) and the negative pole to NEG (–). Test the resistance between the following power cable terminals (the resistance should be larger than 20 ohms): l
Resistance between NEG1 (–) and RTN1 (+): > 20,000 ohms
l
Resistance between NEG1 (–) and RTN2 (+): > 20,000 ohms
l
Resistance between NEG2 (–) and RTN2 (+): > 20,000 ohms
l
Resistance between NEG2 (–) and RTN1 (+): > 20,000 ohms
CAUTION If the resistance between the terminals is less than 20 ohms, a short circuit occurs between the working power and the working ground. In this case, clear the fault and then perform Step 4. If the resistance between the terminals is less than 20,000 ohms, the power supply is faulty. In this case, locate and then clear the fault. For the troubleshooting methods, refer to the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4 MSTP Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting. Step 5 Switch the subrack power switches to the "OFF" position, after the test is complete. ----End
8.1.3 Powering On a Cabinet If the power voltage of the cabinet is abnormal, the OptiX 155/622H operates in an abnormal manner or fails to operate. This topic describes how to power on the cabinet and test the power voltage. Perform this task to ensure the voltage of the power supply meets the requirements of the OptiX 155/622H.
Prerequisite The following tasks must be performed: l
Checking the fuse currents of the power supply device
l
Testing the resistance between the power cable poles of the cabinet
Tools/Instruments Multimeter Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-5
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Procedure Step 1 Check the status of the power switch of the OptiX 155/622H chassis to ensure that the switch is in the "OFF" state. Step 2 Switch on the power supply device. Step 3 Test the voltage of the external power supply device to ensure that the positive and negative poles of the power supply are correctly connected. l
The voltage should range from –38.4 V to –57.6 V, if the standard input voltage is –48 V.
l
The voltage should range from –48.0 V to –72.0 V, if the standard input voltage is –60 V.
l
The voltage should range from +19.2 V to +28.0 V, if the standard input voltage is +24 V.
CAUTION If the output voltage of the power supply device is not within this working range, reconstruction should be made and power-on is forbidden. ----End
8.2 Powering On the Chassis To power on the chassis is the last step of the entire procedure for powering on the equipment. To prevent the powering on of the equipment from being impacted by incorrect installation, check the installation of the power supply and the distribution of power cables before powering on the chassis.
Prerequisite The cabinet must be powered on.
Tools/Instruments None.
Procedure Step 1 Ensure that the voltage is normal and turn on the power switch on the POI/POU board. The green RUN indicator on the rear should flash.
WARNING Do not insert or remove the power plug and the POI/POU board when the power is on. Step 2 If the equipment is configured with data, all boards should work normally five or six minutes after the equipment is powered on. The green RUN indicator on the chassis should flash (on for one second and then off for one second). 8-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
8 Powering On and Checking the Equipment
NOTE
If the green indicator is off or constantly on, the equipment is faulty. For the meanings of the board indicators, refer to the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4 MSTP Optical Transmission System Hardware Description.
Step 3 Check the cabinet power indicator on the top of the cabinet to ensure that the green indicator is constantly on. ----End
8.3 Checking the Fan Running Status The fan starts to work after the equipment is powered on. The fan indicators indicate the working state of the fans. If the indicator indicates that the fan is faulty, replace the faulty fan in time. This section describes how to determine the state of the fan hardware by checking the fan indicators.
Prerequisite The equipment must be powered on.
Tools/Instruments None.
Procedure Step 1 Check the yellow fan indicator FAN, which should be off normally. If the indicator is on, the fan is faulty. Step 2 You can feel wind blowing when you put your hand at the side of the FAN. ----End
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Operation Environment Requirements
About This Chapter This appendix describes the requirements for the operating environment. 9.1 Requirements for the Equipment Room Environment This section describes the operation environment of the optical transmission equipment. 9.2 Layout of Equipment Room This section describes the principles of the overall layout of the equipment room. 9.3 Construction of the Equipment Room This section describes the requirements for the construction of the equipment room. 9.4 Cleanliness of the Equipment Room This section describes the requirements for the cleanness of the equipment room. 9.5 Temperature and Humidity This section describes the requirements for the relative humidity and ambient temperature in the equipment room. 9.6 Corrosive Gas Control Requirements This section describes the requirements for the corrosive gases in the equipment room. 9.7 Electromagnetic Requirements This section describes the electromagnetic conditions and the measures for suppressing electromagnetic interferences. 9.8 Antistatic Protection This section describes the requirements for the ESD prevention and the preventive measures for the equipment room. 9.9 Lightning Protection and Grounding Requirements This section describes the requirements for lightning protection and grounding. 9.10 Power Supply This section describes the DC power supply system. 9.11 Lighting in the Equipment Room The OptiX transmission equipment room is equipped with three lighting systems. 9.12 Protection System Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-1
9 Operation Environment Requirements
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
This section describes the requirements for the protection system.
9-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
9.1 Requirements for the Equipment Room Environment This section describes the operation environment of the optical transmission equipment. A good operation environment is the key to guaranteeing the safe operation of the OptiX optical transmission equipment. Therefore, the equipment room should not be located in any area with high temperature, heavy dust, poisonous gas, dangerous explosives, low pressure, serious vibration or loud noises. Moreover, it should be built away from the general step-down electrical substations and traction substations. While deg the project, you need to consider the hydrographic, geological, seismic and traffic factors according to the communication network planning and communication technology, so as to choose the place that meets the environment design requirement. The engineering design in of construction, structure, heating, ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire fighting should comply with the environment requirements for optical synchronous transmission equipment. It should also comply with the international standards and specifications related to industrial enterprise, environment protection, fire fighting, and human protection, as well as the regulations and requirements for constructing and deg buildings. Site requirements are as follows: l
The site should be kept away from pollution sources. Ensure that the site is located more than 5 km away from heavy pollution sources such as the smeltery and coal mine, and more than 3.7 km away from medium pollution sources such as chemical, rubber, and galvanization industries, and more than 2 km away from light pollution sources such as food and tanner industries. If the pollution sources cannot be avoided, the equipment room must be located in the perennial upwind direction of the pollution sources. In addition, quality equipment room or protective products must be adopted.
l
The ventilation port for air exchange of the equipment room must be kept away from the exhaust of city waste pipes, big cesspools and sewage treatment tanks. The equipment room should be kept in the positive pressure state lest the corrosive gases enter the equipment room and erode components and circuit boards.
l
The equipment room should be kept away from the industrial and heating boilers.
l
The equipment room is located on the second floor or the higher floor. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the ground for equipment installation in the equipment room shall be at least 600 mm above the maximum flood level in the local record.
l
The equipment room should be kept away from livestock farms. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, it should be located in the perennial upwind direction of the livestock farms.
l
The equipment room should be kept 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt lake. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the equipment room should be airtight with cooling facilities. In addition, the salt-affected soil cannot be used as the construction material. Otherwise, the equipment applicable in atrocious environment must be adopted.
l
The historical livestock room or the chemical fertilizer warehouse cannot be used as the equipment room.
l
The equipment room should be solid enough to withstand wind and downpour.
l
The equipment room should be kept away from the road or sand field with dusts flying around. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the windows and doors of the equipment room should be kept away from the sources of pollution.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
9.2 Layout of Equipment Room This section describes the principles of the overall layout of the equipment room. The communication equipment room houses a complete set of communication transmission equipment, for example, SPC switching equipment, power supply, and so on. They should be arranged compactly for ease of maintenance and management. Figure 9-1 shows a typical layout of the equipment room. Figure 9-1 Layout of the equipment room Service console
Distribution frame (MDF) room
Control room
SPC switching room
Transmission room
Diesel room
Power distribution room
Battery room
Transformer room
Power line Communication line Network line
The principles for layout of the equipment room are as follows: l
The layout should meet the requirements for wiring and maintaining the communication cable and power cable.
l
The layout should avoid line roundabout for convenient maintenance, thus lowering the cable cost, reducing communication failures and improving the work efficiency.
l
The transmission equipment should not be installed in a separate room close to the MDF room or near the switch.
9.3 Construction of the Equipment Room This section describes the requirements for the construction of the equipment room. The construction of the equipment room shall meet the requirements as listed in Table 9-1. Table 9-1 Construction requirements for the equipment room
9-4
Item
Requirements
Area
The equipment room should be able to house all the devices of the terminal office at least.
Net height
Minimum indoor height refers to the net height under the roof beam or under the ventilation pipe. Normally it is no less than 3 m. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Item
Requirements
Indoor floor
The floor of the equipment room should be semi-conductive and not dustarousing. Generally, ESD-preventive raised floor is required. The floor boards should be laid tightly and firmly. For each square metre of floor space, the horizontal tolerance should not be greater than 2 mm. If no raised floor is available, electrostatic conductive floor material (with a volume resistivity ranging 1.0 x 107 ohms to 1.0 x 1010 ohms should be laid. The electrostatic conductive floor material or the ESD-preventive raised floor should be grounded well. It can be connected to the grounding device through a current limiting resistor and a connection wire. Resistance of the current limiting resistor should be 1 megaohm.
Load-bearing capacity of floor
> 450 kg/m2
Doors and windows
Doors are single-leaf, 2 m high and 1 m wide. All doors and windows should be sealed with dust-proof rubber strips. Double-layer glass is recommended for windows.
Wall
The wall can be covered with wallpaper or lusterless paint, but not the paint that is apt to get pulverized or peeled.
Indoor ducts
Indoor ducts are used for cabling. The inside of the ducts should be smooth and clean. The reserved length and width (margins) as well as the number, position and size of the holes should comply with the relevant requirements for placing the optical synchronous transmission equipment.
Water supply and drainage
The service pipes, drain pipes and rain pipes should not through the equipment room. Fire hydrants should not be placed in the equipment room, but in corridors or the place near the staircase where they can be easily seen and accessed to.
Internal partition wall
The place where the equipment is installed is separated from the equipment room door. The partition wall can hold back some dusts, as shown in Figure 9-2.
Installation position of the air conditioner
The air conditioner should be installed in the place where the discharged air from the air conditioner shall not be directed to the equipment.
Other requirements
In addition to the rodent-proof measures (for example, measures against mice), measures against proliferation of fungi and mildew should be taken in the equipment room.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Figure 9-2 Internal partition wall of the equipment room Air conditioner Equipment
Partition wall
9.4 Cleanliness of the Equipment Room This section describes the requirements for the cleanness of the equipment room. Dusts on the equipment may lead to electrostatic adherence, and consequently result in poor connection between metal connectors or connecting points. This will reduce the service life of the equipment, and even makes it faulty. Table 9-2 provides the specifications for the density and diameter of dust particles in the equipment room. Table 9-2 Limits of dust diameter and density in the equipment room Maximum Diameter (μm)
0.05
1
3
5
Maximum Density (particles/m3)
14×105
7×105
24×104
13×104
The equipment room shall be guarded against dust and corrosion by harmful gases such as SO2, H2S, NH3, and NO2. Table 9-3 provides the limits for them. Table 9-3 Limited density of harmful gas in the equipment room
9-6
Gas
Average (mg/m3)
Maximum (mg/m3)
SO2
0.2
1.5
H2S
0.006
0.03
NO2
0.04
0.15
NH3
0.05
0.15
Cl2
0.01
0.3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
To meet the above requirements, take the following measures: l
Keep the equipment room far away from pollution sources.
l
Seal the doors and windows.
l
The surfaces of the floor, wall, and ceiling should be made of rust-proof materials.
l
The screen doors and screen windows should be installed for the doors and windows that are open to the outdoor environment. The outer windows should have highly dust-proof function.
l
Clean the equipment room periodically (once every three months).
l
Always wear clean lab coat and protective footwear before getting into the equipment room. Change the antistatic uniform and shoes frequently to keep the antistatic uniform and shoes clean.
l
Cover the ceiling and walls of the equipment room with wallpapers or lusterless paint (pulverized paint prohibited) to prevent dust flake-off.
9.5 Temperature and Humidity This section describes the requirements for the relative humidity and ambient temperature in the equipment room. Proper temperature and humidity should be maintained inside the equipment room so that the transmission equipment can work normally in a constant manner, as provided in Table 9-4. Table 9-4 Requirements for temperature and humidity Temperature
Humidity
Long-term operating condition
Short-term operating conditions
Short-term operating conditions
Short-term operating conditions
0℃ to 45℃
–5℃ to +50℃
10% to 90%
5% to 95%
NOTE The temperature and humidity are measured 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m ahead of the cabinet when it works under normal environment conditions (without any protection plate in front of the cabinet). The short-term operating conditions indicate that the successive working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated annual working time does not exceed 15 days.
To meet the requirements, the following measures can be taken: l
The temperature-control devices should be equipped throughout the year, regardless of the weather conditions.
l
In dry areas, to meet the requirements for relative humidity, a humidifier should be used or you should clean the floor with a wet mop.
l
In areas of high moisture, a dehumidifier should be used.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
9.6 Corrosive Gas Control Requirements This section describes the requirements for the corrosive gases in the equipment room. Besides dust-proofing efforts, measures should be taken to prevent the equipment room from being corroded by harmful gases, for example, SO2, H2S, and NH3. Table 9-5 lists the content limit on corrosive gases. Table 9-5 Corrosive gas content specification Item
Unit
Content
SO2
mg/m3
≤ 0.20
H2S
mg/m3
≤ 0.006
NH3
mg/m3
≤ 0.05
Cl2
mg/m3
≤ 0.01
To comply with the preceding requirements, the following measures must be taken for the equipment room: l
Build the equipment room away from places with high corrosive gas density such as the area near a chemical plant.
l
The air intake of the equipment room should be at the opposite side to the pollution source.
l
Ensure that the storage batteries are isolated and away from each other. It is recommended that you store only one battery in a room.
l
Ensure that a professional monitoring company monitors the environment regularly.
9.7 Electromagnetic Requirements This section describes the electromagnetic conditions and the measures for suppressing electromagnetic interferences. The electromagnetic requirements are provided in Table 9-6. Table 9-6 Electromagnetic specification Item
9-8
Parameter
Low frequency magnetic field
Frequency(Hz)
50 to 20 000
Ampl. A/m(rms)
10 to 0.025
Amplitude modulation radiated electromagnetic fields
Frequency(MHz)
0.009 to 1000
Ampl. V/m(rms)
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Item
Parameter
Pulse modulation radiated electromagnetic fields
Frequency(GHz)
1 to 20
Ampl.(V/m(peak))
3
To suppress electromagnetic interferences, take the following measures: l
Build the equipment room away from electric transformers, high-voltage power lines and other equipment or devices with high current. That is, you must build the equipment room 20 meters or more away from the transformer. In addition, ensure that the equipment room is more than 50 meters away from high-voltage power lines.
l
Build the equipment room away from high-power radio transmitters. That is, build the equipment room at a place free of high-power radio transmitters within 500 meters.
l
If there is a mobile communication transmitter in the comprehensive building, make sure its interference level complies with the corresponding standard. Shielding and isolation measures must be taken for further protection if required.
l
Release and execute stipulations that forbid any personnel using wireless handy communication devices close to the equipment in the equipment room.
9.8 Antistatic Protection This section describes the requirements for the ESD prevention and the preventive measures for the equipment room. The absolute static voltage value should be less than 1000 V. To comply with this requirement, take the following measures: l
Ensure that all the operating personnel have basic static knowledge.
l
Control the humidity in the room to reduce the impact from static electricity.
l
Lay antistatic floor in the room.
l
Wear ESD shoes and uniforms before entering the room.
l
Use antistatic tools such as ESD wrist straps, antistatic tweezers and extraction tools when dealing with the equipment.
l
Ground all conducting materials in the room, including computer terminals.
l
Use antistatic worktables.
l
Keep non-antistatic materials (such as common bags, foams, and rubbers) at least 30 cm away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.
9.9 Lightning Protection and Grounding Requirements This section describes the requirements for lightning protection and grounding. Table 9-7 provides the requirements for lightning protection and grounding.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-9
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Table 9-7 Requirements for lightning protection and grounding
9-10
Item
Description
On structure of the equipment room
Build the equipment room with steel and concrete. The equipment room should be equipped with facilities such as a lightning arrester to protect it against direct lightning strokes. Make sure that the lightning protection grounding of the equipment room, or that of devices such as the lightning arrester, shares the same grounding body with the protection grounding of the building where the room is located.
Use TN-S for AC power supply
Equip the communication office with special electric transformers and a metal-jacketed or insulation-jacketed power cable. The power cable should through a steel pipe and should be buried in the earth before entering the office. Both ends of both the metal jacket and the steel pipe should be grounded properly. Make sure that the cable is buried not less than 15 meters deep. Each of the three live cables at the low-voltage side of the AC transformer should be equipped with a gapless zinc oxide arrester respectively. The chassis, the AC neutral cable of the lowvoltage side, and the metal jacket of the cable connected to the chassis should be grounded properly.
Equip the incoming power cable with a lightning arrester
Do not lead in or lead out AC/DC power cables aerially for the office. Equip the in-room low-voltage power cable with a lightning arrester in the voltage regulator or in the AC . The arrester should be grounded proximately. If the office is located in the city, it is recommended that you use an arrester with the nominal discharge current of not less than 20 kA. If the office is located in the suburb of intermediate lightning danger level or higher, an arrester with the surge current higher than 60 kA is recommended. If the office is located in an isolated huge building in the city or in the mountain area where lightning occurs often, use an arrester that has a surge current of more than 100 kA. The grounding cable should be less than 1 meter long.
DC power supply grounding
The working ground of the office, that is, the anode of a -48 V DC power supply or the cathode of a 24 V power supply, should be led from the indoor grounding bus line properly. The grounding cable should meet the requirement of the maximum load of the equipment. The power supply facilities for the office must contain a DC working neutral line, which is connected from the general grounding bus line or the protection grounding bar of the equipment room.
Equipotential connection
All communication equipment and auxiliary equipment in the room, such as the mobile base station and the transmitting, exchanging, power and distribution frame should be connected to the protection ground. The protection grounding of all equipment in the communication office should share the same general grounding bar, whereas the protection grounding of the same equipment room should all connect to the same protection grounding bar. The working ground and protection ground of the communication equipment in the equipment room should adopt the t grounding mode, that is, they share the same grounding network. Protection grounding measures should also be taken for the indoor cable rack, equipment chassis, metal ventilation pipe, metal door or window.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Item
Description
General requirements on grounding
The AC neutral line must not be connected to the protection ground of any communication equipment. Make sure that there is no fuse, switch or other similar devices on the grounding line. All grounding lines should be as short and straightforward as possible. Take measures to prevent them from being wound
On the grounding resistor
< 1 ohm. The upper end of the grounding body should be 0.7 meters or more underground. In cold areas, the grounding body should be buried in the frozen layer or lower. Make regular monitor efforts on the grounding resistor to make sure the grounding is always valid.
On routing of the signal cable
Signal cables should be led into the communication office from underground. Aerial routing of signal cables is not permitted. The leadin or leadout communication cable should be metal-jacketed. Otherwise, they should be routed in metal pipes. The grounding cable of the arrester should be as short as possible. The empty pairs in the cable should be connected to the protection ground in the equipment room.
On the grounding bus line
The general grounding bus line can be grounding loop or bar. The grounding cable should not contain aluminum material. If an interconnection occurs between different metal connectors, take measures to avoid by electric chemical corrosion. Generally, the crosssectional area is a copper bar of not less than 120 mm2 or zinc-plated flat steel of the same resistance. The grounding bus line should be kept insulated from the construction steel.
On the grounding lead-in wire
The grounding lead-in should not be longer than 30 meters. In addition, it is recommended that you use zinc plated flat steel with the crosssectional area of 40 mm x 4 mm or 50 mm x 5 mm.
9.10 Power Supply This section describes the DC power supply system. The working power voltage for the equipment ranges from –38.4 V to –57.6 V. The transmission equipment offers a transmission path for communication networks, and thus its interruption will have a wide influence. Therefore, the DC power distribution system should be protected against power failure and configured with storage batteries. To deal with a long-term power outage, a diesel generator should be equipped as the standby AC power supply for the backbone transmission equipment. The DC power supply system consists of storage battery, primary power supply (rectifier), DC distributor and control .
Storage battery The storage battery is an essential component of the DC power distribution system of the OptiX equipment functionally. It has the following functions: l
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Stabilizes the voltage for the transmission equipment to work reliably.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements l
Stores energy. In the case of outage of mains, the storage battery can feed power for a period of time, which depends on its capacity, so that the communication will not be interrupted immediately.
l
Filters for large capacitors. The storage batteries are useful for absorbing surge voltage from rectifiers and preventing noise and power frequency interference from getting into the communication equipment.
l
Automatically shuts down. When the voltage of the storage battery drops to below –43 V, the control circuit can automatically shut down the output.
The storage battery of OptiX optical transmission equipment is charged and discharges under a low, constant voltage. Table 9-8 provides the relevant requirements. Table 9-8 DC charge/discharge status and voltage requirements Powe r Supp ly Cate gory
Mains Supply Status
Battery Charge/ Discharge
DC Voltage Value
Termina l Voltage of Each Storage Battery
The Numb er of Storag e Batter ies in Each Group
–48 V DC
Normal
Floating charged by the rectifier
Floating charge voltage reaches 53.5 V.
2.23 V
24 PCS
Outage
Discharge
Discharge voltage reaches 43.2 V.
1.8 V
Resumed
Under loading conditions, automatically charged with a current 0.1 to 0.15 times of the battery capacity.
When the charging voltage reaches 56.4 V, it automatically changes to constant voltage mode, that is changes the charging status to floating charge.
2.35 V
Primary Power Supply (Rectifier) The primary power supply must meet the following requirements:
9-12
l
Primary power supplies shall be able to operate in parallel, and there should be current equalizing device between them.
l
The primary power supplies should be equipped with a current limiting device.
l
The output voltage of the primary power supply should meet the requirement for initial charging of storage batteries, that is 2.35 x 24 = 56.4 V DC (when the power supply is –48 V DC) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
l
A DC voltmeter and an ammeter should be installed for the primary power supplies.
l
The efficiency of the primary power supply should be more than 85% and its power factor more than 0.8.
l
Natural cooling is recommended for the primary power supply. The primary power supply should be able to work continuously with full load within 00℃–400℃.
l
The output noise voltage (measured with a psophometer, plus weighing factors) of the primary power supply should meet the requirements as provided in Table 9-9.
l
The primary power supply should be able to automatically shut down the output at a low voltage.
Table 9-9 DC voltage specifications Item
DC Power Supply for Transmission Equipment
Nominal value (V)
–48
Voltage fluctuation range (V)
–38.4 to –57.6
Noise voltage
0 Hz to 300 Hz
≤ 400 mV (peak value)
300 Hz to 3400 Hz
≤ 2 mV (weighted noise of psophometer)
3.4 kHz to 150 kHz
Single frequency: ≤ 5 mV effective value
Broadband: ≤ 100 mV effective value
150 kHz to 200 kHz
Single frequency: ≤ 3 mV effective value
Broadband: ≤ 30 mV effective value
200 kHz to 500 kHz
Single frequency: ≤ 2 mV effective value
500 kHz to 30 MHz
Single frequency: ≤ 1 mV effective value
DC distributor and control l
The capacity of the primary power supply should be designed according to the power consumption of the transmission equipment of the terminal office, and a certain margin should be reserved. Generally, high frequency switching power supplies with a high switching efficiency should be adopted, which should work in N+1 hot standby mode. There should be an output current equalizer for each power module. The failure of a single power module will not affect the normal operation of the whole DC power distribution system.
l
Each control can access a minimum of two groups of storage batteries. When one of them fails, the other can supply power instead.
l
Each control can access a minimum of 5 primary power supplies.
l
The power supply equipment should be capable of automation, so as to satisfy the nonattendant requirement.
l
When the primary power supply charges the storage batteries in floating charge mode, the number of primary power supplies put into operation depends on the load. When one
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-13
9 Operation Environment Requirements
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
primary power supply becomes faulty, it will drop out automatically, while the standby primary power supply will automatically go into operation. l
In the case of mains outage, storage batteries will discharge. When the mains resumes, it will automatically recharge the discharged storage batteries with a current 0.1 to 0.15 times of the battery capacity. When the charging voltage reaches 56.4 V, it will automatically change to constant-voltage charging.
l
When the storage batteries are fully charged, they will automatically change to floating charge.
The OptiX optical transmission equipment also has critical restriction on random transient noises, which include the abnormal operation noise of the equipment caused by external magnetic interference and the interference from the equipment itself and the grounding cables. The shorter the duration of the transient pulse, the higher values of such transient noises can be allowed. For the allowable values, see Figure 9-3. Figure 9-3 Transient noises
l
When the power supply equipment fails or works abnormally, visual and audible alarms should be given. Such alarm information should be able to be sent to the operation and maintenance center.
l
In case short circuit occurs to a tributary of the power supply system, the whole power distribution system should not be affected by the sharp voltage reduction. And the peak striking voltage should not cause any breakdowns to the transmission equipment.
Suggestions for Basic DC Power
9-14
l
The distributed power supply mode is recommended. That is, it is recommended that you adopt multiple DC power supply systems or locate the power supply equipment at different places.
l
Adopt the DC power supply systems that comply with the relevant standard, and set the output voltage of the communication power supply system to be within the required voltage range.
l
To improve the reliability of the power supply systems, improve the reliability of the AC power supply system and reduce the capacity of the storage batteries to a proper value. If difficulty exists when you improve the reliability of the AC power supply system, increase the capacity of the storage batteries to a proper value.
l
The total capacity of the high-frequency switch rectifier should meet the requirements for the input of the communication load power and the charging power of the storage batteries. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
Redundant rectifier modules are required. If there are not more than 10 working rectifier modules, there should be one protection rectifier module. If there are more than 10 working rectifier modules, one protection rectifier module is required for each 10 working rectifier modules. l
The storage batteries should be installed as two groups or multiple groups. The total capacity of the storage batteries depends on the time during which the storage groups feed power to the load independently. In normal communication stations, a storage battery group should be able to feed power for at least one hour.
9.11 Lighting in the Equipment Room The OptiX transmission equipment room is equipped with three lighting systems. l
Active lighting system, which is powered by mains supply.
l
Backup lighting system, which is powered by backup power supply (diesel electric generator) of the office.
l
Emergency lighting system, which is powered by storage batteries when the mains supply has been interrupted but the backup power supply has not yet started to supply power.
9.12 Protection System This section describes the requirements for the protection system.
ESD protection The equipment-affecting electrostatic induction comes from the external electric field such as outdoor high voltage transmission line or lightning. It also comes from the internal system such as indoor environment, floor materials or equipment structure. Static electricity may damage the chips on integrated circuit boards and cause faults in software and electronic switch. Statistics shows that 60 percent of the damaged circuit boards are caused by static electricity. It is essential to take effective ESD protection measures. The following measures are recommended: l
Ground the equipment well. While laying the raised floor covered with semiconductive materials, copper foil should be used for grounding at a number of points on the floor (the copper foil should be placed between the cement ground and the semiconductive floor and should be connected to the grounding cable).
l
Take dust-proof measure. Dust may do great harm to the optical synchronous transmission equipment. Dusts or other particles getting into the equipment room may cause poor connection between connectors or metal connecting points. When the humidity in the room is high, dust can cause electrical leakage. It is found in maintenance that the equipment failure is often caused by accumulated dusts. Especially, when the humidity in the room is very low, electrostatic adherence is likely to occur.
l
Keep proper temperature and humidity. Too high humidity may make the metal components rusty, while too low humidity may induce static electricity.
l
Always wear an ESD-preventive wrist strap and lab coat when touching a circuit board to prevent electrostatic damage to the equipment.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-15
9 Operation Environment Requirements
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Interference prevention With the development of technologies and social economy, more and more electromagnetic signals are transmitted in the air. They may affect the communication quality by causing crosstalk and stray noise, and even result in communication interruption. The electromagnetic interference (EMI) sources include: l
The corona discharge of the electric transmission line
l
The transformer
l
Switches
l
Waveform distortion of the power supply network caused during the operation of large equipment
l
Radio frequency (RF) interference
l
Natural interference sources such as terrestrial magnetic field and external radiation
The interference, from either inside or outside the equipment or the application system, affects the equipment through conductive modes such as capacitance coupling, inductance coupling, electromagnetic wave radiation, common impedance (including grounding system) and cable (power and signal cables). In of external relations of the equipment, interference is from the signal cable, power cable, grounding system and spatial electromagnetic wave. Integrated circuits (ICs) have the interference resistance capability to a degree. However when the external noises go beyond their anti-interference tolerance, corrupted signals and even system malfunction will be caused. It is impossible to eliminate or shield all the interference sources, but the following measures can be taken to suppress the interference signals:
9-16
l
High frequency interference in the power supply network is generated when the primary coil of the power supply transformer is coupled to the secondary coil through distributed capacitors. To suppress such interference, we can use an appropriate transformer, and install a low- filter at the inlet of the power supply cable.
l
The interference of the transient voltage in the power supply network can be reduced by inputting power directly from the primary transformer with a filter capacitor for the optical synchronous transmission equipment.
l
When the optical synchronous transmission equipment works in the 50 Hz mains power supply network with the above interference, the surge voltage caused by the power supply network and the over-voltage generated by lightening will be ed to the power supply of the optical synchronous transmission equipment, which leads to computing errors of the processors. Therefore, before directly using the mains supply, effective measures against interference from power supply network should be taken.
l
The key to eliminate the interference from the grounding system is to avoid loops among various grounds, such as the signal ground (including analog and digital grounds), BGND, PGND and shield ground, or loops formed by large distributed capacitors. Otherwise, the common impedance interference from the grounding system may affect the operation of the equipment. In buildings other than high-rises, the working ground of the optical transmission equipment should be separated as far as possible from the ground for electricity equipment and lightning protection device.
l
Prevent electromagnetic radiation interference from the surroundings to the equipment. In some integrated communication buildings, if there is a high frequency transmitter there, its influence on the optical transmission equipment should meet the relevant requirements. Independent power supplies are recommended for them.
l
EMI from the telecommunications line should be restrained. Influenced by high frequency electromagnetic field (external interference), high longitudinal voltage will occur to the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
9 Operation Environment Requirements
core and sheath of the communication cable. Because of the asymmetry of cores in the cables, the longitudinal voltage will generate a horizontal noise voltage at the ends of the cores. When both ends of the cable sheath are grounded, the sheath will function as a shielding layer, greatly reducing the longitudinal voltage and reducing the interference voltage. Other effective methods include: reduce the voltage or current of the interference source; reduce the line length and the spacing of the conducting wires to reduce the area of the affected loop; directly place the insulated conducting wires on the grounded floor; use a special grounding cable to avoid co-impedance; or twist the signal cable and the cable together to offset partial peripheral electromagnetic interference, and so on.
Fire protection For small equipment rooms, a certain number of portable fire extinguishers should be equipped in each room for an initial fire control. In large equipment rooms, fire extinguishing facilities should be equipped. An automatic fire alarm system should also be equipped in the equipment room. All telecommunication buildings with fire alarm system should have fire emergency lighting system and evacuation instruction marks at important places, paths and gateways.
Anti-earthquake demand The designed anti-earthquake intensity of the telecommunication equipment room must be one degree (Richter scale) higher than that for the common buildings. The equipment room building that cannot meet the requirement should be reinforced. When installing the OptiX optical transmission equipment, the following anti-earthquake measures should be taken. l
Use steel framework for the cabinet of the equipment. There are locking devices to fix the boards in the cabinet.
l
The cabinet is reinforced with slide rail on the top and s at the bottom.
Lightning protection Chimneys, antennae or other things that are over 15 m tall on the top of the equipment room building should be designed according to the lightning protection requirements for civil buildings. Measures should be taken against direct flash and intrusion of lightning current. In the main high-rise transmission building, protective measures should be taken to prevent side lightning strokes, especially in frequent lightning areas. Therefore designers should take actual conditions into consideration and take appropriate measures. For example, connect the metal external window frame to the lightning protection wire; along the height of the building, place the lightning protection metal bands at a definite spacing on the outside wall, and so on. The main equipment-room building should be provided with the following lightning protection measures: l
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
The building should be installed with lightning arrester nets or bands at the positions susceptible to lightning strokes. Lightning prevention wires or lightning rods should be installed on the top of chimneys and antennas that are protruding from the building. The cross-sectional area of the grounding wire of the lightning protection device should not be smaller than 2 mm2, while the space between the wires not larger than 30 m.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-17
9 Operation Environment Requirements
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
l
The earth resistance of the earthing/grounding system is recommended to be less than 10 ohms, and the equipment grounding should be in accordance with national and local electrical codes as well.
l
Outdoor cables and metal pipes should be grounded before entering the building, and the outdoor overhead cables should be equipped with lightening protection devices at the inlet of the building.
l
It is suggested to use roof plates, beams and pillars made of reinforced concrete and the reinforcement bar as the ground wires of lightening arresters.
In the past lightning protection grounding of the building was separate from the grounding for telecommunication system and power supply system, and a large distance was required between the grounding objects. However, the distance requirement is not satisfied due to small space of the building. In fact, they cannot be separated in most cases, so t grounding system is recommended for the lightening protection grounding of the building. The t grounding system shall connect the telecommunication BGND, PGND, lightning protection grounding of the building, and grounding of the power frequency AC power supply system. A high earth resistance of the t grounding system is required. The earth resistance required by telecommunication is far lower than 10 ohms, and the grounding requirements for different telecommunication devices vary, so the resistance of the t grounding system should be determined according to the minimum resistance required for the grounding device. It is recommended to use steel bars in the walls and pillars of the building as ground wires for lightening protection. These wires should be electrically connected so as to equalize the electric potential in the building.
9-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10
10 Grounding Specifications
Grounding Specifications
About This Chapter Suitable grounding helps to avoid accidental personal injury and guarantee the safe running of the equipment, and provide EMC shielding to improve the quality of service (QoS). 10.1 General Grounding Specifications This section introduces the general grounding specifications. 10.2 Grounding Specifications for the Building This section introduces the grounding specifications for the building. 10.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications This section introduces the equipment grounding specifications. 10.4 Grounding Specifications for Office Power This section introduces the grounding specifications for office power 10.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables This section introduces the grounding specifications for signal cables. 10.6 Specifications for Managing Ground Cables This section introduces the Specifications for managing ground cables.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10 Grounding Specifications
10.1 General Grounding Specifications This section introduces the general grounding specifications. General grounding specifications, as shown in Table 10-1. Table 10-1 General grounding specifications No.
Description
1
Working ground, protection ground (including shielding ground and lightning ground) should be bonded to the same grounding electrode.
2
Cable racks, equipment frames and enclosures, metallic air ducts and doors and windows in the equipment room should be grounded.
3
All the metallic equipment units that are normally neutral should be grounded.
4
The ground cables should firmly with the grounding bar in the equipment.
5
Connection to the already grounded equipment for grounding purpose is not allowed.
10.2 Grounding Specifications for the Building This section introduces the grounding specifications for the building. Grounding specifications for the building, as shown in Table 10-2. Table 10-2 Grounding specifications for the building No.
Description
1
Usually, the earth resistance of the telecommunication site where the base station equipment is located is recommended to be less than 10 ohm. It also should comply with the relative stipulation of the country.
10.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications This section introduces the equipment grounding specifications. Equipment grounding specifications, as shown in Table 10-3.
10-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10 Grounding Specifications
Table 10-3 Equipment grounding specifications No.
Description
1
All the network telecommunications equipment including mobile base station, transmission equipment, switching equipment and office power should be grounded. All the protection grounds (PGNDs) of such equipment should be finally bonded to a general grounding bar. The PGNDs in an equipment room should be bonded to the general grounding bar in the same equipment room.
2
The PGND of the equipment should be connected to the nearby grounding bar (supplied). Copper-core conducting cable with green-yellow plastic insulation cover should be used. The cross-sectional area of the conductive cable is required to be 25 mm2 or wider.
3
The grounding terminals at the front door, back door and side s of the cabinet should be separately connected to the grounding post of the cabinet. The crosssectional area of the cable is required to be 1.6 mm2.
4
The metallic units of the equipment cabinet should have good conductance. Any nonconductive paint should be removed from the metal-to-metal .
5
The cabinets the adjacent cabinets in a row through the fixing bolts and washers on the cabinet top. A surface of 30 x 50 mm2 around the bolt holes should not be covered with paint. Rust-proof and rot-proof measures should be taken. The surface of the washer and nut should be plated with nickel to ensure good electrical conductance.
6
When the cabinets of the same type are connected, cables not longer than 300 mm should be used to connect the grounding busbars of adjacent cabinets, if these busbars exist. The cross-sectional area of the short cables is required to be 6 mm2. Two ends of the short cable should be secured to the terminals of the grounding bar.
10.4 Grounding Specifications for Office Power This section introduces the grounding specifications for office power Grounding specifications for office power, as shown in Table 10-4. Table 10-4 Grounding specifications for office power
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
No.
Description
1
TN-S AC power system should be adopted in the equipment room.
2
A C-level AC lightning protector with rated current not less than 20 KA should be installed at the AC power cable inlet of the equipment room.
3
PGNDs of the office power and telecommunications equipment should finally connect to the same grounding electrode. Grounds of telecommunications equipment and office power in an equipment room should be bonded to the grounding bar in the same equipment room.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10 Grounding Specifications
No.
Description
4
Lightning-proof circuit should be added to AC power interface.
5
The positive electrode of -48V/-60V DC power or the negative electrode of 24 DC power should be grounded at the DC power outlet.
6
The working ground and PGND of DC power system and the PGND of switching equipment should finally connect to the same grounding electrode. Grounds of telecommunications equipment and office power in an equipment room should be bonded to the grounding bar in the same equipment room.
7
Surge-proof circuit should be added to DC power interface.
10.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables This section introduces the grounding specifications for signal cables. Grounding specifications for signal cables, as shown in Table 10-5. Table 10-5 Grounding specifications for signal cables No.
Description
1
In the case that the digital trunk line of the transmission equipment connects to the wireless base station, no matter directly or indirectly, then E1 lightning protector should be installed in the corresponding interface of the transmission equipment.
2
The outside cable should have metallic protection cover and two ends of the cover should be well grounded. The end in the equipment room can be connected to the grounding bar in the equipment room. Lightning protector should be installed in the interface connecting the coming cable. The ground cable of the lightning protector should be as short as possible.
3
Both the outer conductor of coaxial cable and the metal shield of shielded cable should firmly with the metal surface of the target equipment.
4
Idle wire pair in the signal cable should be grounded in the equipment room.
5
The TDA tone cable should through the main distribution frame (MDF) that has a security unit before it goes out the office. Metal shield of the cable should connect with the PGND of the MDF. The MDF and the cabinet should share the same grounding electrode.
6
Overhead signal cables in the telecommunications office or mobile base station area is not allowed.
10.6 Specifications for Managing Ground Cables This section introduces the Specifications for managing ground cables. Specifications for managing ground cables, as shown in Table 10-6. 10-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
10 Grounding Specifications
Table 10-6 Specifications for managing ground cables
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
No.
Description
1
Ground cables should be routed separately with signal cables.
2
Ground cables should not be routed into the equipment room through overhead cable trays. They should be routed under ground or inside the room.
3
The PGNG cable must be a tless copper-core cable. Installing connectors, splices or breakers to ground cables is not allowed.
4
The PGND cable should use copper-core conducting cable with green-yellow plastic insulation cover.
5
The neutral wire of the AC power cable should not connect with the PGNDs of the telecommunications equipment in the equipment room.
6
The PGND cable should be as short as possible (no more than 30 m). Otherwise, the should adjust the position of grounding bar.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
11
11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
About This Chapter Introduces the requirements of cabling and bundling the cables. 11.1 The Requirements of Cabling Describes the method and requirements of cable routing. 11.2 The Requirements of Bundling Describes the method and requirements of cable binding.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-1
11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
11.1 The Requirements of Cabling Describes the method and requirements of cable routing. l
For equipment room installed with s and ESD protection floor, cables can be arranged in downward mode. That is, all cables can be routed through the interlayer of the floor or the cable trough. If the upward cabling mode is adopted, cabling rack is required above the cabinet for holding cables.
l
The specifications and cross-sectional area of the cable, and the route and position for cabling should be designed beforehand.
l
All cables should be arranged neatly, with their sheaths remaining intact.
l
Communication cables, such as alarm cables, network cables and clock cables, should be arranged separately with the power cable and optical fibers.
l
Turnings of the cable should be smooth, with the bend radius reaching 60mm or above.
l
Any damage to the insulation layer of the conducting line is not allowed.
l
The cable arrangement should take the future maintenance and capacity expansion into consideration.
11.2 The Requirements of Bundling Describes the method and requirements of cable binding. l
Bundling of the cable should be tidy, clear and elegant. As a general rule, cables are grouped by types, or grouped as needed when they are in a large number. Bind them with cable ties and route them in either upward or downward cabling mode in the cabling area at the two sides of the cabinet.
l
Cables must be bundled when arranged in ducts. Bind the cables closely with appropriate tightness. The space between the cable ties should be even and the overall appearance of the cabling nice.
l
You may not bind the cables when arranged in cable troughs. But they should be placed tidy and straight in the trough with no crossover. Moreover, the cables can not overflow the trough. At two ends and turnings of the trough, use a plastic clip for the cables.
l
Cables both inside and outside the cabinet must be bundled. Keep the cables bundled closely and neatly.
l
Use cable ties of different specifications for cables according to actual circumstances.
l
Do not connect two cable ties in bundling. Otherwise, the binding strength will be weakened.
l
After the bundling, cut the remaining part of the cable tie smoothly, removing all burrs.
l
The space between the cable ties is even and is three or four times the size of the bundle diameter.
l
When making turning for the bundled cable, keep the bend radius as big as possible to avoid breaking the cable cores at the turning.
Figure 11-1 shows the specific operation of bundling.
11-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
11 The Requirements of Cabling and Bundling
Figure 11-1 Cable bundling
1. No cable tie at turning
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
2. Cable tie
3. Burr
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4. Cut smoothly
11-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12
12 Engineering Labels
Engineering Labels
About This Chapter Engineering labels are affixed to both ends of various cables to identify the physical positions of cables on different devices. There are two types of engineering labels, specialized for the power cables and signal cables respectively. The power cables include –48 V / –60 V power cables, power ground cables (BGND) and protection ground cables (PGND). The signal cables include external alarm cables, network cables, clock cables, optical fibers and so on. Engineering labels for cables ensure the orderly and correct installation of cables of equipment and facilitate the easy subsequent equipment maintenance and inspection. NOTE
In case there is special requirement from the of the equipment on the description method of the labels, the labels should be printed accordingly. However, this must be stated in the self-check report.
12.1 Introduction to Labels Introduces the labels used in the equipment. 12.2 Information Carried on Labels This section gives the information carried on labels for signal cable and power cable. 12.3 Filling Information on Labels This section describes how to fill information on labels. The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout. 12.4 Affixing Labels After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the bottom page and affix it to the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. 12.5 Common Engineering Labels This section describes the common engineering labels. The other labels are omitted in this part. You can perform the operation as required on site.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
12.1 Introduction to Labels Introduces the labels used in the equipment. 12.1.1 Material This section describes the requirements for the thickness, color, materials, ambient temperature, and fill-in method of the labels. 12.1.2 Type and Shape There are two types of engineering labels for power cables and signal cables respectively.
12.1.1 Material This section describes the requirements for the thickness, color, materials, ambient temperature, and fill-in method of the labels. l
Material: Polyester (PET), with UL and CSA certifications
l
Color: chalk white
l
Thickness: 0.09 mm
l
Ambient temperature: –29 to 149 degrees Celsius
l
Laser printing or handwriting with oiliness markers
12.1.2 Type and Shape There are two types of engineering labels for power cables and signal cables respectively.
Label for Signal Cables The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure 12-1.
12-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Figure 12-1 Label for signal cables 84.0 7.5 7.0 5.5 (2)
5.5
10.0
11.0 11.0
TO:
1.5 (2)
(1)
0.6
5.5 5.5
1.0
7.0 7.5
(1) 2.0
37.0 Unit：mm
1.Dividing line
2.Cut dotted line
The dividing lines on the label help to specify more clearly the position of a cable. For example, there is one between the cabinet number and the frame number and another one between the frame number and the slot number. The dividing line is 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm in size with the color of PONTONE 656c (light blue). The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixing it to the cable, and its size is 1.0 mm x 2.0 mm. There is a mark "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label. The mark is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.
Label for Power Cables The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the cable ties that are bundled to the cable. The identification plate has an embossment of 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm around (symmetric on both sides), and the area in the middle is for affixing the label, as shown in Figure 12-2.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Figure 12-2 Label for power cables 10
26.2
TO:
11
12.2
(2)
0.6
R1.0
25
1.5
(1) 100
(3)
1.Cable tie
2.Label
0.6
3.Dividing line on the label
12.2 Information Carried on Labels This section gives the information carried on labels for signal cable and power cable. 12.2.1 For Power Cables Labels for power cables are only affixed on one side of the identification plates. On the labels, there is information (the part after the mark "TO:") about the location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control cabinet, distribution box or power socket. 12.2.2 For Signal Cables The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. 12.2.3 Remarks To use labels, focus on the following points.
12.2.1 For Power Cables Labels for power cables are only affixed on one side of the identification plates. On the labels, there is information (the part after the mark "TO:") about the location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control cabinet, distribution box or power socket.
12.2.2 For Signal Cables The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. The information is given like this:
12-4
l
Area 1 contains the location information of local end of the cable.
l
Area 2 (with the mark "TO:") contains the location information of the opposite end of the cable. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide l
12 Engineering Labels
Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.
Printed parts on the label for signal cables, as shown in Figure 12-3. Figure 12-3 Label for signal cables Area 1
Area 3
TO:
Area 2
Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the right side of the cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the location information of the opposite end, and the other side carries the location information of the local end. Therefore, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable, and vice versa. In other words, the local information at one end is called the opposite information at the other end.
12.2.3 Remarks To use labels, focus on the following points. l
When printing/writing and affixing labels, pay attention to keep the labels clean.
l
Since the label paper is made of moistureproof and waterproof material, ink-jet printers and ink pens are forbidden for printing and writing labels.
l
Labels should be affixed with good order in alignment.
l
Cable ties should be bundled in the same position of power cables, with identification plates on the same side.
l
The positions of "up", "down", "right" or "left" are all based on the viewpoint of the engineering person who is working on the label.
12.3 Filling Information on Labels This section describes how to fill information on labels. The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout. 12.3.1 Printing Labels Use a laser printer to print the label according to the template. 12.3.2 Writing Labels Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the equipment to write the labels. For easy recognition and good-looking, the font in handwriting should be close to the standard typeface as much as possible.
12.3.1 Printing Labels Use a laser printer to print the label according to the template. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Template for the Printing Template is available to print out the label. You can obtain the template by: l
ing the template from http://.huawei.com. The directory of the template is Documentation > Engineering Service > Engineering Quality > Quality Standard and Template.
l
Asking for the template from Huawei local office.
The template is written in Microsoft Word, as shown in Figure 12-4. Figure 12-4 Template of label
1 2
1.Cell
2.Cell
Cells Merging on the Template When using the template, you can directly modify the contents on the template, and the following should be observed: l
The settings of centered characters, direction, and fonts should not be changed.
l
When there are too many characters to be filled in, zoom out the characters, but make sure the printouts are clear and legible.
To merge the cells, you should first recover the table structure (if gridlines are displayed, you can start from Step 3 directly). 1.
Select the menu item Edit >Select All.
2.
Select the menu item Format > Borders and Shading >Borders. Select Box and click OK.
3.
Drag the mouse to select the cells to be merged and select the menu item Table > Merge Cells.
If two merged cells are still not enough to accommodate the characters, use multiple lines.
Requirements on the Printer To print the labels, laser jet printer must be used, although there is no restriction on the model of the printer. Before printing the label, set up the page and try the printing on ordinary blank paper (both sides are blank): 12-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
1.
Cover the blank paper onto the whole page of label paper, and check whether the page setup conforms to the requirement.
2.
Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have been set correctly.
3.
If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 12-5 appears before printing, click Ignore to continue the printing.
Figure 12-5 Warning prompt before printing
If the printout conforms to the requirement, print it to label paper. If the printout does not conform, adjust the page setup and try the printing again, until the correct printout is produced. The method of adjusting the page setup is as follows: 1.
Select the menu item File > Page Setup.
2.
Select the Margins tab page.
3.
Select Left for Gutter Position.
4.
Set Header and Footer to 0, and adjust the values of Top, Bottom, Left, and Right.
After the page setup has been made correct, save it for future use. This page setup is only necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.
Requirements on the Printed Label After you print the labels, check whether they comply with the template specifications: l
All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the bottom page of the label.
l
Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout, the dividing lines and the mark "TO:" should not be covered by the printed characters.
l
When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid covering the mark "TO:" when printing the texts by using the space bar to move the printing contents to the next line.
CAUTION Different from the ordinary paper, the label paper is composed of two pages. No matter what model of printer you are using, feed in the labels one after another by hand. Never use the autofeed mode in order to avoid jamming the labels. Different models of printers may have different feeding modes, make sure to feed in the labels correctly.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
12.3.2 Writing Labels Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the equipment to write the labels. For easy recognition and good-looking, the font in handwriting should be close to the standard typeface as much as possible.
Writing pen Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the device to write the labels. In special cases, black ball-pens are allowed, although not recommended. When writing with the ball-pen, take care not to leave the oil on the label, which may contaminate the label and blur the words. NOTE
The delivered marker has two nibs. Make sure to use the smaller nib to write the labels.
Handwriting For the sake of easy recognition and good looking, the font in handwriting should be close to the standard typeface as much as possible.Table 12-1 shows the standard typeface. Table 12-1 Standard typeface for handwriting 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
The font size depends on the number of figures and letters. The words must be medium-sized, legible, tidy and good-looking.
Writing direction Write the characters in proper size, and the direction is shown in Figure 12-6. Figure 12-6 Writing direction of the label
TO:
12.4 Affixing Labels After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the bottom page and affix it to the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. 12-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
12.4.1 Affixing the Label to the Signal Cable This section describes the positions where the labels should be affixed on the signal cables and the means by which the labels are folded. 12.4.2 Affixing the Label to the Power Cable This section describes the positions where the labels should be affixed on the power cables and the means by which the cable ties are bound to the power cables.
12.4.1 Affixing the Label to the Signal Cable This section describes the positions where the labels should be affixed on the signal cables and the means by which the labels are folded. The steps to affix the label to the cable are shown in Figure 12-7 The finished labels should be on the right or top of the cables, according to different cabling methods. The left part of the figures shows the method to affix the label when the cable is laid vertically, while the right part of the figures shows the method to affix the label when the cable is laid horizontally. It is recommended to paste a label at a point 2 cm from the connector. NOTE
In special cases, for example, to avoid cable bent or affecting other cables, other positions are allowed to affix the labels. l
Stick the label to the proper position on the cable, fold the narrow part of the label according to the directions shown in Figure 12-7.
Figure 12-7 Sticking the label onto proper position of the signal cable
1
2 TO: A03 33 33 33 33
(1)
1. Cable
(2)
(3)
2. Label
The length of the narrow part is based on an external cable diameter of 2.6 mm, after this part has been stuck to the back of the label, it may not overlap the entire printed part. l
Fold the printed part along the dotted line according to the directions shown in Figure 12-7.
l
After the printed part of the label has been folded, the narrow part of the label should be covered completely, as shown in Figure 12-7.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-9
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Fold the Label Fold the label upwards along the dashed line, and affix it. After being affixed, the label is shaped as (3) of Figure 12-7.
12.4.2 Affixing the Label to the Power Cable This section describes the positions where the labels should be affixed on the power cables and the means by which the cable ties are bound to the power cables. Remove the label from the bottom page, then affix it to the identification plate on the cable tie. The label should be stuck to the rectangular flute, and should be stuck to only one side of the identification plate. Make sure to affix the labels on the same side of the identification plates. The cable ties are bundled 2 cm from the connectors, and other positions are allowed in special circumstances. Cable ties should be bundled on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the finished identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling. Make sure the label is facing out, as shown in Figure 12-8. Figure 12-8 Appearance of affixed labels on power cables Cable
B03
TO:
TO: B03
-48V2
-48V2
Cable
12.5 Common Engineering Labels This section describes the common engineering labels. The other labels are omitted in this part. You can perform the operation as required on site. 12.5.1 Power Cables The labels are affixed to the DC cables that provide power for the cabinets, including the –48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable ties. 12.5.2 External Alarm Cables The external alarm cables are connected to the first subscriber cabinet of each row (used for power distribution). Labels posted on the first cabinet of each row should indicate which equipment is using the access terminal. 12.5.3 Ethernet Cables 12-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
The engineering label of the Ethernet cable is affixed to identify the Ethernet cable of the network port on a board. The label contains the following information: cabinet number, frame number, location number, physical slot number, and Ethernet port number. 12.5.4 Fibers Between Two Devices These labels are affixed to the fiber jumpers that connect the optical interfaces on the boards in a frame or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for fiber jumpers: one is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices, the other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF. 12.5.5 Fiber That Connects the Device and the ODF The label stuck on the fiber from the equipment to the ODF contains all necessary information on the cabinet and the ODF. 12.5.6 Trunk Cables The trunk cables include 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 cables, 120-ohm T1 cables, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/ s, 140 Mbit/s, 155 Mbit/s cables and 120-ohm to 75-ohm trunk cables, and clock cables. 12.5.7 Subscriber Cables The labels are affixed to both ends of the subscriber cables to identify the position of the cables on the device side and the main distribution frame (MDF) side.
12.5.1 Power Cables The labels are affixed to the DC cables that provide power for the cabinets, including the –48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable ties. Table 12-2 provides the information carried on the labels for the DC power cables. Table 12-2 Information on labels affixed to the DC power cables Content
Meaning
MN(BC) - -1
MN (BC): BC is written right under MN. On the loaded cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column number of the power distribution equipment such as the control cabinet and distribution box; BC identifies the row and column number of the –48 V connector (if there is no row number or column number, or the connector can be identified without them, BC can be omitted). BGND and PGND have no row and column number for identification. On the power cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the cabinet.
MN(BC) - -2 MN(BC) - BGND MN(BC) - PGND
The label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the control cabinet, or the distribution box. The information of the local end is not necessary. Table 12-2 lists the information of two –48 V power supplies on the label. The information for other DC voltages (such as 24 V, 60 V) should be provided in similar methods. Make sure that labels are affixed in correct direction. That is, after the cable ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same direction, as shown in Figure 12-9.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Figure 12-9 Example of the labels on the DC power cable TO: A01 B08
TO: B03
-48V2
The label on the loaded cabinet side, which carries the information about the position of the cable on the power distribution unit.
-48V2
The label on the distribution unit side, which carries the information about the position of the cable on the loaded cabinet side.
On the loaded cabinet side, the label marked with "A01/B08-–2" on the cable indicates that the cable is –48V2 DC supply, which is from the eighth connector on the second row of –48 V bus bar in the cabinet on Row A, and Column 1 in the equipment room. On the distribution unit side, the label marked with "B03--2" indicates that the cable is –2 DC supply, which is from the loaded cabinet on Row B, Column 03 in the equipment room. NOTE
l
In the power distribution unit (or the first power cabinet of a row in the transmission equipment room), every terminal block on the – connector bar has a numeric identification. For example, in the preceding label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes "8") is the numeric identification of the terminal block.
l
PGND and BGND are two copper bars on which the terminal blocks are connected. Regardless of which terminal is connected, it is necessary to provide the row and column numbers of the power distribution unit, instead of providing the specific serial number of the terminal block on the copper bar. For example, if the label on the loaded cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it indicates that the power cable is a BGND that connects the BGND copper bar in the power distribution unit on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room. Information on the labels for PGND cables should be given in a similar way.
12.5.2 External Alarm Cables The external alarm cables are connected to the first subscriber cabinet of each row (used for power distribution). Labels posted on the first cabinet of each row should indicate which equipment is using the access terminal. Labels are not required on the equipment side unless otherwise specified. In this case, fill in only Area 2 of the label. Table 12-3 provides the information of the labels of alarm box external cables. Table 12-3 Information on labels affixed to the external cables of the alarm box
12-12
Content
Meaning
Description
MN
MN: serial number of the cabinet in the equipment room
M: The cabinets going from front to back (in a row) in the equipment room are numbered from A to Z. N: The cabinets going from left to right (in a column) are numbered from 01 to 99. For example, "A01" indicates that the cabinet is located in Row A and Column 01.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
NOTE
The label on the alarm cable carries simple information, and only part of the text area needs to be filled in. It is recommended to keep the whole length of the label instead of cutting out the blank area. Figure 12-10 shows a label on the alarm cable, on which "A01" indicates that the alarm cable connects the first cabinet and the cabinet in Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room. Figure 12-10 Example of the label on the alarm cable
12.5.3 Ethernet Cables The engineering label of the Ethernet cable is affixed to identify the Ethernet cable of the network port on a board. The label contains the following information: cabinet number, frame number, location number, physical slot number, and Ethernet port number.
Meaning of the Label Table 12-4 provides the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the Ethernet cables that connect the boards in the frames. Table 12-4 Information on labels affixed to the Ethernet cables Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D
MN: cabinet number
A01
B: frame number
Numbered in top-down order with two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
D: Ethernet port number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
MN: cabinet number
B02
Z: location number
Indicates the valid location number of the site terminal device. If the cable is connected to a router in a cabinet, the serial numbers of the cabinet, the frame and the Ethernet interface of the router should be specified, for example, B02-03-12. If the cable is connected to the NMS, the specific location of the NMS should be provided.
MN-Z
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-13
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Example of the Label Figure 12-11 shows the label on the Ethernet cable. Figure 12-11 Example of the label on the Ethernet cable
"A01-03-10-05" indicates that on the local end of the Ethernet cable is connected to Ethernet Port 05, Slot 10, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room. "B02-03-12" indicates that the opposite end of the Ethernet cable is connected to Ethernet Port 12, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row B, and Column 02 in the equipment room.
12.5.4 Fibers Between Two Devices These labels are affixed to the fiber jumpers that connect the optical interfaces on the boards in a frame or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for fiber jumpers: one is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices, the other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF.
Meaning of the Label Table 12-5 provides the information on both the sides of the labels affixed to the fiber jumper that connects two devices. Table 12-5 Information on labels affixed to the fiber between two devices
12-14
Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T
MN: cabinet number
A01
B: frame number
Numbered in top-down order with two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
D: optical interface number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 05
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Content
12 Engineering Labels
Meaning
Example
R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface MN-B-C-D-R/T
MN: cabinet number B: frame number
The meanings are the same the meanings mentioned in the previous text. When the local device and the opposite end device are not in the same equipment room, MN can be the name of the equipment room.
C: physical slot number D: optical interface number R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface
Example of the Label Figure 12-12 shows the label on the fiber jumper between two devices. Figure 12-12 Example of the label on the fiber jumper between two devices
"A01-01-05-05-R" indicates that the local end of the fiber jumper is connected to Optical Receiving Interface 05 in Slot 5, Subrack 01 in the cabinet on Row A, and Column 01 in the equipment room. "G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the fiber jumper is connected to Optical Transmitting Interface 01 in Slot 01, Subrack 01 in the cabinet on Row G, and Column 01 in the equipment room.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
12.5.5 Fiber That Connects the Device and the ODF The label stuck on the fiber from the equipment to the ODF contains all necessary information on the cabinet and the ODF.
Meaning of the Label Table 12-6 provides the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the fiber jumper that connects the device and the ODF. Table 12-6 Information on labels affixed to the fiber between the device and the ODF Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T
MN: cabinet number
For example, A01
B: frame number
Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
D: optical interface number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 05
R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface ODF-MN-B-C-R/T
MN: row number and column number of ODF
M indicates a row that is numbered A to Z from front to back ordinally.
B: row number of the terminal device
Ranging from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01
N indicates a column that is numbered 01 to 99 from left to right ordinally, for example, G01 is the ODF of Row G and Column 01.
C: column number of the terminal device
12-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Content
12 Engineering Labels
Meaning
Example
R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface
Example of the Label Figure 12-13 shows the label on the fiber jumper between the device and the ODF. Figure 12-13 Example of the label on the fiber jumper between the device and the ODF
"ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the fiber jumper is connected to the optical receiving terminal on Row 01, Column 01 of the ODF in Row G and Column 01 in the equipment room. "A01-01-05-05-R" indicates that the opposite end of the fiber jumper is connected to Optical Receiving Interface 5 on Slot 05, frame 01 in the cabinet in Row A and Column 01 in the equipment room.
12.5.6 Trunk Cables The trunk cables include 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 cables, 120-ohm T1 cables, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/ s, 140 Mbit/s, 155 Mbit/s cables and 120-ohm to 75-ohm trunk cables, and clock cables. There are two types of labels for trunk cables. One type is used for the trunk cable connecting two devices, such as the trunk board and built-in transmission unit. The labels are stuck at both ends of one cable and indicate the positions of the two ends at the equipment side or at the two trunk boards in equipment. The other type is used for the cable connecting the device and the digital distribution frame (DDF). The labels are stuck at both ends of one cable and indicate the position of the two ends at the equipment and the DDF.
Meaning of the Label Table 12-7 provides the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the trunk cable that connects two devices. Table 12-8 provides the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the trunk cable that connects the device and the DDF.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-17
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Table 12-7 Information on labels affixed to the trunk cable between two devices Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T
MN: cabinet number
A01
B: frame number
Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
D: cable number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 12
R: optical receiving interface
-
MN-B-C-D-R/T
T: optical transmitting interface MN-B-C-D-R/T
R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface
Table 12-8 Information on labels affixed to the trunk cable between the device and the DDF Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D-R/T
MN: cabinet number
A01
B: frame number
Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
D: cable number
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with two digits, for example, 05
R: optical receiving interface
-
T: optical transmitting interface
12-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Content
Meaning
Example
DDF-MN-B-CD/R/T
MN: row number and column number of the DDF
M indicates a row that is numbered A to Z from front to back ordinally.
B: row number of the terminal
Ranging from 01 to 99, for example: 01-01
N indicates a column that is numbered 01 to 99 from left to right ordinally, for example, G01 is the DDF of Row G and Column 01.
C: column number of the terminal DDF-MN-B-CD/R/T
D: direction A or B R: optical receiving interface
There is such a mark in the DDF: A: indicating that the DDF terminals are connected to the optical network equipment B: indicating that the DDF terminals are connected to the switching equipment
T: optical transmitting interface
Example of the Label Figure 12-14 shows the label on the trunk cable between two devices. Figure 12-14 Example of the label on the trunk cable between two devices
"G01-01-05-12-T" indicates that the local end of the trunk cable is connected to the transmitting terminal of Trunk Cable 12 on Slot 05, Frame 01 in the cabinet in Row G, Column 01 in the equipment room. "D02-01-01-10-R" indicates that the opposite end of the trunk cable is connected to the receiving terminal of Trunk Cable 10 on Slot 01, Frame 01 in cabinet in Row D, Column 02 in the equipment room. Figure 12-15 shows the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF. Figure 12-15 Example of the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-19
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
"A01-03-01-01-R" indicates that local end of the trunk cable is connected to the receiving terminal of Trunk Cable 01 in Slot 01, Frame 03 of the cabinet in Row A, and Column 01 in the equipment room. "DDF-G01-01-01-AR" indicates that the opposite end of the trunk cable connects the receiving terminal of Direction A (connected to optical network equipment) in Row 01, and Column 01 of the DDF on Row G and Column 01 in the equipment room.
12.5.7 Subscriber Cables The labels are affixed to both ends of the subscriber cables to identify the position of the cables on the device side and the main distribution frame (MDF) side.
Meaning of the Label Table 12-9 provides the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the subscriber cables. Table 12-9 Information on labels affixed to the subscriber cables Content
Meaning
Example
MN-B-C-D
MN: cabinet number
A01
B: frame number
Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 03
C: physical slot number
Numbered in top-bottom and left-right order in two digits, for example, 01
D: cable number
Numbered in top-bottom and left-right order with two digits, for example, 01
MN: row number and column number of MDF
M indicates a row that is numbered A to Z from front to back ordinally.
B: row number of the terminal
Ranging from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01
MDF-MN-BC
N indicates a column that is numbered 01 to 99 from left to right ordinally. For example, G01 is the MDF of Row G and Column 01.
C: column number of the terminal
Example of the Label Figure 12-16 shows the label on the subscriber cable.
12-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
12 Engineering Labels
Figure 12-16 Example of the label on the subscriber cable
TO:
"A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the subscriber cable is connected to Terminal 01 on Slot 1, Frame 03 of the cabinet in Row A, and Column 01 in the equipment room. "MDF-G01-01-01" indicates that the opposite end of the cable is connected to the terminal on Row 01, Column 01 of the MDF in Row G, and Column 01 in the equipment room.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-21
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
13
Binding Strap
About This Chapter This chapter introduces the architecture and usage of the binding strap, as well as precautions for bundling the optical fibers.
CAUTION To avoid any human-caused accidents, read this chapter carefully before bundling the fiber jumpers. 13.1 Binding Strap The section describes the architecture and cutting of the binding strap. 13.2 Bundling the Binding Strap This section describes how to bund the binding strap.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
13.1 Binding Strap The section describes the architecture and cutting of the binding strap. 13.1.1 Architecture The binding strap fulfills its locking function by cooperation of these two sides. 13.1.2 Cutting This procedure cutting the binding strap after installing the fiber jumpers.
13.1.1 Architecture The binding strap fulfills its locking function by cooperation of these two sides. The binding strap for optical fiber is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (black nylon material). The architecture of the binding strap ,as shown in Figure 13-1. Figure 13-1 Binding strap
1
2 1. Hook side
2. Mat side
13.1.2 Cutting This procedure cutting the binding strap after installing the fiber jumpers.
Prerequisite None
Tools, Equipment and Materials
13-2
l
Cutterbar
l
Binding strap Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
Precautions NOTE
You can use a pair of scissors if there is no cutterbar on site.
Procedure Step 1 Install the binding strap on the plastic axis of the cutterbar, as shown in Figure 13-2. Figure 13-2 Install binding strap on cutterbar
1
2
3
1. Binding strap
2. Plastic axis
3. Cutterbar
Step 2 Roll the binding strap and allow it to through the guiding trough of the cutterbar. Step 3 Cut the binding strap into appropriate length by slantly hauling the binding strap towards the cutter tooth of the cutterbar, as shown in Figure 13-3. Figure 13-3 Cut the binding strap
1
2
3 1. Binding strap
2. Guiding trough
3. Cutter tooth
----End
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
13.2 Bundling the Binding Strap This section describes how to bund the binding strap. 13.2.1 Procedures for Bundling the Binding Strap This procedure describes how to bind bundling of the binding strap 13.2.2 Expected Result The section describes the expected result of the binding strap. 13.2.3 Precautions Bundle the fibers as the follow items.
13.2.1 Procedures for Bundling the Binding Strap This procedure describes how to bind bundling of the binding strap
Prerequisite None
Tools, Equipment and Materials l
Optical fiber
l
Binding strap
Precautions NOTE
When you use a binding strap, keep the mat side inside and the hook side outside.
Procedure Step 1 Arrange the optical fibers into a bundle. Step 2 Cut off a piece of binding strap of appropriate length according to the size of the bundle. Step 3 Hold the fiber bundle with one hand and press one end of the binding strap on the bundle with the thumb. Step 4 Strain the binding strap by the other end with the other hand, as shown in Figure 13-4.
13-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
Figure 13-4 Step 2 of bundling optical fiber
Step 5 Turn the binding strap around the fiber bundle with appropriate strain till the mat side adhibits the hook side snugly, as shown in Figure 13-5. Figure 13-5 Step 3 of bundling optical fiber
----End
13.2.2 Expected Result The section describes the expected result of the binding strap. Figure 13-6 shows the bundling result. Figure 13-6 Bundling result of optical fiber
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
13 Binding Strap
13.2.3 Precautions Bundle the fibers as the follow items.
13-6
l
It is only the mat side of the binding strap that s the optical fiber.
l
Arrange the optical fibers tidily into a bundle before bundling.
l
Bundle the optical fibers with appropriate tightness. Never bind them too tight.
l
The space between two binding straps should not exceed 40 cm.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Making and Testing the Cable Connector
About This Chapter This appendix describes how to make the BNC, SMB and L9 connectors for the coaxial cables, and how to test the coaxial cables with connectors at both ends. 14.1 Making the Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the BNC, SMB and L9 connectors for the coaxial cables. 14.2 Continuity Test of the Coaxial Cable This section considers the continuity test of the cable with the DB44 connector at one end and the SMB connector at the other end as an example to describe how to test the continuity of the cable by using the multimeter.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-1
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14.1 Making the Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the BNC, SMB and L9 connectors for the coaxial cables. 14.1.1 Making the Straight BNC Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the straight BNC male connector for the coaxial cable. 14.1.2 Making the L9-M Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describe how to make the L9-M male connector for the coaxial cable. 14.1.3 Making the Straight SMB Female Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the straight SMB female connector for the coaxial cable.
14.1.1 Making the Straight BNC Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the straight BNC male connector for the coaxial cable.
Prerequisite l
The DDF in the equipment room must be installed properly and the required interfaces must be reserved.
l
The interface type must be a straight BNC connector.
Tools/Instruments l
Coaxial cable
l
Wire stripper
l
BNC connector
Required/As Needed As needed.
Context Figure 14-1 shows the components of the straight BNC male connector and the coaxial cable.
14-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-1 BNC connector and the coaxial cable
A Heat shrink tube
B Crimping sleeve
C Connector
E External conductor of the coaxial cable
F Insulation layer of the coaxial cable
G Internal conductor of the coaxial cable
D Protection tube of the coaxial cable
Procedure Step 1 Based on the coaxial cable materials and sizes, strip off the coaxial cable. The external conductor, insulation layer and internal conductor of the coaxial cable are displayed. See Figure 14-2. For the length of the reserved external conductor (L1), the length of the reserved insulation layer (L2) and the length of the stripped sleeve (L3), refer to Table 14-1. Figure 14-2 Stripping off the coaxial cable
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
CAUTION l
When stripping the sleeve off the coaxial cable, avoid scratching the external conductor of the coaxial cable.
l
Determine the stripping size of the cable based on the size of the connector. See Figure 14-3.
Table 14-1 Stripping sizes of the common coaxial cables Cable Type
External Diameter of the Coaxial Cable
L1 (mm)
L2 (mm)
L3 (mm)
Remarks
SYFVZ-75-1-1(A)
2.2 mm
5 to 6
7 to 9
10 to 12
-
SYV-75-2-2
3.9 mm
5 to 6
7 to 9
10 to 12
National trunk 155M-I
SYV-75-4-2
6.7 mm
5 to 6
7 to 9
10 to 12
National trunk 155M-III
SFYV-75-2-1
3.2 mm
5 to 6
7 to 9
10 to 12
National trunk-II
SFYV-75-2-2
4.4 mm
5 to 6
7 to 9
10 to 12
National trunk 155M-II
Figure 14-3 Size of the straight BNC male connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable
Step 2 Lead the heat shrink tube and crimping sleeve along the coaxial cable. See Figure 14-4.
14-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-4 Leading the heat shrink tube and crimping sleeve through
Step 3 Unfold the external conductor of the coaxial cable into a trumpet shape. See Figure 14-5. Figure 14-5 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable
Step 4 Insert the insulation layer and internal conductor into the connector of the coaxial cable. The external conductor of the coaxial cable partly wraps that of the connector. See Figure 14-6. Figure 14-6 Inserting the straight BNC male connector into the coaxial cable
Step 5 Use a welding tool to weld the internal conductor of the coaxial cable with that of the coaxial cable connector. See Figure 14-7.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-5
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 14-7 Welding the internal conductor
Step 6 Push the crimping sleeve in the direction of the connector. Crimp the external conductor of the coaxial cable tight. Use a crimping tool to tighten the crimping sleeve and the coaxial cable connector. See Figure 14-8. Figure 14-8 Crimping the external conductor
Step 7 Use a heat gun to blow the heat shrink tube so that the tube can tightly clad the crimping sleeve. See Figure 14-9. Figure 14-9 Blowing the heat shrink tube
Step 8 Install the components of the coaxial cable to the equipment. See Figure 14-10.
14-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-10 Installing the components of the coaxial cable
----End
14.1.2 Making the L9-M Male Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describe how to make the L9-M male connector for the coaxial cable.
Prerequisite l
The DDF in the equipment room must be installed properly, with interfaces reserved for use.
l
The interface type must be a straight L9-M connector.
Tools/Instruments l
Wire stripper
l
Coaxial cable
l
L9-M male connector
Required/As Needed As needed.
Context Figure 14-11 shows the components of the straight L9 male connector and the coaxial cable.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-7
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-11 L9-M connector and the coaxial cable
A Protection tube of the connector
B Crimping sleeve
E External conductor of the F Insulation layer of the coaxial cable coaxial cable
C Connector
D Protection tube of the coaxial cable
G Internal conductor of the coaxial cable
Procedure Step 1 Based on the coaxial cable materials and sizes, strip off the coaxial cable. The external conductor, insulation layer and internal conductor of the coaxial cable are displayed. See Figure 14-12. For the length of the reserved external conductor (L1), the length of the reserved insulation layer (L2) and the length of the stripped sleeve (L3), see Table 14-1. Figure 14-12 Stripping off the coaxial cable
14-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
CAUTION l
When stripping the sleeve off the coaxial cable, avoid scratching the external conductor or the insulation layer of the coaxial cable.
l
Determine the stripping size of the cable based on the size of the connector. See Figure 14-13.
Figure 14-13 Size of the connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable
Step 2 Lead the protection tube and crimping sleeve along the coaxial cable. See Figure 14-14. Figure 14-14 Leading the protection tube and crimping sleeve through
Step 3 Unfold the external conductor of the coaxial cable into a trumpet shape. See Figure 14-15. Figure 14-15 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable
Step 4 Insert the insulation layer and internal conductor into the connector of the coaxial cable. The external conductor of the coaxial cable partly wraps that of the connector. See Figure 14-16. Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-9
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Figure 14-16 Inserting the coaxial connector into the coaxial cable
Step 5 Use a welding tool to weld the internal conductor of the coaxial cable with that of the coaxial connector. See Figure 14-17. Figure 14-17 Welding the internal conductor
Welding Step 6 Push the crimping sleeve in the direction of the connector. Crimp the external conductor of the coaxial cable tight. Use a crimping tool to tighten the crimping sleeve and the coaxial cable connector. See Figure 14-18. Figure 14-18 Crimping the external conductor
Step 7 Push the protection tube forward till it is secured to the thread of the connector. See Figure 14-19.
14-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-19 Rotating the protection tube tight
----End
14.1.3 Making the Straight SMB Female Connector for the Coaxial Cable This section describes how to make the straight SMB female connector for the coaxial cable.
Prerequisite l
The DDF in the equipment room must be installed properly, with interfaces reserved for use.
l
The interface type must be a straight SMB connector.
Tools/Instruments l
Wire stripper
l
Coaxial cable
l
Straight SMB connector
Required/As Needed As needed.
Context Figure 14-20 shows the components of the straight SMB female connector and the coaxial cable.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-11
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-20 Components of the straight SMB female connector and the coaxial cable
A
B
C
F
E
D
A Crimping sleeve
B Connector
D External conductor of the coaxial E Insulation layer of the coaxial cable cable
C Protection tube of the coaxial cable F Internal conductor of the coaxial cable
Procedure Step 1 Based on the coaxial cable materials and sizes, strip off the coaxial cable. The external conductor, insulation layer and internal conductor of the coaxial cable are displayed. See Figure 14-21. For the length of the reserved external conductor (L1), the length of the reserved insulation layer (L2) and the length of the stripped sleeve (L3), see Table 14-1. Figure 14-21 Stripping off the coaxial cable L3 L2 L1
C D F
E
CAUTION
14-12
l
When stripping the sleeve off the coaxial cable, avoid scratching the external conductor or the insulation layer of the coaxial cable.
l
Determine the stripping size of the cable based on the size of the connector. See Figure 14-22.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
Figure 14-22 Size of the connector and the stripping size of the coaxial cable
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
Step 2 Lead the crimping tube along the coaxial cable. See Figure 14-23. Figure 14-23 Leading the crimping sleeve through
C A
Step 3 Unfold the external conductor of the coaxial cable into a trumpet shape. See Figure 14-24. Figure 14-24 Unfolding the external conductor of the coaxial cable
D
Step 4 Insert the insulation layer and internal conductor into the connector of the coaxial cable. The external conductor of the coaxial cable partly wraps that of the connector. See Figure 14-25. Figure 14-25 Inserting the coaxial connector into the coaxial cable
B
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-13
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
Step 5 Use a welding tool to weld internal conductor "F" of the coaxial cable with that of coaxial connector "B". See Figure 14-26. Figure 14-26 Welding the internal conductor
Step 6 Push the crimping sleeve in the direction of the connector. Crimp the external conductor of the coaxial cable tight. Use a crimping tool to tighten the crimping sleeve and the coaxial cable connector. See Figure 14-27. Figure 14-27 Crimping the external conductor
A
Step 7 After the components of the coaxial cable are processed, install them on the equipment. See Figure 14-28. Figure 14-28 Installing the components of the coaxial cable
----End
14-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
14 Making and Testing the Cable Connector
14.2 Continuity Test of the Coaxial Cable This section considers the continuity test of the cable with the DB44 connector at one end and the SMB connector at the other end as an example to describe how to test the continuity of the cable by using the multimeter.
Prerequisite During the cable routing, bundling and connector installing, open or broken circuits may occur in the cable. Therefore, you must test the coaxial cable after the earlier procedures are completed.
Tools/Instruments Multimeter
Required/As Needed Required
Procedure Step 1 Set the multimeter to the resistance position. Step 2 At the SMB connector, connect the two electro probes of the multimeter to the internal and external conductors respectively. Step 3 Based on the pin number table of the DB44 connector, use the shorted line to short circuit the two pins corresponding to the SMB connectors. See Figure 14-29. Figure 14-29 Testing the coaxial cable
Short circuit pin No.23 adn 38
A
Equipment side
R1
DDF side
Step 4 Read the multimeter. The resistance should be 0 ohm. Step 5 Remove the shorted line from the DB44 connector. Read the multimeter. The resistance should be infinite. Step 6 Repeat steps 2–5 to test other SMB connectors. ----End Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-15
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
A Glossary
A
Glossary
1 19-inch cabinet
A cabinet which is 19 inches in width and 600 mm in depth, compliant with the standards of the IEC297.
A alarm
A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or an emergency has occurred.
antistatic floor
The floor which is ESD preventive.
attenuator
A ive component that attenuates an electrical or optical signal.
B binding strap
The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
binding
In virtual concatenated payload configuration, to specify one binding number to identify the VC4s of the same virtual concatenated payload. If a fault occurs to one of the bound services, all bound services will switch as a whole.
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that minimises the number of synchronization links entering an office. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.
C
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
cabling frame
The frame which is used for cable routing over the cabinet.
cabling hole
A hole which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
cabling trough
The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
A Glossary
cabling
The methods to route the cables or fibers.
centralized alarm system
The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.
connection
A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional connections" capable of simultaneously transferring information in opposite directions between their respective inputs and outputs.
corrugated pipe
A plastic pipe which is used for fiber routing.
D DDF
Digital Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer cables.
downward cabling Route cables or fibers between the rack and other equipments from the bottom of the cabinet.
E ejector lever
A component at the two ends of the front of a board, which is used for inserting or removing the board.
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge. The phenomena the energy being produced by electrostatic resource discharge instantly.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
G guide slot
A slot on the expansion bolt.
I isolation
A nonreciprocal optical device intended to suppress backward reflections along an optical fiber transmission line while having minimum insertion loss in the forward direction.
L laser
The device that generates the directional light covering a narrow range of wavelengths. Laser light is more coherent than ordinary light. Semiconductor diode lasers are the used light source in fiber-optic system.
M
A-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP Optical Transmission System Installation Guide
MSTP
A Glossary
Multi-service transmission platform. It is based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of these services.
O ODF
Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
P power distribution A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, box which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. It is another name of power box. process
A generic term for a collection of actions.
protection grounding cable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
R route
The path a trail takes.
S slide rail
A component in the cabinet, which is used to place the subrack.
The frame on the bottom of a cabinet, when installing the cabinet on the antistatic floor.
U upward cabling
Cables or fibers connect the rack with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
W
Issue 02 (2008-09-10)
washer
A washer which is used to level the cabinet.
winding pipe
A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-3
Related Documents c2h70
Huawei Optix Metro 1000 Installation Guide(v300r005) 231e30
December 2019 24
Huawei Metro-1000 Laboratorio 1 18251d
December 2019 36
Huawei Optix Ptn 950 Installation Guide(v100r005) x704j
December 2020 0
Metro 100-500-1000 5s604m
December 2019 41
Huawei Optix Osn 3500.pdf 4o673e
December 2021 0